Home

SMC-50 Smart Motor Controller

1. 71 2 Li 1 SMC 50 Soft TA a Protective Starter uses optiona Device T4 OB oc o a Line Power T3 6 L3 5 Isolation Contactor 1 120 240V AC Control Transformer or AC Power Supply f o wig 1 Sto eo e e o N Start OL o O O 2 i1 if o sl 7 6 5 z 882g LW QH j4 y E g Aux2 Aux1 E 2 8 a Control Module Standard I O O lE e Ai a2 a3 a4 A5 AG a7 AB AQ AIO A11 A12 gt z2 4 I I I NC Q AuxA1 AuxA2 AuxA3 AC Inputs Auxilliary Relay Outputs 150 SM4 Option I O Module Customer supplied See the controller nameplate to verify the control power input ratings 100 240V AC Terminal A2 InA2 100 240V AC input is configured for START input using Parameter 7 3 control module port 7 Terminal A1 InA1 100 240V AC input configured for COAST STOP OPTION etc using Parameter 7 2 contro module port 7 NOTE The controller will generate an 1 0 configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is configured for COAST or STOP Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation e g the isolation contactor us
2. Parameter Information Appendix B Table 136 Parameter 95 113 Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access 0 1 99 0 The time period that Real Power must drop below MWatts Un F Lvl to signal a 95 MWatts Un F Dly Secs 0 1 A fault The MWatts Un bit in the Motor Fault En parameter must be set to signala R W fault 0 000 1000 00 If the Real Power drops below this level for the time period set in MWatts Un A 96 MWatts Un A Lvi MW 0 000 f A Dly parameter an MWatts Un Alarm will be signaled The MWatts Un bit in the R W Motor Alarm En parameter must be set to signal an alarm 0 1 99 0 The time period that Real Power must drop below MWatts Un A Level to signal 97 MWatts Un A Dly Secs 0 1 A an alarm The MWatts Un bit in the Motor Alarm En parameter must be set to R W i signal an alarm 0 100 If the average three phase line voltage drops below this level for the time period 98 Undervolt F Lvl V 90 A set in the Undervolt F Dly parameter an Undervolt fault will be signaled The R W ndervolt bit in the Starter Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault Und bit in the S Fault E b ignal a faul 0 1 99 0 The time period that the average three phase voltage must remain below 99 Undervolt F D
3. Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Preset Slow Speed Figure 50 For Preset Slow Speed Control AC 1 0 T1 2 Li ii Circuit SMC 50 Soft Fast Acting SCRO Protective M T arter Fuses optional Device 3 Phase AC 00 SO ee 0 Line Power 13 6 L3 5 n 9 120 240V AC Control Transformer or AC Power Supply Slow Speed ji 1 0 0 o Start 9 O 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 1312 1 o o0 bt QH j pit a 2945S Aux Aux ERO Control aes Module P Control Module Standard I O et 0 O o Ai A2 A3 A4 A5 AG Ar AS AS A10 A11 A12 gt z X 2 Z Z li NC 22da Q AuxA1 AuxA2 AUXA3 AC Inputs e Auxiliary Relay Outputs 150 SM4 Option I O Module _ Customer supplied See the controller nameplate to verify the control power input ratings 100 240V AC Option 1 0 Terminal A3 NOTE The controller will generate an 1 0 configuration Option 1 0 Terminal A2 Option 1 0 terminal A1 Due to current leakage t motor See the Isolatio The order of the termina associated with the te Configure both In1 Inpu NOTE In addition to a sma nA2 100 240V AC input con nA1 120 240V AC input confi n Contactor Applications diag rminal number remains the sa 1 Parameter 56 and
4. Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access 1000 000 1000 000 Displays the maximum reactive energy demand recorded since the energy 282 Max Reactive Dmd MVAR 0 000 NA meters Were Tesei R 283 Apparent Power A Displays the Apparent Power VA measured in the phase A branch 284 Apparent Power B MVA Taare 000 000 NA Displays the VA measured in the phase B branch R 285 Apparent Power C Displays the VA measured in the phase C branch 286 Apparent Power MVA A me 000 000 NA ae ays the total apparent power consumed or produced by the R 287 Apparent Energy MVAH a aaa 000 000 NA Displays the Apparent Energy which is equal to Apparent Power x Time R 1000 000 1000 000 Displays the total amount of Apparent Energy which is equal to MVAH x 288 Apparent Demand MVA 0 000 NA demand period produced or consumed by the load R 1000 000 1000 000 Displays the maximum apparent demand recorded since energy meters 289 Max Apparent Dmd MVA 0 000 NA were eset R f Enables the user to enter the time period that energy samples are taken 290 Demand Period Mins 1 255 1 NA 0 calculate demand R W Enables the user to enter the number of periods that energy 291 Num of Periods stl NB measurements are taken in calculating demand R W 292 Power Factor A D
5. Control 71 2 L1 1 E Circuit SMC 50 Soft Fast Acting Sono p Fuses 0 fonal rotective l M Toa gta op navies 3 Phase AC 00 1 Line Power T3 6 L3 5Ho n t lsolation 1 Brake Contactor Jol Beea o Transformer Be Slow Speed l I 1 O ll o Stop 0 ele r Start i 12 11 10 9 8 AAE 3j2 i gt H L2 L1 N aas z AUX2 Aux1 t ENg2O TFE Control Module i Control Module Standard I O tPower amp Ground a aE AQ A10 A11 A12 gt 8 l T NC Customer supplied AC Inputs 150 SM4 Option I O Module Atal AuxA2 AUXA3 See the controller nameplate to verify the control power input ratings 100 240V AC Option 1 0 Terminal A4 t Auxiliary Relay Outputs nA4 100 240V AC input is configured for START input using Parameter 7 5 control module port 7 Option 1 0 Terminal A3 InA3 100 240V AC input configured for COAST etc using Parameter 7 4 control module port 7 NOTE The controller will generate an I O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is configured for COAST or STOP Option 1 0 module Termi SMB Option 1 0 module Termi nal A1 InA1 100 240V AC input is configured for STOP OPTION using Parameter 7 2 control module port 7 Set STOP MODE Parameter 65 to nal A2 InA2
6. Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access 312 Product z 0 65535 Displays an image of the DPI product command required for DPI communications R Command 0 7a Stop Coast Inhibit 0 No Action Start Start 0 No Action Stop Maneuver Inhibit Jog 0 No Action Clear Faults Clear Fault 0 No Action Run at Slow Speed Slow Speed 0 No Action Enable Emergency Run Mode Emer Run 0 Disable Emergency Run Mode Enable Motor Winding Heater Motor Heater 0 Disable Motor Winding Heater Reserved 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 Reserved 0 Use the Network 1 4 bits Aux Enable 0 Ignore the Network 1 4 bits Closes any Output Configured for Network 1 Network_1 0 Opens any Output Configured for Network 1 Closes any Output Configured for Network 2 Network_2 0 Opens any Output Configured for Network 2 Closes any Output Configured for Network 3 Network_3 0 Opens any Output Configured for Network 3 Closes any Output Configured for Network 4 Network_4 0 Opens any Output Configured for Network 4 Rebalance o The percentage of motor current imbalance above which the SMC 50 will rebalance the 313 Level 0 100 0 NA motor current RAW The peak value of the Phase A line to neutral volt
7. Hand Auto hes D eleyo K d e Auto Device C a elni 10 3 6 eTe aaa gt O02 9o o BSB OH o L2 411 2 amp o 83 Au Auxt amp o E a Lu Control Module Control Module Standard I O Power amp Ground 9 Al A2 A3 A4 A5 a8 AL A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 gt oe os GH H NC 2 S A AR ALMS AC Inputs Auxillary Relay Outputs 150 SM4 Option I O Module Customer supplied See the controller nameplate to verify the control power input ratings 100 240V AC Terminal A1 InA1 100 240V AC input is configured for START STOP or START COAST using Parameter 7 2 control module port 7 Start Input High Coast Stop Input Low NOTE The controller will generate an 1 0 configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is configured for COAST or STOP Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor See the Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details The order of the terminal numbers for the option 1 0 module can be reversed depending on which expansion port it is located in on the control module However the function associated with the terminal number remains the same
8. Parameter Information Appendix B 150 SM4 Digital 1 0 Module Table 155 Parameter X 1 X 18 Information Number Name Min Max Units Enum Text Description Read Write Default Access oa Displays information about the operational status of the 150 SM4 Digital 0 Option Module Ready Bit 0 Ready f Bit Set indicates the module is ready for operation Input 1 z A a he input is ON 0 256 Input 2 3 E ots he input is ON X 1 Module Status 0 NA ae Bit 3 Input 3 R Bit Set 1 indicates the input is ON Input 4 i os ae he input is ON Aux 1 Bit 5 Aux 1 Bit Set 1 indicates the auxiliary relay output is ON Aux 2 Bit 6 Aux 2 Bit Set 1 indicates the auxiliary relay output is ON Aux 3 Bit 7 Aux 3 Bit Set 1 indicates the auxiliary relay output is ON Bit 8 15 Spare Bit 8 15 Spare Allows the user to select the operation of Input Terminal A1 Option Input 1 on the 150 SM4 Digital 1 0 Option Module Disable Disable the input ignores any assertion to Input AlTerminal High Start nitiate a start as set up by the start parameters at Input Terminal A1 Coast nitiates a coast stop no current to motor at Input Terminal A1 Low Stop Option Inmates ae eda as set up by the stopping parameters at Input Start Coast ea A1 0 stops motor 1 initiates a start as set up by the start Start Stop nput Terminal A1 0 initiates a stop maneuver as set up by stop
9. Diagrams Figure 30 For Standard 3 Wire Control DC Inputs No DPI Control g p 71 2 L1 1 oO SMC 50 Fast Acting SCR Circuit Soft Starter Fuses Optional Protective ET i 3 M T24 23 ae a 00 1 Line Power T3 6 L3 5 120V 240V AC Control Transformer or AC Power Supply Oo LAAA CY YY Stop o 1 For 24V DC Controllers 1 m e a ee a De Start o O 5 QO 2 1 iwf o sl 7 fe sf4f3 e2i4 z O 2 o L2 alt 2 1 a 2 Aux2 Aux1 t2 j E s 8 a Control Mod Control Module Standard VO pyar 8 Ground Customer supplied See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings 100 240V AC or 24V DC Terminal 11 In 1 DC 24V DC input configured for START input using Parameter 56 Terminal 10 In 2 DC 24V DC input configured for COAST STOP option etc using Parameter 57 NOTE The controller will generate an 1 0 configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is selected for COAST or STOP A customer supplied jumper is required to enable standard 1 0 operation Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped
10. Parameter Information Appendix B Table 148 Parameter 264 281 Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access 264 Motor Restart En Enables the user to adjust the Motor Restart Enable conditions Setting R W 1 a bit causes the motor to attempt a restart after the selected event is detected A limit to the number of starts attempted before a fault is signalled can be set in the Restart Attempts parameter 0 Overload 0 Do not attempt a restart after fault is cleared 0 Uinderoad 1 Attempt a restart after this fault is cleared noer oa NOTE Restart attempts Parameter 133 and Restart Delay Parameter 0 MWatts Over 134 must also be configured 0 MWatts Under 0 MVAR Over All Disabled as Default 0 MVAR Under 0 MVAR Over 0 MVAR Under 0 VA Over 0 VA Under 0 Curr Imbal 0 Jam 0 Stall 0 Starts Hr 0 PM Hours 0 PM Starts 0 Power Qual 0 Open Load 0 THD 0 Lead PF Un 0 Lead PF Ov 0 Lag PF Un 0 Lag PF Ov 0 Locked Rotor 265 Voltage Pn Ave Displays the average of the sum of the three phase voltages to neutral 266 Voltage Phase A N Displays Phase A L1 to neutral voltage Volts 0 450 0 A i R 267 Voltage Phase B N Displays Phase B L2 to neutral voltage 268 Voltage Phase C N Displays Phase C L3 to neutral voltage 269 Displays the Real Power of the Phase A branch which is equal to Phase Real Power A A Voltage x Phase A Current x PF 1000 000 100
11. T1 2 L1 1 SMC 50 Fast Acting SCR Circuit Soft Starter Fuses optional Protective T24 12 8 Dees oO T3 6 L3 5 oO Pees or AC Power Supply CY Y oO r a 98 S O Qe 12 at tO five 8 Peg ae oS alr 88 eo 8 Loa Ll2 i L _ EE Q Q o Aux2 Aux1 E A W Control Mod Control Module Standard I O Power amp Ground Customer supplied See the controller nameplate to verify the control power input ratings 100 240V AC or 24V DC Configure both In1 Input 1 Parameter 56 and In2 Input 2 Parameter 57 to Disable 5 NOTE If terminal 10 and 11 are required for a non Stop Start function e g slow speed see Parameter 56 and Parameter 57 Communication Control word bits 0 5 for options For DPI operation if the start stop operation is done via communications DPI port 20 COMM module or HIM the appropriate bit 0 4 in the Logic Mask Parameter 148 must be set See Chapter 8 Communications for additional details Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of off stream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor See the Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details NOTE In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching
12. Parameter Number Parameter Name Minimum Maximum Default Access Units 49 SS CSStarting Mode TorgeRamnp T a 305 Starting Torque 0 300 100 52 Max Torque 0 300 250 50 Ramp Time 0 0 1000 0 10 0 SEC 47 Rated Torque 0 10000 10 N m R W 48 Rated Speed 750 900 1500 1800 3600 RPM 53 Cur Limit Level 50 600 350 FLC 54 Kickstart Time 0 0 2 0 SEC 55 Kickstart Level 0 0 90 LRT 78 Motor FLC 1 0 2200 0 Amps Pump Control Start amp Stop The pump control reduces surges water hammer during the starting and stopping of a centrifugal pump by smoothly accelerating and decelerating the motor As such starting and stopping parameters are typically configured together The microprocessor analyzes the motor variables and generates commands that control the motor and reduce the possibility of surges occurring in the system The starting time Ramp Time Parameter 50 is programmable from 0 0 1000 0 seconds and the stopping time Stop Time Parameter 66 is programmable from 0 999 seconds when the Pump Stop mode is selected from Parameter 65 Figure 59 Pump Control 100 Motor Speed lt Pump Stat gt lt Run P 4 Pump Stop gt Ramp Time dew Stop Time Time in Seconds Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Operating Modes Chapter 3 Table
13. 266 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Parameter Information Table 144 Parameter 227 230 Appendix B Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access apes Allows the user to configure the time period that the supplied line voltage p requency must drop below Freq Low F Lvl parameter value before causing a H Freq Low F Dly Secs 0 1 Na Frad Low fa It The Frea Low bit must be set in the Starter Fault En aiaee R or the fault to activate aa Allows the user to configure the time period that the supplied line voltage requency must drop below Freq Low A Lvl parameter value before causing a 228 Freq Low A Dly Secs 0 1 Na Fred low alani The Freg Low bt must be ae in the Starter Alarm SErameter R or the fault to activate Allows the user to force all the Control Module parameters to default values This has no impact on any option module s installed Each Option module has its own associated Parameter Mgmt parameter 229 Parameter Mgmt 0 1 0 Ready Waiting for command to set factory defaults R W Factory Command for SMC to set all Control Module Writable Parameters to factory Default default values This command does not impact Option Module parameters 230 Motor Fault En glows the user to enable Motor related faults that can be detected by the 50 0 Fault Disabled
14. ro si a E m j i gees Diagnostic aps ce LEDs See Sr CAT SER so S Sx 5 150 SM6 A eco a sf SMC 50 PARAMETER CONFIGURATION Ey S ce Z aag 4 S1 Initial Torque OS e E er S2 Current Limit B Boeg S3 Ramp Time 3 5 a il S4 Stop Time ELA e a oa 5 Motor FLC EQS a egy wy er MEC LOC MFG DATE A 2yn Js FACxx yy mmidd S4 a y g DIP Switch Rotary Switch The 150 SM6 PCM contains five rotary switches S1 through S5 each with designations 0 F and three banks of ON OFF 8 switch DIP switches The following tables show the resulting values of the position setting functions for each of the five rotary switches and the associated controller parameter numbers For details on the functions of these parameters see Chapter 3 4 6 and Appendix B Table 63 S1 Initial Torque Configuration Controller Parameter 51 Resulting Initial Torque Resulting Initial Torque Position Setting Value motor torque Position Setting Value motor torque 0 10 8 58 1 16 9 64 2 22 A 70 default 3 28 B 76 4 34 C 82 5 40 D 88 6 46 E 94 7 52 F 100 140 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Chapter 5 Table 64 S2 Current Limit Level Configuration Controller Parameter 53 Resulting Current Limit Resulting Current Limit P
15. Parameter Number Parameter Name Minimum Maximum Default Access Units 48 S CiCCne Voltage Tooma T os 98 Undervolt F Lvl 0 100 90 V 99 Undervolt F Dly 0 1 99 0 3 0 R W SECS 100 Undervolt A Lvl 0 100 90 LV 101 Undervolt A Dly 0 1 99 0 3 0 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Line Power Overvoltage Protection Fault amp Alarm Overvoltage Fault Code 19 The SMC 50 has the ability to protect against high line power voltage The Overvoltage Fault Code 19 provides protection from a line power Overvoltage condition An overvoltage condition exists if the average of the three phase line voltage exceeds a user defined percent above that level Overvolt F Lvl for a user defined time Overvolt F Dly See Table 39 on page 114 Overvoltage protection is enabled or disabled via the Overvoltage Enable Disable bit in the Starter Fault Enable Parameter 136 Overvoltage Alarm In addition to the Fault an Overvoltage Alarm is also available This is set up exactly as like the Overvoltage Fault using the Overvoltage Alarm Level and Overvoltage Alarm Delay parameters The Overvoltage Alarm is enabled or disabled via the Overvoltage Enable Disable bit in the Starer Alarm Enable Parameter 137 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 113 Chapter 4 114 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Table 39 Overvoltage Pro
16. ation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Monitoring Metering Basic MBA Metering Current MBA Metering Power MBA Start Stats MBA Power Quality MBA Volts P P Ave Current Ave Real Power Start Time 1 THD Va Volts P N Ave Current Phase A Real Power A Start Time 2 THD Vb Current Average Current Phase B Real Power B Start Time 3 THD Ve Torque Current Phase C Real Power C Start Time 4 THD Vave Motor Speed Current Imbal Real Demand Start Time 5 THD la Power Factor Max Real Demand Peak Current 1 THD Ib Real Power Reactive Power Peak Current 2 THD Ic Reactive Power Reactive Power A Peak Current 3 THD lave Apparent Power Reactive Power B Peak Current 4 Real Energy Reactive Power C Peak Current 5 Reactive Energy Reactive Demand Reactive Energy ma ei Demand Monitoring MBA Apparent Energy pparent Power a Meter Reset Apparent Power A rapsa ame 2 Apparent Power B ee Time Metering Volts MBA Apparent Power C Energy Savings Volts P P Ave Apparent Demand 4 Motor Therm Usage Volts Phase A B Max Apparent Deman Time to OL Trip Volts Phase B C Power Factor Time to OL Reset Volts Phase C A Power Factor A Time to PM Volts P N Ave Power Factor B Starts to PM Volts Phase A N Power Factor C Total Starts Volts Phase B N Product Status Figure 88 Setup Programming Chapter 5 Figure 89 Motor Protection Setup Basic B
17. Programming Chapter 5 Table 75 SMC 50 Parameter Linear List Parameter 136 205 Number Name Number Name 136 B A Starter Fault Enable 71 A Factory CT Ratio 137 B A Starter Alarm Enable 72 B A Config 138 M B A 1 73 B A Invert 391M BA 2 ima On Delay 140 M B A Fault 3 117518 A Off Delay 141 M B A 4 176 8 A Config 142 M B A 5 177 8 A Invert 143 M B A 1 178 1B A nae On Delay 144 M B A 2 179 B A Off Delay 145 M B A Alarm 3 80 B A Aux Control 146 M B A 4 81 B A Language 147 M B A 5 192 B A Start Delay 148 B A Logic Mask 83 A Timed Start 149 B A Logic Mask Act 84 A V Shut Off Level 150 B A Write Mask Cfg 85 A Shut Off Level 151 B A Write Mask Act 86 A UTS Level 152 B A Port Mask Act 87 A Level 153 B A A1 188 8 A Stall Delay 154 B A A2 189 A Position 155 B A B1 190 A Notch Maximum 156 B A B2 191 A Notch Position 157 B A alain G 92 A Bypass Delay 158 B A C2 193 B A Energy Saver 159 B A D 94 A Force Tuning 160 B A D2 195 M B A Stator R 161 B A A1 196 M B A Total R 162 B A A2 197 M B A Coupling Factor 163 B A B1 198 M B A Inductance 164 B A B2 199 A Speed PGain Tewa c1 200 A Gain 166 B A C2 201 A Transient Zero
18. Parameter Number Name Description Min Max Default Access Units 269 Real Power A aio see J 1000 000 0 000 R MW 271 Real Power C f 10 Real Power 11 Real Energy 1000 000 0 000 R MWH 272 Real Demand 73 Max Real Demand 1000 000 0 000 R MW 274 Reactive Power A 275 Reactive Power B 1000 000 0 000 R MVAR 276 Reactive Power C y 271 Reactive Power 278 Reactive Energy C 1000 000 0 000 R MVRH 279 Reactive Energy P l l 280 Reactive Energy 1000 000 0 000 R MVRH 281 Reactive Demand 1000 000 0 000 R MVAR 282 Max Reactive Dmd H l 283 Apparent Power A 284 A pparent Power B MVA 285 Apparent Power C 286 Apparent Power 1000 000 0 000 R 287 Apparent Energy MVAH 288 Apparent Demand MVA 289 Max Apparent Demand MVA Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Metering Chapter 6 Parameter Number Name Description Min Max Default Access Units O 290 Demand Period 1 255 R W min 291 Number of Periods 1 15 R W M Mega Power Factor Power Factor is calculated for each phase along with a total power factor value The power factor calculation does not apply during Slow Speed and Braking operations Table 83 Metering Parameters Associated with Power Factor Min Max Default Access Units Parameter Number Name Description 292 Power Factor A 293 Power Factor B 1 00 1 00 0 00 294 Power Facto
19. Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access Displays which DPI port the SMC 50 will accept a start command from It may be different from the Logic Mask set by the local user if someone changes it over the network 0 65535 bit 1 port 1 on board HIM 13 Logic Mask Act 0 ha bit 2 port 2 DPI port on control module R bit 3 port 3 DPI port on control module with splitter bit 4 port 4 Internal Comm module bit 5 15 reserved is bits in this parameter allow the user to enable bit 1 or disable Bit 0 whic This bits in thi llow th ble bit 1 or disable Bit 0 which ports the 50 will accept write commands from Only selected ports can DPI he SMC 50 will i ds fi Only selected modify parameters 2 0 65535 bit 1 port 1 on board HIM Default 1 150 Write Mask Cfg E 7FFF NA bit 2 port 2 DPI port on control module Default 1 R W bit 3 port 3 DPI port on control module with splitter Default 1 bit 4 port 4 Internal Comm module Default 1 bit 5 15 reserved Default 0 Displays which DPI ports the SMC will accept write commands from that can change parameters It may be different from the Write Mask Cfg parameter setup 0 8659 by the local user if someone changes it over the network d 5535 bit 1 port 1 on board HIM lal Write Mask Act 0 NA bit 2 port 2 DPI port on control module R bit 3 port 3 DPI port on contro module with splitter bit 4 port 4 Inter
20. Controls Accesses jog direction auto manual and other control functions Stop Stops the SMC 50 or clears a fault The Stop key is always active If the device port is enabled and removed under power or an expansion device is removed a fault is generated The bit location e g 0 1 2 etc corresponds to the DPI port numbers Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 147 Chapter 5 Programming HIM Soft Keys Up to five dynamic soft keys can be shown at the bottom of the HIM screen Based on the specific screen or the data entry mode being used a soft key name and its function may change When a soft key is active its presentation function and corresponding soft key label are shown at the bottom of the HIM screen Table 72 HIM Soft Key Functions Soft Key Description Function Multi Function Blue e Scrolls through menus and screens as directed by each arrow Performs corresponding functions displayed in the data area Numeric Keys Grey Enters their respective numeric values fo 5 Enter Password Modification Using the HIM Enters the numeric value 5 Displays the next level of a selected menu item Enters new values Performs intended actions The SMC 50 provides password protection by numeric code 0 to 65 535 to prevent unwanted modification of parameters Data and parameter values can be viewed monitored without entering the password but
21. Figure 51 For Preset Slow Speed Control for Hand OFF Auto DPI AC 1 0 l e Circuit ast Acting SCR Protective uses optional Device 3 Phase AC 1 Line Power 120 240V AC Control Transformer Off OF or AC Power Supply A Hand Start Auto DPI Hand o 0 fa 0 e e Hand Stop x Slow Speed o e e 12 11 10 987 6 514 372 1 SO oO OC iH L2 L Q 98g Aux2 Aux ra O Control Control Module Standard I O Module Power amp Ground Customer supplied See the controller nameplate to verify the contro Option 1 0 1 Terminal A2 InA2 100 240V AC inp AT A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 AS AS ATO Atl Al2 T qA QO St SS j l Q AuxAt AuxA2 AuxA3 Ne AC Inputs Auxiliary Relay Outputs 150 SM4 Option I O Module _ NOTE The controller will generate an 1 0 configuration faul Option 1 0 1 Option 1 0 1 o current leakage through an SCR in the OF or See the Isolation Contactor Application Due mo The order o assi Confi NOTE n addi uncontroll equipmen S 70 Terminal A3 InA3 100 240V AC inp Terminal A1 InA1 120 240V input co
22. oo Q ej 12 111 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 a 4 zg 82eg OH 12 41 b Y 2B 0 Aux2 Aux1 a B T _ Control Mod Control Module Standard I O Power amp Ground ied x nameplate to verify control power input ratings 100 240V AC or 24V DC 3 Phase AC Line Power For 24V DC Controllers 5 Terminal 10 In 2 DC 24V DC N O input is configured for start stop or start coast using Parameter 57 contact closed start initiated contact open stop initiated When using start stop or start coast a N O input contact must be used NOTE The controller will generate an A customer su Due to current motor See th Configure In1 pplied jumper is required to enable controller standard 1 0 operation leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the e Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details nput 1 Parameter 56 to Disable NOTE In addition to a small amount o 0 configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is selected for COAST or STOP leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor
23. 167 B A D1 202 A Mag 168 B A D2 203 A Ping Degree 69 A Voltage Ratio 204 A Pings 70 A User CT Ratio 205 A Phase Shift 0 M B A Access Level see Parameter Access Level using the HIM Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 179 Chapter 5 Programming Table 76 SMC 50 Parameter Linear List Parameter 206 277 Number Name Number Name 206 A 10 242 B A OvALvI 207 A 20 243 B A Ov A Dly 208 A Phase Shift 30 244 B A Un F Lvl nena MVA _____ 209 A 40 245 B A Un F Dly 210 A 50 246 B A Un A Lvl 211 A 60 247 B A Un A Dly 212 A 70 248 B A Ov F Lvl 213 A Phase Shift 80 249 B A Ov F Dly 214 A 90 250 B A Ov A Lvl 215 A 100 251 B A Ov A Dly Lead PF c 216 M B A Board Temp 252 B A Un F Lvl 217 B A Exp 7 Config 253 B A Un F Dly 218 B A Exp 8 Config 254 B A Un A Lvl 219 B A Exp 9 Config 255 B A Un A Dly 220 B A Time 256 B A Ov F Lvl _____ _ Heating l 221 B A Level 257 B A Ov F Dly 222 B A Config 258 B A Ov A Lvl 223 M B A Connection 259 B A tee Ov A Dly ag ERE 224 M B A Line Frequency 260 B A Un F Lvl 225 B A F Dly 261 B A Un F Dly Freq High 226 B A A Dly 262 B A Un A Lvl 227 B A F Dl
24. FLC 350 A time selected R W K 0 2 Allows the user to set an alternate boost current to be applied to the motor for the 63 Kickstart Time 2 Sec 0 A programmed time R W x 0 90 Allows the user to set an alternate adjustment of the amount of current applied to pa Kickstart Level Zal LR 0 A the motor during the kickstart period R W _ Allows the user to program the SMC 50 for the type of stopping that best suits the application Coast Coast to Rest Soft Stop Slowly reduces current by reducing voltage applied to the motor over a programmed period of time 65 Stop Mode a7 a Linear Speed Stops the motor following a linear speed ramp over a programmed period of time R W Pump Sto Slowly reduces current by reducing voltage applied to the motor using the pump P stop stop algorithm over a programmed period of time SMB Brakes the motor to a stop using an SCR firing pattern to create current flow to brake the motor per the configuration of the braking parameters eal Closes an external contactor to apply braking current to the motor 66 Stop Time Sec Ha A Sets the time period which the controller will ramp the voltage during a stopping R W maneuver 0 999 Avoids starting into a backspin condition The timer begins counting after a stop is 67 Backspin Timer Sec 0 A completed coast stop maneuver fault etc All start inputs will be ignored until R W the backspin timer has timed out 0 50 Provides the ability to adjust the pump algorithm sligh
25. OS Edit Logic Mask x000 0000 0000 o00 7 Press the EDIT key to modify the settings then use the left or right arrow to select the desired bit 1 through 4 then press the key To enable motor control press or press to disable motor control from the selected DPI port then press EDIT 208 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Communications Chapter 8 Loss of Communication with DPI Device Default Input Output Communication Configuration Table 99 Logic Mask amp Logic Mask Active Parameter Specifications Parameter Number Name Bit Number DPI Assignment Access Units default 148 Logic Mask 0 NA Port 0 NA R W Bit 0 disabled 1 Port 1 Bit 1 enabled 149 Logic Mask Act 2 Port 2 R Bit 0 disabled 3 Port 3 Bit 1 enabled 4 Port 4 Follows Logic Mask 5 15NA Port 5 15 NA IMPORTANT The Logic Mask must be set to 0 or the REMOVE HIM key is depressed via the HIM controller screen see Chapter 7 prior to disconnecting the HIM from the SMC 50 controller If not the unit will fault on a Exp Removed e The Logic Mask Active Parameter 149 is a read only parameter that shows the logic mask actually in use at any given time It typically follows the Logic Mask Parameter 148 except in some application environments where network communication Is in use An Exp Removed fault indicates a device was improperly removed Ther
26. Overload 1 Fault Enabled 0 Default MWatts Over 0 MWatts 0 Under 0 MVAR Over 0 MVAR 0 Under 0 MVAR Over 0 MVAR 0 Under 0 MVA Under 0 MVA Over R W 0 Curr Imbal 0 Jam 0 Stall 0 Starts Hr 0 PM Hours 0 PM Starts 1 Power Qual 1 Open Load 0 THD 0 Lead PF Un 0 Lead PF Ov 0 Lag PF Un 0 Lag PF Ov 0 Locked Rotor Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 267 Appendix B Parameter Information Table 145 Parameter 231 240 Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access 231 Motor Alarm En Allows the user to enable Motor related alarms that can be detected by the SMC 50 0 Overload 0 Fault Disabled 1 Fault Enabled s ee AA AIl Disabled as Default 0 MWatts Under 0 MVAR Over 0 MVAR Under 0 MVAR Over 0 MVAR Under 0 MVA Under 0 MVA Over 0 Curr Imbal R W 0 Jam 0 Stall 0 Starts Hr 0 PM Hours 0 PM Starts 0 Power Qual 0 Open Load 0 THD 0 Lead PF Un 0 Lead PF Ov 0 Lag PF Un 0 Lag PF Ov 0 Locked Rotor Allows the user to enter a value for the Consumed Reactive Power Over Fault 0 000 1000 000 Level MVAR Ov F Lvl If the current actual MVAR value is greater than the 232 HMIVAR Ov F Lvi MVAR 0 000 A MVAR OV F Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by MVAR Ov
27. 1 Using an ohm meter measure the resistance between the line and load terminals of each phase on the controller L1 T1 L2 T2 amp L3 T3 The resistance should be greater than 5 000 ohms Replace the power assembly if this reading is not reached See Appendix C for the list of Spare Replacement SMC 50 parts Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 239 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Notes 240 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Standard Features Appendix A Specifications Table 116 Functional Design Specifications Standard Features Description Power Wiring Installation standard squirrel cage induction motor or Wye Delta six lead motor Control Wiring two and three wire control for a wide variety of applications Cat No 20 HIM A6 full numeric keypad with LCD display Keypad Cat No 20 HIM C6S remote panel mount full numeric keypad with LCD display ao Software parameter values are downloaded to the SMC 50 with the Connected Components Workbench and DriveTools programming software Parameter Configuration Option Module Cat No 150 SM6 provides limited configuration by DIP and rotary switches Communications four DPI ports for local serial communications network communication is supported by optional 20 COMM X modules Basic Starting amp Stopping Modes modes include Soft Start Current Limit Start Dual Ramp Full
28. 180 A one 210 5 mm 0 41 in hole per power pole Power Terminal Lugs 210 320 A two 210 5 mm 0 41 in holes per power pole Terminals 361 520 A two 213 5 mm 0 53 in holes per power pole Power Terminal Markings NEMA CENELEC EN50 012 Control Terminals M3 screw clamp clamping yoking connection 250 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Specifications Appendix A Table 129 Other Specifications Other EN IEC EMG Emission Radio Frequency Emissions Class A per EN 60947 4 2 adiated Emissions Electrostatic Discharge 8 kV air discharge EMC Immunity Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field Levels Fast Transient per EN 60947 4 2 Surge Transient Overload Characteristics Line Delta 90 30 90 52 155 110 37 110 65 180 140 47 140 82 242 180 60 180 104 311 210 70 210 122 363 Current Range 260 87 260 151 450 320 07 320 186 554 361 20 361 210 625 420 40 420 243 727 520 74 520 302 900 Overload Type electronic using an fa algorithm Trip Classes 5 to 30 Trip Current Rating 18 of motor FLC Number of Poles 3 Certifications Open Type Controllers eRe Neca directive 73 23 EEC 93 68 EEC UL Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 251 AppendixA Specifications 252 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 App
29. 5 SMC 50 M sla D ranch l 1 SS 12 4 Protection 1 TN T36 H i 825 CBCT O External Bypass Pore Balance Ground Fault Sensor Customer supplied The 825 MCM can be used with or without an external bypass contactor If an external bypass contactor is used then the 825 MCM must be installed in order to use current based motor protective features including the motor overload feature Cable length is 4 meters Only the cable provided with the 825 MCM is compatible with the 150 SM2 See Figure 29 for 825 MCM dimensions The 825 CBCT Core Balance Sensor mounts separately from the SMC 50 and must be placed within 3 meters of the SMC 50 When connecting the 825 CBCT ground fault sensor the secondary of the CT must be shorted until connection to the 150 SM2 module is complete See Figure 44 on page 63 for additional bypass configurations e g emergency run off bypass and application considerations To meet product susceptibility requirements a single ferrite core must be placed around any or all sensor e g PTC ground fault etc wires connected to the 150 SM2 Option Module The recommended core is a Fair Rite Products Corp Part Number 0431167281 or equivalent Ensure the 150 SM2 Turns Ratio Parameter X 5 is configured to match the 825 CBCT Turns Ratio 100 1 X 5 100 46 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Figure 29 825 MCM180 and MCM20 Dim
30. 78 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Operating Modes Chapter 3 Table 17 Linear Acceleration Mode Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Name Minimum Maximum Default Access Units 49 o StartngMode Liners T 50 Ramp Time 0 0 1000 0 10 0 SEC 51 Initial Torque 0 90 70 LRT 53 Cur Limit Level 50 600 350 ig FLC 78 Motor FLC 1 0 2200 0 Amps 199 Speed PGain 0 10000 1000 Torque Control Start This motor starting method provides a torque ramp from an initial starting torque level to a maximum torque level over the start time The torque levels are entered in percent of rated motor torque This requires that the Rated Torque parameter be configured to the motor s rated torque The torque start operating mode requires motor tuning to function properly Tuning can be forced manually or it will otherwise be performed automatically the first time the motor is started See Motor Tuning on page 73 Figure 58 Torque Start Current Limit 100 Maximum Motor Torque Ramp Time Percent Rated Motor Torque Starting Torque lt stat _ O Rt O S09 _ gt Time in Seconds Table 18 provides a list of Torque Control Start parameters Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 79 Chapter 3 80 Operating Modes Table 18 Torque Start Mode Parameter List
31. A Kickstart Level 2 Phase Shift 90 A Phase Shift 100 A L gt z Motor Protection Overload BA Jam BA Apparent Power BA Current Imbal BA Maintenance Motor Fault Enable Motor Fault Enable Motor Fault Enable Motor Fault Enable Motor Fault Enable BA Motor Alarm Enable Motor Alarm Enable Motor Alarm Enable Motor Alarm Enable Motor Alarm Enable BA Motor Restart Enable Motor Restart Enable Motor Restart Enable Motor Restart Enable Motor Restart Enable BA Overload Class Jam F Level MVA Ov F Level Current Imbal F Level PM Hours BA Overload Class 2 Jam F Delay MVA OV F Delay Current Imbal F Delay PM Starts BA Service Factor Jam A Level MVA Ov A Level Current Imbal A Level Time to PM MBA Motor FLC Jam A Delay MVA OV A Delay Current Imbal A Delay Starts to PM MBA OL Reset Level MVA Un F Level Starts per Hour BA OL Shunt Time Stall BA MVA Un F Delay Voltage THD BA History MBA OL Inhibit Time Maaa Ea Enahia MVA Un A Level Overload A Lvel Motor Fault Enable MVA Un A Delay Il Zaher aim Enana Fault 1 z Starter Restart Enable au Underload BA Sul Dey erable Leading PF BA THD V F Level Fault 3 Motor Fault Enable Motor Fault Enable THD V F Delay Fault 4 Motor Alarm Enable Real Power BA Motor Alarm Enable THD V A Level Fault 5 Motor Restart Enable Moto
32. For Dual Ramp AC Inputs Circuit Fast Acting _ Protective SCR Fuses Optional Device 3 Phase AC Line Power SMC 50 Soft Starter 120V 240V AC Control Transformer or AC Power Supply O i oT Ramp 2 vou Stop 0 Start ool 0 ELA OSES ee Qo 2 12 L c a v B Ax Ax z a c am u g Control Module Standard I O Control Mod Power amp Groun A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 AQ A10 A11 A12 gt Customer supplied See the controller namepla Terminal A3 InA3 100 240V AC input configured for START input using Parameter 7 4 contro module port 7 Terminal A2 InA2 100 241 NOTE The controller will generate an 1 0 configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is selected for COAST or STOP Terminal A InA1 100 24 3 OH OH GF NC AuxA1 AuxA2 AUXA3 AC Inputs Auxilliary Relay Outputs t 150 SM4 Option I O Module InA2 InA3 O e to verify control power input ratings 100 240V AC OV AC input configured for COAST STOP option etc using Parameter 7 3 control module port 7 OV AC input is configured for Dual Ramp using Parameter 7 2 control module port 7 Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of off stream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor See the Isolation Contactor Applicat
33. Human Interface Module HIM Connected Components Workbench or DriveExecutive software if necessary Application considerations for the 150 SM6 PCM are listed below e Ifanother configuration tool attempts to configure a parameter setup by an installed 150 SM6 that parameter will revert back to the 150 SM6 configuration The PCM overrides other configuration tools e The 150 SM6 can only configure the onboard control I O of the Control Module If additional I O are added by using a 150 SM4 Digital I O Option Module those I O must be configured by another programming tool When using a Cat No 150 SM6 PCM to configure the SMC 50 it should be noted that the following features functions and modes are not configurable e Full voltage start e Torque ramp start e External brake stop Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 139 Chapter 5 Programming e Option card I O configuration Cat No 150 SM option modules e External bypass Specialized output relay configuration e g network control DeviceLogix auxiliary control e Specialized operation modes features Dual ramp motor winding heater emergency run Overload select Class Adjustment of slow speed set point NOTE If the PCM is removed another configuration tool e g a HIM can change a parameter i that was previously altered by an installed PCM Figure 80 DIP Switch amp Rotary Switch Locations
34. I O expansion basic parameter configuration ground fault detection etc to be added as necessary Figure 2 SMC 50 Front View A A a spree m m ront Mounte l li DPI Port 1 Wf Status LED Push to Reset Hold to Test Pee Port 4 Control Module D Expansion Ports 8 g g top of the SMC 50 The maximum output current through the DPI port is ATTENTION Two peripheral devices can be connected to the DPI port on A 280 mA The SMC 50 parameters can be programmed configured using a Bulletin 20 HIM A6 LCD configuration device PC based software e g DriveExecutive or DriveExplorer or a Cat No 150 SM6 Parameter Configuration Module Each configuration device must be ordered separately The SMC 50 does not include a configuration device Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 13 Chapter 1 Product Overview The Cat No 150 SM2 SM3 and SM4 option modules can be programmed configured using a Cat No 20 HIM A6 or C6S LCD configuration device or PC based software DeviceLogix DeviceLogix is an embedded component of SMC 50 Smart Motor Controllers It is used to control outputs an
35. OTE Enter a value so as to limit the current but not so low as to inhibit the start cycle 50 600 350 FLC Stop Mode Programs the desired Stop Mode NOTE The mode of stopping does not need to match the starting mode e g a Soft Start can have a stop mode programmed for Coast Linear Stop or SMB there is no Current Limit Stop or Torque Stop mode Coast Soft Stop Linear Speed Pump Stop SMB Ext Brake Stop Time Programs the amount of time desired to ramp from full to zero voltage for Soft Linear and Pump Stop mode The actual ramp stop time will depend on the stopping mode selected and load inertia 0 999 seconds Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Chapter 5 Parameter Option default Input 1 Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change Disable Start Coast in status of Input 1 wired to control terminal 11 24V DC Default Stop Option Start Coast Start Coast Start Stop Slow Speed Input 2 Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change Dual Ramp OL Select in status of Input 2 wired to control terminal 10 24V DC Default Fault Fault NC Clear Disable Fault Emerg Run Motor Heater Aux 1 Config Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact 1 wired across control terminal 4 and 5 NOTE Relay Operational Options e
36. PTC Input Ratings 150 SM2 Required Response Resistance 3400 Q 150 Q Reset Resistance 1600 Q 100 Q Short Circuit Trip Resistance 25Q 100 Max Voltage at PTC Terminals Rptc 4 KQ lt 7 5V Max Voltage at PTC Terminals Rptc open 30V Max Number of Sensors wired in series 6 Max Cold Resistance of PTC Sensor Chain 1500 Q Response Tlme 800 mS Table 128 Environmental and Mechanical Specifications Environmental Operating Ambient Temperature Range 20 40 C 4 104 F no derating For operation at 40 C 65 surrounding air ambient C 104 149 F see Thermal Wizard Storage amp Transportation Temperature Range 25 75 C 13 167 F Altitude 2000 m 6560 ft without derating For operation at 2000 7000 m 6560 22965 ft see Thermal Wizard Humidity 5 95 non condensing Pollution Degree 2 Mounting Position Vertical Atmospheric Protection ANSI ISA 71 04 2013 Class G3 Environment Mechanical Resistance Operational 6 520 A 1 0 G Peak 0 15 mm 0 006 in displacement to Vibration Non Operational 2 5 G Peak 0 38 mm 0 015 in displacement Resistance Operational 90 520 A 156 to Shoc Non Operational 30G Power Poles Heatsink Hockey Puck Thyristor Modular Design Construction Control Modules Thermoset amp Thermoplastic moldings Metal Parts plated brass copper or steel 90
37. Reference Max Fuse Part Max Available Fault 500V Fuse Part Number Delta 107A s Available Number kA Fault 480V kA 50 SB1N 90 155 92 65 A700S150 65 6 9URD30 0200 50 SB2N 110 190 95 A700S175 6 9URD30 0200 50 SB3N 140 242 100 A700S200 6 9URD30 0250 50 SB4N 180 31 106 A700S250 6 9URD31 0315 50 SC1N 210 363 200 A700S350 6 9URD30 0315 50 SC2N 260 450 238 A700S400 6 9URD31 0400 50 SC3N 320 554 320 A700S450 6 9URD31 0450 50 SD1N 361 625 1000 A700S500 6 9URD31 0500 50 SD2N 420 727 1100 A700S600 6 9URD31 0630 50 SD3N 520 900 1200 A700S700 6 9URD31 0700 Consult local codes for proper sizing of short circuit protection Calculated only NOT tested Fuse size based on a start profile of 350 of the controller maximum current rating for 10 seconds Contact Technical Support at raictechsupport ra rockwell com or 440 646 5800 for applications with a longer start time or higher starting current Basic Requirements for Type 2 Coordination Per EN 60947 4 2 under short circuit conditions the device shall cause no danger to persons or installation and shall be suitable for further use For Line Connected Motors connect fuses to the SMC 50 in line with three phase power terminals L1 L2 and L3 For Delta Connected Motors connect fuses to the SMC 50 inside the delta after terminals L1 16 L2 T4 and L3 T5 Ferraz Shawmut Mersen part number 248 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014
38. Specifications Appendix A Additional Specifications Table 125 Control Power Requirements Max Control Circuit Consumption an Control Voltage Description Current Range A 100 240V AC 24V DC a aac 90 180 150 VA 75W Module with Heat Sink Fan 210320 150VA 75W 361 520 300 VA 300 W Human Interface Module HIM 10 VA 2 W 150 SM2 30 VA 4W 150 SM3 30 VA 4W Option Power Adder 150 54 SD VA JW 150 SM6 5VA 1W 20 COMM X 25 VA 4W Heatsink fans are powered from the same source as the control module The 100 240V AC fans can be either 110 120V AC or 220 240V AC auto configured Add to Base power using the formula below to obtain total power requirements Max 1 of each option type per control module Table 126 Continuous Duty Power Structure Heat Dissipation at Rated Current Description Current Range A Heat wa 90 270 110 330 140 420 180 540 210 630 Controller Rating A 260 780 320 960 361 1083 420 1260 520 1560 Power Calculation on peer a Cee Example 361 A device with a 20 COMM X module HIM and Cat No 150 SM4 Max total power 300 25 10 50 1083 Watts dissipation Base Power Options Power Structure Max total power dissipation 1468 Watts Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 249 AppendixA Specifications Table 127 Additional Electrical Ratings
39. Voltage Terminal 0 5 full scale at 25 C Current Terminal 0 35 full scale at 25 C Accuracy Drift with Temperature 5 PPM C Output Impedance 15 Q typical Open and Short Circuit Protection Yes Maximum Short Circuit Current 45 mA Output Overvoltage Protection Yes Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Optional Cat No 150 SM2 Positive Temperature Coefficient PTC Ground Fault amp External Current Transformer Option Module An optional Cat No 150 SM2 module provides connectivity to external PTC motor winding temperature sensors ground fault and current transformer sensors The 150 SM2 module can be located in control module Port 7 or 8 Only one 150 SM2 module is allowed to be used with the control module See Figure 20 All of the individual terminal blocks TB2 TB3 and TB4 are removable The RG25U female connector provides a connection point for the male to male cable provided with the 825 MCM current sensor converter module 1 When installed in Control Module Port 7 the orientation of the module terminals is rotated 180 along with its terminals MOTE 2 The Cat No 150 SM2 Option Module can NOT be configured using a 150 SM6 PCM This module can be configured using a 20 HIM A6 network card or communications software e g Connected Components Workbench Figure 23 Circuit Board 150 SM2 Module Circuit Board TB2
40. 0 NA parameter has the potential to modify the SCR operational control scheme it is R W important that any change made be in small several percent increments Do NOT disable 0 this parameter and Parameter 184 V Shutoff Level at the same time or SCR iring motor control instability can occur Contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support for assistance 264 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Parameter Information Appendix B Table 142 Parameter 186 204 Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access The SMC 50 has the ability to determine if the motor is up to speed UTS If the SMC 50 encounters a problem detecting motor UTS this parameter can be modified 0 100 by the user to compensate If the SMC 50 is detecting the UTS condition to soon e g 186 UTS Level 75 NA abrupt speed change this number should be increased this typically occurs on high R W efficiency motors If the SMC 50 is detecting the UTS condition to late or not at all display does not indicate At Speed this number should be lowered Contact RA Technical Support for assistance 0 100 Allows the user to set the motor winding voltage level as a percentage of line 8r stall Level 75 ya voltage at which the SMC 50 will consider the motor stalled R W 0
41. 1 odule Port 9 150 SM4 Option nput 9 2 Module Bit 11 Displays status of Control nput 2 odule Port 9 150 SM4 Option nput 9 3 Module Bit 12 Displays status of Control nput 3 odule Port 9 150 SM4 Option nput 9 4 Module Bit 13 Displays status of Control nput 4 odule Port 9 150 SM4 Option Bit 14 amp 15 Reserved 310 Locked Rotor A Lvl YoFLC 400 1000 600 NA Enables the Locked Rtr A phase c ocked Rtr A ser to enter a value for the Locked Rotor Alarm Level Lvl The locked rotor value represents the motor peak rrent to the load that if exceeded for the period defined in Delay will signal a fault The Locked Rotor bit in the Motor larm En parameter must be set to signal a alarm R W 311 Locked Rotor A Dly Secs 0 1 100 0 0 1 NA Te he time period that the peak phase current exceeds the Locked Rtr F evel to signal a fault The Locked Rotor bit in the Motor Fault En arameter must be set to enable a fault R W implement an Alarm or Fault the appropriate bit in the Motor Fault En Parameter 230 or otor Alarm En Parameter 231 must also be set Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 273 Appendix B Parameter Information Table 151 Parameters 312 325
42. 15 Start gt e Run Soft Stop gt TimeinSeconds If Coast to Rest is selected Coast if Slow Brake Cur Parameter 0 Brake if Slow Brake Cur Parameter gt 0 and lt 350 When the Stop Mode Parameter 65 configured for Soft Stop and with the Input push button configured for the Stop Option Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Operating Modes Chapter 3 Figure 70 Pump Control Motor Speed 100 Coast to Rest Pump Start _ _ gt 4 __ Run pe Pump Stop o Time in Seconds l Push Buttons Start Closed Open Stop Closed Open Pump Stop Stop Option Closed E Open i Auxillary Contacts If the Pump Stop is Selected Normal Closed Open l Up to Speed If the Coast to Rest is Selected Closed Open When Stop Mode Parameter 65 is configured for Pump Stop and the Input push button is configured for Stop Option Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 97 Chapter3 Operating Modes Motor Speed 100 Push Buttons Start Closed Open Stop Closed Open Smart Motor Braking Stop Option Closed Open Auxillary Contacts Normal Closed Open Up to Speed Closed Open 98 Figure 71 Smart Motor Braking SMB Smart Motor Braking S Coast to Rest N N N Automatic Zero s Speed Shut Off x S S Start gt t _ __ Run gt Brak gt Time in S
43. 600 350 FLC Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 169 Chapter 5 Programming 170 Parameter Option default Max Torque 2 For Start Profile 2 the programmed torque end point for a Torque Ramp start This parameter is not used for other starting modes 0 300 250 RMT Kickstart Time 2 For Start Profile 2 if required a boost of current torque is provided to motor for this programmed time period NOTE Available 0 2 d for Soft Start Current Limit and Torque Start modes Set to zero to echt ad disable Kickstart Kickstart Level 2 For Start Profile 2 if required this parameter programs the amount of current torque applied to the motor during Kickstart time eee NOTE Available for Soft Start Current Limit and Torque Start modes i Set to zero to disable Kickstart 12 Torque Ramp and Linear Speed Starting modes require that a Motor Tuning Cycle be performed The SMC 50 will automatically perform the tuning cycle the first time the motor is run The user can also force this manually by setting the Force Tuning Parameter 194 to TRUE 1 which is accessed from the File Setup Group Adv Tuning or by pressing and holding the SMC 50 Reset button for 10 seconds with the motor stopped AStart Delay Time can also be programmed and will apply to both Start Profile 1 and Start Profile 2 The Start Delay parameter can be accessed from the Group Starting selecti
44. Code 61 The SMC 50 will generate an I O Configuration Fault Fault Code 61 if any control input is programmed as a Start or Slow Speed command and no input is configured for Coast or Stop The Fault occurs when the Start or operational maneuver is attempted the motor will not start This Fault is also generated when an input configuration changes from 1 one that cannot start the motor to one that can start the motor OR 2 an input that can stop the motor to one that cannot This Fault is always enabled no parameter adjustments are required and no alarm is available Non volatile Storage NVS Fault NVS Fault Code 34 The NVS Error Fault Fault Code 34 is posted if a read write checksum error occurs within the user data portion of the SMC 50 s non volatile memory This Fault can only be cleared by the user modifying storing a parameter value requires changing any parameter It is recommended that the user perform a Load Defaults command to make sure that all controller parameters are within range This error cannot be cleared by cycling the SMC 50 controller power Fault Buffer amp Fault Storage Parameters The Fault Buffer is used to store the last five system Faults The Fault Buffer is accessed via the Diagnostic screen of a 20 HIM A6 20 HIM C65 or from the Device Properties screen which is accessed using the DriveExplorer s Explore gt Device Properties pull down menu The most recent Fault is located at the to
45. Default Access Units _ 236 eMWARinFi 0 000 1000 000 IMa 237 MVAR Un F Diy 0 1 99 0 SECS 238 MVARUnALvi 0 000 1000 000 MN FAVAR 239 MVARUn A Dly 0 19 0 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Motor Over Power Reactive Negative Motor Generated Fault amp Alarm Motor Over Power Reactive Negative Fault Code 67 A Motor Over Power Reactive Negative Fault Fault Code 67 condition occurs when the Reactive Power being generated by the motor rises above a user defined level MVAR Ov F Lvl Parameter 297 for a user defined time MVAR Ov F Dly Parameter 298 This only occurs when the Reactive Power is negative The Over Power Reactive Negative Fault is enabled or disabled using the MVAR Over bit in the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 Motor Over Power Reactive Negative Alarm In addition to the Over Power Reactive Negative Fault an Over Power Reactive Negative Alarm is also available This is set up exactly like the Fault using MVAR Ov A Lvl Parameter 299 and MVAR Ov A Dly Parameter 300 This Alarm is enabled or disabled using the MVAR Over bit in the Motor Alarm Enable Parameter 231 Table 49 Motor Over Power Reactive Negative Parameter List NameO 297 Mmo 000 00000 Ma 298 MVAR Ov F Dly 0 1 99 0 RW SECS 299 MVAR Ov A Lvl 1000 000 0 000 MVAR 300 MVAR Ov A Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplo
46. If the current actual value for Generated 299 MVAR Ov A Lvl MVAR 0 000 NA Reactive Power is more than the MVAR Ov A Lvl for a period greater than R W that defined by MVAR Ov A Dly a MVAR Ov Alarm will be signaled Enables the user to enter a time value for the Generated Reactive Power 0 1 99 0 Over Alarm Delay MVAR Ov A Dly If the current actual value for the 300 MVAR Ov A Dly Secs 1 99 NA Generated Reactive Power is more than the MVAR Ov A Lvl fora period R W 0 1 greater than that defined by MVAR Ov A Dly a MVAR Ov alarm will be signaled O Enables the user to enter a value for the Generated Reactive Power Under 1000 000 0 000 Fault Level MVAR Un F Lvl If the current actual value for Generated 301 MVAR Un F Lvl MVAR 0 000 NA Reactive Power is less than the MVAR Un F Lvl for a period greater than R W that defined by MVAR Un F Dly a MVAR Un Fault will be signaled Enables the user to enter a time value for the Generated Reactive Power 0 1 99 0 Under Fault Delay MVAR Un F Dly If the current actual value for 302 MVAR Un F Dly Secs 1 99 NA Generated Reactive Power is less than the MVAR Un F Lvl for a period R W 0 1 greater than signaled hat defined by MVAR Un F Dly a MVAR Un Fault will be i implement an Alarm or Fault the appropriate bit in the Motor Fault En Parameter 230 or Motor Alarm En Parameter 231 must also be set 272 Rockwell Automation Publicatio
47. MVAR Over bit in the Motor Alarm Enable Parameter 231 Table 47 Motor Over Power Reactive Positive Parameter List NameO 22 S W SMVAROVFFLvI f 0 000 1000000 i VAR 233 MVAR Ov F Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS 234 MVAR Ov A Lvl 0 000 1000 000 oD MVAR 235 MVAR Ov A Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Motor Under Power Reactive Positive Motor Consumed Fault amp Alarm Motor Under Power Reactive Positive Fault Code 45 A Motor Under Power Reactive Positive Fault condition Fault Code 45 occurs when the reactive power being consumed by the motor falls below the user defined level MVAR Un F Lvl Parameter 236 for the user defined delay time MVAR Un F Dly Parameter 237 This Fault is enabled or disabled using the MVAR Under bit in the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 Motor Under Power Reactive Positive Alarm In addition to the Fault an Under Power Reactive Alarm is also available This is set up exactly like the Fault using parameters MVAR Un A Lvl and MVAR Un A Dly as shown in Table 48 The Alarm is enabled or disabled using the MVAR Under bit in the Motor Alarm Enable Parameter 231 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Chapter 4 Table 48 Motor Underpower Reactive Positive Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Name Minimum Maximum
48. N N JNA when the temperature rises above a predetermined level This fault is always enabled F Occurs when any input is programmed as a start or slow speed and no input is configured as a coast or stop The fault will occur when the start or maneuver is attempted the motor will not start This fault is 1 0 Config 61 N N_ NA also generated when the input configuration changes from one that cannot start the motor to one that can It will also be generated when a parameter is changed from an input that can stop the motor to one that cannot This fault is always enabled F Occurs when the Push to Test Hold to Reset push Test Fault 62 IN N NA button on the SMC 50 is pushed for gt 3 seconds but lt 10 seconds F A Occurs when the lagging Power Factor goes below Under PF Lag Bo ie the user defined fault alarm level F A Occurs when the leading Power Factor goes below Under PF Lead Be Beal Me Y the user defined fault alarm level F A Occurs when the lagging Power Factor goes above Over PF Lag Boe ese the user defined fault alarm level F A Occurs when the leading Power Factor goes above Over PF Lead BOE A ee the user defined fault alarm level F A Occurs when the magnitude of the Reactive Power MVAR Over BE eo rises above the user defined level F A Occurs when the magnitude of the Reactive Power MVeR Under ea hid falls below the user defined level A Occurs when the SMC 50 battery that maintains the RTC Battery Low 69 IN N NA v
49. Power lugs are required for devices rated 90 520 A These lugs are sold in kits Each kit contains three lugs The number and type of lugs required is listed in ATTENTION Line and load terminal covers that can give units rated 90 180 A deadfront protection IP2X with 250 MCM cable are available See Appendix E for the appropriate catalog numbers for ordering Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Table 4 Power Wiring Information COLZSEL cOLESEL 9a 26v1 syonpodg eloads S 3NpOJd 0 ON Hy n UOYIeJe N jelsads uoe Aa peig ually 8y Moy woog X Z Moy dol a perl ww psu ds aM St St Ge uly WOW OSZ WOW 052 9 WOW 00S v peo WW OOP ZW OZ 1 91 ZW OZ Se 490 g UONNIASIG 243d afuey Jojonpuo WOW OSZ WOW 052 0 1 WOW 00S 7 aur UW OOP zW QOv YS zW OpZ SZ l AND uleq Uled S Z Uleq S WeN 8 9 l ie WeN Zy peot Ul eq 009 Ul eq 009 Ul eq S aur WeN 89 WeN 3839 WeN Zy anbioy LOT 661 L9T 661 LJ1 661 L31661 L31661 L41661 ON 329 Hy Gn w B 7 w a a ww psu SZ BL 978l 02 81 02 81 02 81 02 8L ding aM WOW 00 p WOW 00S v AID OSZ 9 AIAN OSZ 9 WOW OSZ 9 WOW oz 9 uu oye Z Ww ore ge wwo g wwo g uw ozi g pwu oz gy sede as Z Z Z Z ap peo sn JNS 9 0q sin7 on XEN
50. an In2 Under alarm will be signaled The In2 R W Under bit must be set in the Alarm Enable Parameter The time period that Input 2 must remain below the In2 Under F Lvl to X 55 n2 Under A Dly 0 1 99 0 3 0 sec NA signal a fault The In2 Under bit must be set in the Fault Enable R W Parameter Ready Waiting for command to set defaults X 56 Parameter Mgmt 0 1 0 NA R W Set Defaults Set all writable parameters to factory default values X indicates the Control module Port number in which the Cat No 150 SM3 Analog 1 0 option module is installed Allowable ports 7 8 or 9 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 285 Appendix B Parameter Information 286 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Appendix C Spare Replacement Parts SMC 50 Power Poles and Table 158 Power Poles and Assemblies Cat Nos Assemblies Description Rating Cat No Cat No 90 A 200 480V AC line 150 SPPB1B 50 SPPB1BR 110 A 200 480V AC line 150 SPPB2B 150 SPPB2BR Frame B Power Structure Assembly 140 A 200 480V AC line 150 SPPB3B 150 SPPB3BR Contains all three power poles in a 180 A 200 480V AC line 150 SPPB4B 150 SPPB4BR eae 90 A 200 690V AC line 150 SPPB1U 150 SPPB1UR cover and cooling fan 110 A 200 690V AC line 150 SPPB2U 150 SPPB2UR 140 A 200 690V AC line 150 SPPB3U 150 SPPB3UR 80 A 200 690V AC line 150 SPPB4U 150 S
51. d S a o o S o pes 8 m Fault Alarm Name 8 z k Al1 Under Power Real 43 M XII Line Loss B 2111D X Over Power Real 44 M X Gol 23 Un Power Reac 45 M A 4 Ov Power Reac 46 M Shorted SCR B 5 1 D X Und Power App 47 M C 6 Ov Power App 48 M Al 7 Frequency 49 M X Open Gate B 8 2 DI X PM Hours 50 M X C19 PM Starts 51 M X J SCR Overtemp 10131 DI xX A 152 M X i No Load 14 M X Power Quality B 53 M X 15 C 54 4 M X Open Load B 16 2 MJ X Power Quality THD V 55 M X C 17 Power QualityTHD 56 M X Voltage Unbal 18 3 My X Config Change 5 D X Overvoltage 19 MJ X Ground Fault 58 M X Undervoltage 20 M X Motor PTC 59 M X Overload 2114 M X Power Pole PTC 60 13 D X Underload 22 M X 1 0 Config 6 1 D X 5 N Test Fault e2 6 o x Z Phase Reversal 25 6 M X Und PF Lag 63 M Exp Removed 26 D X X Und PF Lead 64 M X J Exp Incompat 27 D X Ovr P
52. interface with a door mounted HIM ora PC Port 2 is the default connection with port 3 available by installing a splitter on port 2 DPI Port 4 is supported by connecting one of the communication cards listed above in Table 97 to the internal DPI communication card connection SMC 50 hardware controller port 9 The SMC 50 can be programmed with the optional Bulletin 20 HIM A6 LCD display Parameters are organized in a multi level menu structure and divided into programming groups Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 205 Chapter8 Communications Connecting the HIM to the Controller Figure 94 shows how to connect a HIM and DPI device to the SMC 50 Table 98 on page 206 provides a description of each port TIP The SMC 50 only supports the use of DPI communication modules and DPI 20 HIM A6 Modules See the control wiring diagram that enables start stop control from a HIM Figure 94 SMC 50 with a HIM SMC 50 Front View HIM Bezel Port DPI Port 2 Port 2 amp 3 with Splitter Table 98 Description of Ports DPI Port Number 1 Source Front Mounted HIM HIM Bezel 2 Remote DPI top of SMC 50 3 Remote DPI top of SMC 50 with splitter 40 20 COMM x Module When using a 20 COMM x network communication module it must physically be located in control module hardware port 9 However its DPI Port Number assignment is 4 The cable connection for the DPI Port 4 is
53. some form of off stream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor See the Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details NOTE In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage the installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 49 Chapter 2 Customer supp See the contro Installation amp Wiring Figure 31 For 2 Wire Control with Stopping Capability DC Inputs No DPI Control 71 2 L1 1 Circuit Fast Acting SCR Fuses Optional dia T2 4 L2 3 hd Oo T3 6 L3 5 120V 240V AC Control Transformer or AC Power Supply AAAS YVYYY gt r Start Stop _ 9
54. with the 150 SM2 Option Module per IEC 34 11 2 Figure 24 PTC Sensor Characteristics per IEC 34 11 2 4000 L 1330 550 250 Ha 100 20 10 ae S558 g 2 ye ree ada E l z TNF For additional information concerning the configuration and diagnostic information provided by the PTC part of the 150 SM2 Option Module see Chapter 5 Programming Ground Fault Sensing In isolated or high impedance grounded systems core balanced current sensors are typically used to detect low level ground faults which could be due to motor insulation breakdown or entry of foreign objects Detection of ground faults can be used to prevent further damage or alert personnel to perform maintenance The SMC 50 can provide ground fault indication when used with the 150 SM2 Option Module and the 825 CBCT External Ground Fault Core Balance Current Sensor The ground fault current sensor mounts separately from the 42 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 SMC 50 and must be placed within three meters of the SMC 50 A customer supplied cable for wiring the ground fault sensor to the 150 SM2 module must meet the requirements outlined in Table 10 for monitoring purposes only It is not intended as a ground fault circuit interrupter for personnel protection as defined in Article 100 of the National Electric Code NEC and has not been evaluated to UL 1053
55. 0 the motor will Coast to Stop from Slow Speed If the value of Slow Brake Cur is a value other than zero the SMC 50 will use braking to stop the motor using that value as a percent of the Motor FLC See Figure 65 Figure 72 and Table 28 The Accu Stop operating mode requires motor tuning to function properly Tuning can be forced manually or it will otherwise be performed automatically the first time the motor is started See Motor Tuning on page 73 ATTENTION Accu Stop is not intended to be used as an Emergency Stop See applicable standards for emergency stop requirements Figure 65 Accu Stop Braking Motor Speed S Slow Speed Coast to Slow Speed Braking sy arte gt Start gt lt Run gt lt Brake gt Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 89 Chapter3 Operating Modes Table 28 Accu Stop Mode Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Name Minimum Maximum Default Access Units 65 o T StopMoes Tem T 66 Stop Time 0 0 999 SECS 69 Braking Current 0 400 R W FLC 72 Slow Speed 15 to 15 10 73 Slow Brake Cur 0 350 FLC Programming a Stop Time is not required when SMB is used SMB automatically controls the duration Stop Time of the braking current to the motor from the Running at Speed condition until a zero speed condition Zero Speed Braking Shut Off feature function Programming a Stop Ti
56. 0 2 0 SEC 64 Kickstart Level 2 0 90 LRT 306 Starting Torque 2 0 300 100 182 Start Delay 0 30 SEC 82 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Operating Modes Chapter 3 Start Timer Start Delay This feature provides the ability to set a user configurable start 0 30 s delay from the point when the start command is enabled until the start sequence actually occurs This feature applies to any start mode Timed Start Timed Start Parameter 183 forces the starting profile to complete the entire user configured ramp time before applying full voltage In some starting modes e g soft start and with certain loads e g lightly loaded motor an early UTS condition can be generated placing the SMC 50 in full voltage start which might cause excessive current Setting Timed Start to Enable forces all starts to complete the configured Ramp Time Parameter 50 Backspin Timer A Backspin Timer Parameter 67 is provided in order to avoid starting a motor into a backspin condition which may result in motor shaft damage The user configured time begins to count down after a stop maneuver is complete All start inputs are ignored until the backspin timer has timed out Motor Winding Heater Function The Motor Winding Heater function provides low levels of current to each of the motor windings to preheat a cold motor before starting To avoid thermally stressing a single motor winding the SMC 50
57. 0 30 0 Allows the user to configure the time period after the start maneuver start time that 88 Stall Delay Secs 10 0 NA the motor has to reach UTS or else a stall fault will occur RW Fe 0 100 Allows the user to set the change in the notch position at which the SMC 50 will 89 Stall Position 75 NA consider the motor stalled R W Notch 50 0 70 0 Allows the user to change the maximum notch value during pump stop This 90 Maximum 60 0 NA parameter is not typically modified and it is recommended that RA Technical Support R W Pump Control be contacted for assistance before attempting to do so Enables the user to make a manual adjustment to an internal value used for notch ii 40 0 100 0 control gain which impacts the SMC 50 starting control algorithm This parameter is 31 Notch Position 87 5 NA not typically modified and it is recommended that RA Technical Support be contacted B W for assistance before attempting to do so 1 15 For possible future use with internal bypass contactor operation Not applicable for 92 Bypass Delay Secs i1 NA use with an external bypass contactor system Allows a time delay upon closing an R W internal bypass Allows the user to enable the controller s energy saving control scheme which opens 0 00 1 00 the notch reduces power applied to lightly loaded motors thereby reducing the 93 Energy Saver 0 00 motor terminal voltage and winding losses This value should be set between the R W no light
58. 0 R W Bit 0 Disabled Underload 1 Bit 1 Enabled MWatts Over 2 All Disabled as MWatts Under 3 Default MVAR Over 4 MVAR Under 5 MVAR Over 6 MVAR Under 7 MVA Under 8 MVA Over 9 Curr Imbal 10 Jam 11 Stall 12 Starts Hr 13 PM Hours 14 PM Starts 15 Power Qual 16 Open Load 27 THD1 18 Lead PF Un 19 Lead PF Ov 20 Lag PF Un 21 Lag PF Ov 22 Locked Rotor 23 As displayed on the HIM or Drive Explorer configuration tools Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Chapter 4 Enabling Option Module Functional Faults amp Alarm Not all option modules have faults and alarms associated with their specific function s For example the 150 SM4 Option I O and 150 SM6 Parameter Configuration Modules do not have functional faults or alarms However when an option module has functional faults and alarms it also has the ability to individually configure enable and disable them like faults and alarms for the controller and motor 150 SM2 Option Module The 150 SM2 Option Module has individually enabled faults and alarms associated with the Ground Fault and Motor PTC functions The following table provides an overview Table 34 150 SM2 Faults amp Alarms Parameter Function Fault Alarm Bit Bit Units Number Description NameO Assignment Access Default X02 Fault En PTC 0 R W NOTE Gnd Flt 1 Bit 0 Disabled X03 Alarm
59. 0 The time period that the average three phase voltage must exceed the Overvolt A 05 Overvolt A Dly Secs 30 A Level to signal an alarm The Overvolt bit in the Starter alarm En parameter must R W i be set to signal a alarm 7 If the line to line voltage imbalance condition exceeds the Volt Unbal F Lvl for the 5 period set in Volt Unbal F Dly a fault will be signalled The Volt Unbal bit must be 06 Volt Unbal F Lvi 15 A set in the Starter Fault En parameter to signal a fault See manual for details on R W imbalance calculations 0 1 99 0 The time period that the voltage imbalance exceeds the Volt Unbal F Lvl to signal 07 Volt Unbal F Dly Secs 3 0 i A a fault The Volt Unbal bit in the Starter Fault En parameter must be set to signal R W i a fault If the line to line voltage imbalance condition exceeds the Volt Unbal A Lvl for 25 the time period set in Volt Unbal A Dly an alarm will be signalled The Volt Unbal 08 Volt Unbal Alvi 15 A bit must be set in the Starter Alarm parameter to signal a alarm See manual for R W details on imbalance calculations 0 1 99 0 The time period that the voltage imbalance exceeds the Volt Unbal A Level to 09 Volt Unbal A Dly Secs 3 0 A signal a alarm The Volt Unbal bit in the Starter Alarm parameter must be setto R W signal a alarm 25 If the line to line current imbalance condition exceeds the Cur Imbal F Lvl for the 0 Cur Imbal F Lv 15 A time period set in Cur Imbal F Dly a fault will be si
60. 12 Aux 2 On Delay 0 0 10 0 R W seconds X 13 Aux 2 Off Delay 0 0 10 0 R W seconds Normal DeviceLogix UTS Up to Speed Aux Control Fault Network 1 X 14 Aux 3 Config Alarm Network 2 R W NA Ext Bypass Network 3 Ext Brake Network 4 X 15 Aux 3 Invert Disable Enable R W NA X 16 Aux 3 On Delay 0 0 10 0 R W seconds X 17 Aux 3 Off Delay 0 0 10 0 R W seconds X18 Sue Ready Factory Default R W NA X indicates the port number 07 08 or 09 the 150 SM4 is connected to the SMC 50 This port number is displayed on the HIM screen below the AB brand logo An auxiliary output configured for Aux Control using the AuxX Config parameter will be under control of its associated bit form the AuxControl Parameter 180 See 150 SM6 PCM Information on page 276 in Appendix B for bit assignments This function enables forcing an output ON or OFF 186 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Chapter 5 150 SM6 Parameter Configuration Option Module The 150 SM6 Parameter Configuration Option Module is used to configure a select group of parameters The option module itself requires no user configuration The option module status and switch positions that configure its select parameters can be read using the HIM or PC software NOTE Only one 150 SM6 is allowed per SMC 50 To read the 150 SM6 switch positions follow the steps in Basic Configuration using the HIM on page 182 When Linear List is selected
61. 2 control module port 7 NOTE The controller will generate an 1 0 configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is configured for COAST or STOP Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor In this example the Existing Motor Starter fulfills that requirement Due to existing motor starter overload protection the overload protection should be disabled in the SMC 50 controller Set Aux 1 to NORMAL using Parameter 172 NORMAL Aux 1 contact will close to energize the M coil with the START push button and will open to de energize it when the stop maneuver initiated by the stop push button is complete The order of the terminal numbers for the option I O module cam be reversed depending on which expansion slot it is located in on the control module However the function associated with the terminal number remains the same Configure both In1 Input 1 Parameter 56 and In2 Input 2 Parameter 57 to Disable Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 55 Chapter 2 00 Customer supplied See the controller nameplate to verify Terminal 11 In1 DC 24V DC input is co Terminal 10 In2 DC 24V DC input confi NOTE The controller will generate an 1 0 configuration fault Installation amp Wiring Figure 37 For Retrofit
62. 241 253 Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access Allows the user to enter a time value for the Apparent Power Over Fault Delay 0 1 99 0 MVA Ov F Dly If the current actual value of Apparent Power MVA is greater 241 MVA Ov F Dly Secs 94 A han the MVA Ov F Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by MVA Ov PW F Dly a MVA Ov Fault will be signaled Allows the user to enter a value for the MVA Over Alarm Level MVA Ov A 0 000 1000 000 Lvl If the current actual value of the Apparent Power MVA is greater than 242 MVA Ov A Lvi MVA 0 000 A he MVA Ov A Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by MVA Ov A R W Dly a MVA Ov Alarm will be signaled o Allows the user to enter a time value for the Apparent Power Over Alarm 0 1 99 0 Delay MVA Ov A Dly If the current actual value of the Apparent Powe 243 MVA OvADly Secs 1 A MVA is greater than the MVA Ov A Lvl for a time period greater than that R W defined by MVA Ov A Dly a MVA Ov Alarm will be signaled Allows the user to enter a value for the MVA Under Fault Level MVA Un F 0 000 1000 000 Lvl If the current actual value of the Apparent Power MVA is less than the 244 MVA Un F Lvl MVA 0 000 A
63. 28 on page 46 30 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Wiring Terminal Locations Power Structure Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 The SMC 50 wiring terminal locations are shown in Figure 16 Incoming three phase power connections are made to terminals L1 1 L2 3 and L3 5 Load connections to motors are made to T1 2 T2 4 and T3 6 Figure 16 Wiring Terminal Locations coming Thre Phase Pouer Comnecons o t o oio D zu 12 3 L3 5 950000000000 __ Fe a Tm Ae eoe E l 4 ae N T2 4 N T3 6 Ne PP oF hl a eee ae le We a w Q T36 ragag g L Le le Load Connections to Motors See Table 4 for lug information Inside the delta connected motors require an additional delta distribution block See Table 4 For controllers rated 210 520 A a grounding nut size 1 4 20 is provided for grounding per applicable local codes The SMC 50 power structure is a solid state SCR silicon controlled rectifier design capable of interfacing with 200 480V AC or 200 690V AC 690V line and 600V inside the delta motors Released product will handle motor current from 90 520 A The power structure incorporates true current sensing and over temperature protection If the application requi
64. 29 gu aA 0 65535 0 NA A Raw value sent to Output 1 when Output 1 Select is set to Disabled R W Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 283 Appendix B Parameter Information Min Max S Read Write Number Name 1 Units Enum Text Description W Default Access 10V Output 2 set to voltage mode with range of 10V to 10V 10V Output 2 set to voltage mode with range of OV to 10V X 30 Output 2 Range 0 4 1 NA 5V Output 2 set to voltage mode with range of OV to 5V R W 0 20mA Output 2 set to current mode with range of OmA to 20mA 4 20mA Output 2 set to current mode with range of 4mA to 20mA X 31 Output 2 Select 0 15999 1 NA A Selects the parameter used to drive Output 2 R W A 20 000 20 000 Vor Output level when the selected parameter Output 2 Select reaches X 32 Output2 High 10 000 ma NA Output 2 Data Hi R W 20 000 20 000 Vor Output level when the selected parameter Output 2 Select reaches X 33 Output 2 Low 19 g00 ma NA Output 2 Data Lo R W 300000000 Vor Level of the selected parameter Output 2 Select corresponding to an X34 Output 2 Data Hi 300000000 480 mA NA output of Output 2 High R W 300000000 Vor Level of the selected parameter Output 2 Select co
65. 350 FLC Stop Mode Programs the desired Stop Mode NOTE The mode of stopping does not need to match the starting mode e g a Soft Start can have a stop mode programmed for Coast Linear Stop or SMB there is no Current Limit Stop or Torque Stop mode Coast Soft Stop Linear Speed Pump Stop SMB Ext Brake Stop Time Programs the amount of time desired to ramp from full to zero voltage for Soft Linear and Pump Stop mode The actual ramp stop time will depend on the stopping mode selected and load inertia 0 999 seconds Input 1 Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input 1 wired to control terminal 11 24V DC Default Start Coast Input 2 Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input 2 wired to control terminal 10 24V DC Default Disable Disable Start Coast Stop Option Start Coast Start Stop Slow Speed Dual Ramp OL Select Fault Fault NC Clear Fault Emerg Run Motor Heater Aux 1 Config Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact 1 wired across control terminal 4 and 5 NOTE Relay Operational Options e g ON and OFF delay etc are provided in the File Setup Group 1 0 selection sequence See Figure 85 on page 159 Aux 2 Config Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact 2 wired across control terminal 6 and 7 NOTE Relay Operat
66. 50 has the ability to protect against excessive apparent power The user can protect Fault or issue a warning Alarm in the event that the apparent power MVA consumption of the motor being controlled is too high or too low Motor Over Power Apparent Fault amp Alarm Motor Over Power Apparent Fault Code 48 A Motor Over Power Apparent Fault Fault Code 48 condition occurs when the Apparent Power being consumed by the motor rises above a user defined level MVA Ov F Lvl Parameter 240 for a user defined time MVA Ov F Dly Parameter 241 This Fault is enabled or disabled using the MVA Over Power bit in the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Chapter 4 Motor Over Power Apparent Alarm In addition to the Motor Over Power Apparent Fault a Motor Over Power Apparent Alarm is also available This is set up exactly like the Fault using MVA Over Alarm Level Parameter 242 and MVA Over Alarm Delay Parameter 243 This Alarm is enabled or disabled using the MVA Over Power bit in the Motor Alarm Enable Parameter 231 Table 51 Motor Over Power Apparent Parameter List NameO 240s MVAOvF Lvl 0 000 1000000 fs VA 241 MVA Ov F Dly 0 1 99 0 RW SECS 242 MVA Ov A Lvl 0 000 1000 000 MVA 243 MVA Ov A Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Motor Under Power
67. 800 800 50 SD1N 361 30 18 1000 30 18 600 800 30 18 800 1000 50 SD2N 420 1200 700 800 000 1200 50 SD3N 520 1200 800 1000 200 1200 50 SB1N 155 18 450 18 250 300 18 350 450 50 SB2N 190 500 300 400 450 500 50 SB3N 242 700 400 500 600 700 50 SB4N 311 800 500 600 700 800 r 50 SC1N 363 30 1000 30 600 800 30 800 1000 Inside Delta 50 SC2N 450 1200 700 1000 000 1200 50 SC3N 554 1600 800 1200 200 1600 50 SD1N 625 42 1600 42 1000 1200 42 200 1600 50 SD2N 727 2000 1200 1600 600 2000 50 SD3N 900 2500 1200 2000 2000 2500 Consult local codes for proper sizing of short circuit protection Basic Requirements for Type 1 Coordination Under the short circuit condition the starter shall cause no danger to persons or to the installation The starter may not be suitable for further service without repair or replacement of parts For further details see UL 508 CSA C22 2 No 14 and EN 60947 4 2 Non time Delay Fuses Class K5 up to 600 A Class L above 600 A Time Delay Fuses Devices rated 90 180 A 155 311 A Class RK5 Devices rated 210 520 A 363 900 A Class RK5 or Class J up to 600 A Class L above 600 A UL CSA Type 1 amp EN 60947 4 2 Type 1 for Line Connected Motors Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than the listed maximum RMS symmetrical amperes UL 600V maximum IEC 690V maximum UL CSA applications 30kA 600V maximum IEC applications 18kA 690V maximum UL CSA Ty
68. 86 Initial FILE Setup Screens amp Stopped wy 0 Amps Port OO EILE EILE EIIE HILE Monitorin Dp Motor Protection Communications Utility Param File Group A Esc Line Voltage Starting Mode Soft Start amp Stop To program a Soft Start with simple Stop Mode operation the following parameters are provided for user adjustment The Basic parameter set can be accessed with the HIM from the Port lt 00 gt DEV PARAM folder under the File Group File Setup Group Basic Selection sequence Parameter Option default Motor Configuration Setting for the motor configuration Line Connected Wye or Inside the Delta Line Delta NOTE In the AUTO Detect default selection the controller will automatically check the motor configuration Auto Detect Line Voltage Select the value of line voltage being used in the system The correct line voltage value must be entered for the voltage protection functions to work properly 0 700V 480V Starting Mode This mode must be programmed for Soft Start Soft Start Ramp Time Programs the time period that the SMC 50 will ramp the output voltage up to full voltage and to full speed form the Initial Torque level 0 1000 10 seconds Initial Torque The initial reduced output voltage torque level for the voltage ramp to the motor is established and adjusted with this paramete
69. Acceleration Start and Simple Stop Mode operation the following parameters are provided for user adjustment The Basic parameter set can be accessed with the HIM see Figure 88 Parameter Option default Motor Config Setting for the motor configuration Line Connected Wye or Inside the Delta Line Delta NOTE In the AUTO Detect default selection the controller will automatically check the motor configuration Auto Detect Line Voltage Select the value of line voltage being used in the system The correct line voltage value must be entered for the voltage protection functions to work properly 0 700V 480V Starting Mode This mode must be programmed for Linear Speed Linear Speed O Ramp Time Programs the time period that the SMC 50 will ramp the output voltage up to full voltage and to full speed from Stop With the Linear Speed Starting mode the time to ramp to full speed will closed to this value depending on load characteristics 0 1000 10 seconds Initial Torque The initial reduced output torque level for the voltage ramp to the motor is established and adjusted to this parameter Torque level at which the ramp begins 0 90 70 LRT Current Limit Level Limits the current supplied to the motor throughout the Linear Start and Stop cycle NOTE Enter a value so as to limit the current but not so low as to inhibit the start cycle 50 600 350 FLC Stop Mode Program
70. Always 0 Reserved Hae Control Module Input 1 Status 1 Input Closed ee Control Module Input 2 Status 1 Input Closed SSBoard E Snapshot of the internal temperature of the SMC control module when a fault 332 Temp degC 25 100 20 A occurs The value is overwritten if a subsequent fault occurs R SSLine Snapshot of the line frequency of the three phase voltage when a fault occurs The 333 Frequency HZ 0 100 0 A value is overwritten if a subsequent fault occurs R Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 275 Appendix B Parameter Information Table 153 Parameter 334 346 Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access olt una 6 Modifies the Auto Restarting of the selected faults so that the restart is 334 Restart Auto all disabled Undervoliage attempted when the fault condition is removed rather than after a fixed time R W Line Loss delay 335 DLX Input 1 e NA General purpose parameter used as an input to the DeviceLogix Engine R W 336 DLX Input 2 a NA General purpose parameter used as an input to the DeviceLogix Engine R W General purpose datalink used to select another parameter within the 337 DLX DL Input 1 0 159999 1 NA SMC 50 as an inp
71. Apparent Fault amp Alarm Motor Under Power Apparent Fault Code 47 A Motor Under Power Apparent Fault Fault Code 47 condition occurs when the Apparent Power being consumed by the motor falls below a user defined time MVA Un F Lvl Parameter 244 for a user defined time MVA Un F Dly Parameter 245 This Fault is enabled or disabled using the MVA Under Power bit in the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 Motor Under Power Apparent Alarm In addition to the Motor Under Power Apparent Fault a Motor Under Power Apparent Alarm is also available This is set up exactly like the Fault using MVA Under Alarm Level Parameter 246 and MVA Over Alarm Delay Parameter 242 This Alarm is enabled or disabled using the MVA Under Power bit in the Motor Alarm Enable Parameter 231 Table 52 Motor Under Power Apparent Parameter List NameO 244 MVAUnFLvl 0 000 100 000 fs VA 245 MVA Un F Dly 0 1 99 0 RW SECS 246 MVA Un A Lvl 0 000 1000 000 MVA 247 MVA Un A Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 125 Chapter4 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Power Factor PF Motor Power Factor PF Fault amp Alarm Protection Lagging Power Factor Under Fault Code 63 Leading Power Factor Under Fault Code 64 Lagging Power Factor Over Fault Code 65 Leading Power Factor Over Fault Code 66 Laggi
72. Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 293 AppendixE Accessories HIMO SMC 50 Bezel Mount or Hand Held 20 HIM A6 Door Mounted includes cable NEMA Type 4X 1A 20 HIM C6S Remote Mount Bezel 20 HIM B1 0 3 m 0 98 ft 1202 H03 1 0 m 3 28 ft 1202 H10 Extension Cables 3 0 m 9 8 ft 1202 H30 9 0 m 29 5 ft 1202 H90 Splitter Cable 1203 S03 Communication Modules DeviceNet 20 COMM D ControlNet 20 COMM C Profibus 20 COMM P RS 485 DF1 20 COMM S InterBus 20 COMM Modbus TCP 20 COMM M EtherNet 20 COMM E Dual Port EtherNet 20 COMM ER RS 485 HVAC 20 COMM H ControlNet Fiber 20 COMM O DriveExecutive 9303 4DTEO1ENE Programming Software for DriveTools SPO 9303 4DTSO1ENE Windows 7 2000 XP Vista download from www rockwellautomation com AnaCANda RS232 to DPI Serial 1203 SSS AnaCANda USB to DPI USB 1203 USB Connected Components Workbench PC Interface Used with a Cat No 150 SM2 to provide current feedback to the SMC 50 when in external bypass configuration Requires user supplied current transformers with 5 A secondary Requires Cat No 199 LF1 lugs Requires Cat No 199 LG1 lugs For remote mounting details see the HIM User Manual 20HIM UM001 The hand held HIM requires a Cat No 20 HIM H10 cable ncludes a Cat No 1202 C30 cable that is 3 0 m 9 8 ft in length ncludes DriveExecutive and Driv
73. Aux2 Config a Ext Brake Aux2 closes when Ext Braking command is active and opens when it is not active R W DeviceLogix Aux2 is controlled by DeviceLogix program Aux Control When an auxiliary is configured for Aux Control a bit within the parameter Aux Control controls the state of that auxiliary Network 1 With an auxiliary configured as Network 1 it is controlled over the Local Area Network LAN as Relay 1 Network 2 With an auxiliary configured as Network 2 it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 2 Network 3 With an auxiliary configured as Network 3 it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 3 Network 4 With an auxiliary configured as Network 4 it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 4 Enables the user to invert the logic of the Aux2 output When disabled it is a normally open relay output contact when de energized By enabling the invert function the relay 0 1 contact becomes a normally closed contact when de energized 177 Aux 2 Invert 0 R W 0 Disable Aux2 relay output not inverted Default N 0 Enable Aux2 relay output inverted N C N C is electrically held Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 263 Appendix B Parameter Information Table 141 Parameter 178 185 Min Max Read Write Number Name
74. Code 17 The SMC 50 can detect and report a No Load Motor Fault no motor detected Fault Code 14 condition and Open Motor Phase Loss Fault condition for each individual motor phase A B or C Fault Code 15 16 amp 17 A check for No Load and Open Motor Phase is done as an SMC 50 pre start activity and is checked immediately after the motor start command and before the first SCR gating pulse There are no user configurable parameters associated with this Fault The No Load and Open Motor Phase Loss Fault can be enabled or disabled using the Open Load bit in the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 In addition to the Open Load Fault an Open Load Alarm can be enabled or disabled using the Open Load bit in the Motor Alarm Enable Parameter 231 Current Transformers CT Loss Fault CT Loss Phase A Fault Code 30 CT Loss Phase B Fault Code 31 CT Loss Phase C Fault Code 32 The CT Loss Fault is provided on a per phase basis phase A B amp C Fault Code 30 31 amp 32 and occurs when the current feedback signal from one of the SMC 50 s internal CTs is invalid Indication of an invalid CT feedback signal is when the SMC 50 remains at the minimum negative current or maximum positive current for its current range This Fault cannot be disabled and no parameters need to be configured Locked Rotor Fault amp Alarm Locked Rotor Fault Code 70 The Locked Rotor Fault Fault Code 70 provides indication that the rotor of
75. Current Range A 100 240V AC 24V DC 90 180 150 VA 75W Module with Heat Sink Fan 210 320 150 VA 75 W 361 520 300 VA 300 W Human Interface Module HIM 10 VA 2W 150 SM2 30 VA 4W Optional Power Adder for 150 SM3 30 VA AW E ae addto M agsma 50VA ZW 150 SM6 5 VA 1W 20 COMM X 25 VA 4W Add to Base power using the formula below to obtain total power requirements Max 1 of each option type per control module Table 2 Continuous Duty Power Structure Heat Dissipation at Rated Current Description Current Range A bitte Iwi 90 270 110 330 140 420 180 540 210 630 troller Rating A Controller Rating A 760 780 320 960 361 1083 420 1260 520 1560 Power Calculation Max total power aa ont S lt Watt dissipation Base Power Options Power Structure a Example 361 A device with a 20 COMM X module HIM and Cat No 150 SM4 Max total power 300 25 10 50 1083 dissipation Base Power Options Power Structure Max total power dissipation 1468 Watts Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Enclosures Mounting 18 The open style design of the SMC 50 requires an enclosure with at least 150 mm 6 in of clearance above and below the controller The enclosure will allow air to flow through the heat sink keeping the surrounding air ambient temperature within the required range
76. Enables user to configure the turns ratio for the CT being used R W 0 00 5 00 Enables the user to configure the level value of ground current that X6 Gnd Fit Level 2 50 Amps NA determines a ground fault condition R W 0 1 250 0 Sets the time limit that the ground fault level must be exceeded before X 7 Gnd Fit Delay 0 5 Secs NA signalling a fault R W 0 00 5 00 Sets the level of ground current that determines a ground fault alarm X 8 Gnd Fit A Level 2 50 Amps NA condition R W 0 1 250 0 Sets the time limit that the ground fault level must be exceeded before X 9 Gnd Fit A Delay 0 5 Secs NA signalling an alarm R W X 10 Gnd Fit Inh Time riba Secs NA User configurable time delay to inhibit ground fault after a start R W X 11 Ground Current occ Amps NA Measured ground current R W Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 281 Appendix B Parameter Information Min Max z Sat Read Write Number Name Units Enum Text Description uy Default Access X12 CT Enable sf NA Disable Disables the CT function RW Enable Enables the CT function X 13 CT Scaling A 0 00 5 00 Displayed result of the SMC 50 tuning feature determination of the scaling X14 CT Scaling B 0 01 NA A between external CT and the internal current measuring circuitry R X 15 CT Scaling C X 16 Phase Shift A ae 12 5 12 5 Displayed result of the SMC 50 tuning feature det
77. Fault Code 25 The SMC 50 provides Fault Protection Fault Code 25 against reverse connection CBA of line power phases Phase Reversal protection is enabled or disabled via the Phase Rev bit in the Starter Fault Enable Parameter 136 There are no phase reversal fault parameters to configure A phase reversal Alarm is also available and enabled via the Phase Rev bit in the Starter Alarm Enable Parameter 137 There are no Alarm parameters to configure High amp Low Line Power Frequency Protection Fault amp Alarm The SMC 50 has the ability to protect against poor line power quality by offering programmable frequency based protection The user can fault the starter if the line power frequency is either too high or too low High and low frequency limits for both Faults and Alarms are configured through the parameters listed in Table 42 Note that each also has a programmable delay to limit nuisance trips Frequency Fault Code 49 The high low Frequency Fault Code 49 is enabled or disabled using the Frequency bit Freq in the Starter Fault Enable Parameter 136 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Chapter 4 Frequency Alarm In addition to the Fault a Frequency Alarm is also available The Frequency Alarm is enabled or disabled using the Frequency bit in the Starter Alarm Enable Parameter 137 NOTE Regardless of the user defined high or low fre
78. Function Block Elements 0 0c ee cece cece ennnen errre 296 Bit and Analog I O Points can Avene vsueh deatea sd scostaaeeeenannt 297 Bit Aput enen hes one AN a ad A EES 297 Bit Qutp ts casts Whereas is Soares hey O es 297 A alog Unputs rae rerea eari ara ves uends duds E E TRER 298 Analog Outputs ecri arterei ones ERTE E NNE OT E ERER 299 TPS aenar eE E AEE EEE i 299 Data typ s Arena e a n E K AEE A AAAA 299 DeviceLogix scratchpad registers a vaneeoaanabwan aay eumddoasers 299 SMC 50 DeviceLogix Input Datalinks P337 P342 299 Program Examples sieer reeeo nae TA EEE PEPENE EREEREER 299 Example 1 Selector Switch Operation 0 seen eee 299 Example 2 Diverter Operation 22 3052 620 4 e teeta Ss 301 Example 3 Wet Well Operation eve wiodriceeeed Ateteresstdan 302 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Chapter 1 Product Overview Other Related Documents Description Quick Start Publication 150 QS003 Option Module Instructions Analog and Digital I O Options Publication 150 IN052 Parameter Configuration Publication 150 IN053 PTC Ground Fault Current Feedback Publication 150 IN051 Accessory Component Instructions Protection Modules Publication 150 IN036 IEC Terminal Covers Frame B Publication 10000152881 External Bypass Frames C and D Publication 150 IN071 Selection Guide Publication 150 SG010 DeviceLogix User Manual Publicatio
79. HIM Setup Group Slow Speed and Setup Group Stopping must be used See the two previous programming sections SMB Smart Motor Breaking and Slow Speed with Braking The Motor Protection Group see Figure 89 on page 175 is used to program motor and starter protection functions The Motor Protection Group is accessed from the HIM using the Port 00 DEV PARAM folder under the File Group File Motor Protection selection sequence By using this file group the SMC 50 provides the ability to individually enable disable or restart the motor and starter Faults and Alarms Each of the 21 different Motor Starter Protection Setup groups e g Overload Underload Jam Stall Voltage Unbal etc has at least one selection for Fault Enable Alarm Enable and Restart Enable For bit assignment definitions for the related Faults and Alarms see Table 32 and Table 33 on page 105 in Chapter 4 IMPORTANT The majority of parameters have a Fault and an Alarm setting To modify any Fault or Alarm bit for enable disable functionality perform the following steps Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Chapter 5 1 From the Motor Protection Group select the desired group Bp Stopped AUTO wy 0 Amps FO Port OO Param File Group EILE Motor Protection A GROUP Underload GROUP Undervoltage GROUP Overvoltage y 2 Press ENTER number 5 from keypad to display the associated bit paramete
80. Heating Time v v v Y 4 Cur Limit Cur Limit Cur Limit Cur Limit w 7 Level Level Level Level Initial Torque Heating Level Initial Torque Initial Torque Starting Torque Input 1 OR Input 2 No Dual Ramp Max Torque y es y v Rated Torque Starting v Mode 2 Rated Speed repeat of ated Spee Starting Mode selections Stop Mode Aux 1 Config Vv Soft Stop Linear Speed Pump Stop Ext Brake SMB Coast Aux 2 Config l j Stop Time Stop Time Stop Time Stop Time Braking it Done Motor FLC Vv Overload Class Vv Input 1 y Input 2 Input 1 OR Input 2 No Slow Speed Yes Slow Speed Input 1 OR Input 2 No OL Select Yes v OL Class 2 L y Parameter Search amp Configuration The 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S can access all of the SMC 50 parameters It provides two basic ways to search for and modify a specific parameter or group of parameters by 1 parameter number or 2 File Group The following example explains how to search by parameter number using the 20 HIM A6 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 155 Chapter 5 Programming Parameter Search amp Configuration by Parameter Number To perform a parameter number search and modification perform the following steps eee 1 Ensure the initial SMC 50 Power Up screen appears on the HIM as shown below St d DE Nhs SMC 50 w Standard 2 Using the PAR soft key type the desired parameter number to display press the ENTER soft
81. Information Spare Replacement Parts Control Module Power Pole Assembly Replacement Accessories Using DeviceLogix SCPD Performance Type 1 E 00eeeeeeneeeeeaneees 246 Additional Specifications ouks bower wsee he oa ipo ee lndan 249 Appendix B SMG 50 Information n se che Seauaeaee ie yooh oheuse en eededn 253 150 SM6 PCM Information 0 cece ec eee ernro ernen 276 150 SM4 Digital I O Module Information 0005 277 150 SM2 Ground Fault Module Information 00 281 150 SM3 Analog I O Module Information 00005 282 Appendix C SMC 50 Power Poles and Assemblies 0 ee eee eee eee 287 SMC 50 Control Modules 0 0 cece cece eee eee ence ren 287 Option Modules siss a niinen tat aaeanee Cohen AL EE ERSS 288 Removable Terminal Blocks for Control Wiring 288 Fea E o AEREA EE css Sus aoe ee oe EE EE EES aes ee eto Srna eae oan 288 COVERS ittes wintirhc a hye ae eh E plete idiom orth es oY 288 Batterye piri ako aaa alk a Ne E aS AII NA NI OIE an eed 289 Renewal Part Instructions 0 cece cece eee cece errereen 289 Appendix D Removal amp Replacement vy diveinseeeee vag Yaa ee SR ee 291 Appendix E Catalog Nuimbeisi pte ccs syed antintirese a ee See a cs 293 Appendix F LBRO ie LICH So 3 2c 55 dena aver eso anerarnim bane ae dh wh dinn Sawa eouae 295 Piranen we AM dhol ChE AER lM oT oil a len Le laa AU tl a oe Nh dat 295
82. Kickstart Time 0 0 2 0 R W SEC 55 Kickstart Level 0 0 90 ALRT 182 Start Delay 0 0 30 SEC 186 UTS Level 0 100 75 A 78 Motor FLC 1 0 2200 0 Amps Selectable Kickstart This feature provides a torque current boost at startup to break away loads that require a pulse of high torque to get started The amount of torque pulse is selectable from 0 90 of locked rotor torque using Kickstart Level Parameter 55 The time duration for the selectable kickstart is user adjustable from 0 0 2 0 seconds using Kickstart Time Parameter 54 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 75 Chapter 3 76 Operating Modes Kickstart is available in Soft Start Current Limit Pump and Torque Control starting modes Figure 54 provides a graphical representation of Kickstart Table 15 provides the Kickstart Mode Parameter List Figure 54 Selectable Kickstart Percent Voltage Initial Torque lt 4 Start gt lt Run gt lt Soft Stop gt Time in Seconds Table 15 Kickstart Mode Parameter List Parameter Number Minimum Maximum Default Units 54 Kickstart Time 0 0 2 0 SEC 55 Kickstart Level 0 0 90 LRT Current Limit Start This starting mode provides a true current limit start and is used when it is required to limit the maximum starting current to the load This is accomplished using Current Limit Level Parameter 53 which is user adjustable from 50 600 of the moto
83. MVA Un F Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by MVA Un F Dly a R W MVA Un Fault will be signaled 01 990 Allows the user to enter a time value for the Apparent Power Under Fault 1 99 Delay MVA Un F Dly If the current actual value of the Apparent Power MVA 245 MV Ur EDIY Secs 0 1 A is less than the MVA Un F Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by RAW MVA Un F Dly a MVA Un Fault will be signaled Allows the user to enter a value for the MVA Under Alarm Level MVA Un A 0 000 1000 000 Lvl If the current actual value of the Apparent Power MVA is less than the 246 MVA Un A Lvl MVA 0 000 A MVA Un A Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by MVA Un A Dly a R W MVA Un Alarm will be signaled Allows the user to enter a time value for the Apparent Power Under Alarm 0 1 99 0 Delay MVA Un A Dly If the current actual value of the Apparent Power 247 MVAUnADly Secs 1 A MVA is less than the MVA Un A Lvl for a time period greater than that R W defined by MVA Un A Dly a MVA Un Alarm will be signaled Allows the user to enter a value for the Leading Power Factor Over Fault Level 0 00 1 00 Lead PF Ov F Lvi If the current actual Power Factor value is leading more 248 Lead PF OvFLvl 0 00 A han the Lead PF Ov F Lvi for a time period greater than that defined by Lead RAW PF Ov F Dly a Lead PD Ov Fault will be signaled o Allows the user to enter a time value for the Leading Power Factor Over Fault 0 1
84. Maintenance A GROUP History GROUP Restart GROUP Locked Rotor v 5 Use the arrow keys on the keypad to navigate to the Fault or Alarm number to review then press ENTER number 5 from the keypad M Stopped AUTO wy 0 Amps FO Port OO Param File Group FILE Motor Protection GROUP History A Fault 5 Alarm 1 Vv f Stopped AUTO wy 0 Amps Port 00 Dev Param 138 4 Fault 1 61 NOTE Inthe example above Fault 61 is displayed For Fault Alarm code data see Table 110 on page 224 220 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Diagnostics Chapter 9 Accessing the Fault amp Alarm Buffers In addition to the SMC 50 storing the most recent Alarm and Fault codes as parameters the date and time the Fault or Alarm occurred is stored in the Fault Buffer last five faults and Alarm Buffer last 100 alarms To access Fault buffers and Alarm Buffers using the 20 HIM A6 the Diagnostic folder must be accessed To do so perform the following steps 1 From the SMC 50 standard power up screen press the Folders key at the lower left of the display 2 Using the right or left arrow key display the DIAGNOSTIC folder 3 Using the up or down arrow key select either Faults or Alarms then press ENTER In this example Faults will be used St d AUTO AG aa FO lt 4 AB DIAGNOSTIC gt Faus 00 Alarms Reset Device Device
85. Multi Motor Applications 04 0 vacarewatie ee iee eee eevee een 27 Motor Winding Heater Capability oace cits vaceinnecvaes tien 29 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC s jc ccsaeereeee itaeecees 30 OI Ke 1 5 cotta Mamata E caretaand tm cla Monee oan OE 30 Wiring seee tli d edie eee Qe a E greene eae 30 Additional Requirements jixtoscst vi gesiude cee eeteudeewsecen 30 Wiring Terminal Locations dsc cs atv ot oa chewed atisaaes 31 Power Struct r eneren esto aha eden av oa Meron he BS wen 31 Power Wiring tata e endea naa Shel al CA itn a Ae OSL eM alae 31 Line Connected MiOtetssis 4 airs aca aitos belek s 32 Delta Connected Motors ssssssrrrurseerrrrrrrrrerrer 32 Grounding Provision tcc cr cncgereiies Ghidekoe esenert abies 33 Power SOS tes wathnre Ee lind ed tte cana ade AN cells BU A 33 Conta Powcte theta E E E OO ok Erg Mes Bn oc ee 35 Fan POWER se iveccen dea grace wand evento bases vie oe enone a T ana 35 Control Terminal Designations 300 4 ooilvins va chianss wane dense 36 Real Time Clock RTC Battery Replacement 000ee00ee 48 Standard Controller Wiring Diagrams 0 0 00 c cece eae 49 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 3 Table of Contents Operating Modes Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Soft Stop Pump Control amp Smart Motor Braking SMB 66 Slow Speed with Braking s ssssssrerrersreresrereerererereu 67 Preset Slow Speed esrisirss cucisti
86. Overload Set to allow the Overload Reset Level parameter to function The Time to Overload Trip Time to OL Trip Parameter 19 provides indication of how much time is left before an overload trip will occur given the current operating conditions If the overload fault is disabled this parameter will read its maximum value The Time to OL Reset Parameter 20 provides indication of how much time is left before an overload fault will clear based on the cooling decay algorithm If the overload parameter is disabled or has not tripped then this parameter will be Zero Table 36 Overload Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Name Minimum Maximum Default Access Units 75 Overload Class 5 30 10 76 Overload Class2 5 30 10 R W 71 Service Factor 0 01 1 99 1 15 E 78 Motor FLC 1 0 2200 0 Amps 80 OL Reset Level 1 99 75 MTU 18 Motor Therm Usage 0 200 R MTU 81 OL Shunt Time 0 999 SECS 82 OL Inhibit Time 0 999 R W SECS 83 Overload A Lvl 0 100 MTU 19 Time to OL Trip 0 10000 r SECS 20 Time to OL Reset 0 10000 SECS 84 Locked Rtr Level 400 1000 600 R W FLC 85 Locked Rtr Time 1 1000 R W SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Configuration for a second OL Class Underload Fault amp Alarm The SMC 50 provides the ability to trip on underload when the motor current falls below a user defined
87. Parameter Minimum Maximum Default Access Units Name 127 PM Starts 1 50000 100 R W 22 Starts to PM 0 50000 R 16 Meter Reset Ready Elapsed Time Energy R W Time to PM Starts to PM As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Line Loss Protection Silicon Controlled Rectifier SCR Protection Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Chapter 4 Line Loss Fault Phase A Code1 Line Loss Fault Phase B Code 2 Line Loss Fault Phase C Code 3 The SMC 50 is able to individually identify and provide a Fault and or Alarm if a power line loss occurs on any phase NOTE Phase A B or C loss Fault Code 1 2 or 3 respectively There are no line loss Fault Parameters to configure The Line Loss Fault is enabled or disabled using the Line Loss bit in the Starter Fault Enable Parameter 136 In addition a Line Loss Alarm can be enabled or disabled using the Line Loss bit in the Starter Alarm Enable Parameter 137 NOTE If Line Loss is disabled consider enabling the Undervoltage Fault to limit potential motor damage caused by phase loss Shorted SCR Fault Phase A B or C Shorted SCR Fault Phase A Code 4 Shorted SCR Fault Phase B Code 5 Shorted SCR Fault Phase C Code 6 The SMC 50 is able to detect if any one of its SCRs are shorted in any phase The shorted SCR Fault is always enabled user cannot disable No user interven
88. Perform a resistance check see Power Module e Loose gate lead Check section replace power module if necessary Open Gate 789 Start or St e Remove control module from the power section and with phase indication oo aI OF stop check gate lead connections TB5 TB6 and TB 7 are firmly seated to the control module e Disable this fault alarm feature e Controller ventilation blocked e Check for proper controller ventilation e Controller duty cycle exceeded e Check application appropriate duty cycle SCR Overtemp or e Fan failure e Wait for controller to cool or provide external PTC Power Pole 10 or 60 In All Modes e Ambient temperature limit exceeded cooling if ambient temperature is high e Failed thermistor e Check for fan operation Replace fan if necessary e Replace power module or contro module as needed 14 e Loss of load side power wiring with Check all load side power connections No Load or Open Load 15 phase indication 15 A 17 C e Check motor windings megger with Phase Indication 16 Prestart Only e Start command cycled unexpectedly 17 with motor rotating e Powerline ca isgreaterthan ees ie power en an correct if necessary or the programmed value change the programmed value soi a or 18 or 42 e The delay time programmed is too e Extend the delay time to match the application short for the application requirements e Disable this fault alarm feature Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P
89. RAM is the work area of the controller after it is powered up The SMC 50 uses an Auto Store feature when programming parameters When parameters are modified in the program mode the new values are stored immediately in RAM and then in EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory once the enter key has been pressed If control power is lost prior to the enter key being pressed these values will be lost When the device first powers up the values from the EEPROM area of memory are copied into RAM ROM Read only Memory Set Defaults Stopped AUTO wy 0 Amps FO amp 4 MEMORY Ue x HIM CopyCat A 46 ESC The SMC 50 comes with factory default parameter values These settings are stored in non volatile ROM and are displayed the first time you enter the Program mode via the Linear List or File Group mode using the HIM To restore factory parameter defaults 1 Navigate to the Memory folders screen with Port lt 00 gt displayed NOTE Option modules can also be restored to defaults using this method Ensure its respective port number is displayed 2 Select highlight the Set Defaults line then press ENTER 5 The following text will be displayed WARNING Sets all Parameters to factory defaults Continue 3 Press the ENTER soft key to change defaults or the ESC soft key to return to the previous screen NOTE Factory defaults can also be restored using the Parameter Managem
90. SB3N 242 400 500 700 140U M6D3 D70 A 150 SB4N 311 500 600 700 140U M6D3 D70 A side Dili 150 SC1N 363 601 800 N 1000 140U N6L3 E12 140U NRP3 E10 150 SC2N 450 700 1000 1200 140U N6L3 E12 140U NRP3 E12 150 SC3N 554 800 1200 1200 140U N6L3 E12 140U NRP3 E12 150 SD1N 625 1000 1200 R 1600 140U R6L3 E20 140U R20RP3 E16 150 SD2N 727 1200 1600 2000 140U R6L3 E20 140U R20RP3 E20 150 SD3N 900 1200 2000 2000 140U R6L3 E20 140U R20RP3 E20 Consult local codes for proper sizing of short circuit protection Basic Requirements for Type 1 Coordination Under the short circuit condition the starter shall cause no danger to persons or to the installation The starter may not be suitable for further service without repair or replacement of parts For further details refer to UL 508 CSA C22 2 No 14 and EN 60947 4 2 High Capacity fault ratings when Circuit breaker must be of the designated 140U Frame Other circuit breakers pending sed with time delay Class J or time delay Class L fuse Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 247 AppendixA Specifications Table 124 Semiconductor Fusing and Type 2 Coordination Ratings Semiconductor SCR Fusing Catalog Current Rating t North America 0O Type 2 Coordination Per EN 60947 4 2 60 Number Line Inside
91. Saver switch 5 set to Enable the Energy Saver Level Parameter 193 is automatically configured by the PCM to 0 25 NOTE 1 With the Automatic Zero Speed Detection method the controller applies the user selected Braking Current defined by the Device Configuration Switch Bank Switch 6 7 and 8 senses a motor Zero Speed condition and automatically stops the braking process brake current OFF 2 With the Timed Brake method the user selected Braking Current is applied for the user configured Stop Time regardless of the motor speed e g Automatic Zero Speed Detection disabled The Timed Brake method can be used in applications where detecting zero speed is ineffective or when braking the motor to a complete stop results in random overload trips With this method braking is applied for a fixed time equal to the Stop Time setting Rotary Switch S4 and multiplied by ten An ideal Stop Time setting can be accomplished by trial and error but should always allow for some coast time Setting the Stop Time for too long of a time period can result in braking current to be applied to a stopped motor and will likely result in overload trips Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 143 Chapter 5 144 Programming Table 69 ON OFF 8 Switch DIP Switch Definitions Protection PROTECTION Configuration Bank Switch Number 0 Switch OPEN Preset Protection Level Enabled default P
92. Screen Navigation Number keys on the HIM Table 95 Control Screen Soft Key Functionality Label Name Function ESC Reverts back to the previous screen Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 203 Chapter7 Optional HIM Operation Table 96 Control Screen Navigation Number Keys Label Name Function JOG D Stop Option for SMC 50 REF W z NA Displays Rockwell Automation Drive s Technical Support direct phone HELP 3 number website address and email address REV 4 a NA EDIT REF NA FWD gt D NA Allows HIM removal without causing a fault if the HIM is not the last controlling device The REMOVE HIM label is not available when the HIM REMOVE HIM 7 has a manual control of the host SMC 50 In this case a fault will occur if the HIM is removed REF A EN NA MANUAL 9 NA Technical Support is not applicable to the SMC 50 Technical Support for the SMC 50 may be reached at 440 646 5800 option 2 and option 4 or raictechsupport ra rockwell com CopyCat Function of the 20 HIM A6 The SMC 50 supports the CopyCat function of the 20 HIM AG For details on using the CopyCat function see the 20 HIM A6 User Manual 20HIM UM001_EN P 204 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Overview Communication Ports HIM Keypad amp Displays Chapter 8 Communications The SMC 50 provides advanced communications capabilities that allow it to be s
93. Second entry in the fault buffer 140 Fault 3 af 000 NA Third entry in the fault buffer R W 41 4 Fourth entry in the fault buffer 42 5 Fifth entry in the fault buffer The oldest fault displayed in the fault buffer 43 First entry in the alarm buffer and is the most recent alarm to have occurred 44 2 Second entry in the alarm buffer 45 3 Third entry in the alarm buffer 0 1000 46 Alarm 4 0 NA Fourth entry in the alarm buffer RAW Fifth entry in the alarm buffer There can be up to 100 events stored in the alarm 47 5 buffer To see the whole buffer go the diagnostics tab on the HIM or DriveExplorer The bits in this parameter allow the user to enable bit 1 or disable bit 0 which DPI ports the SMC 50 will accept Start and Maneuver commands from Coast Stop commands are always accepted from any port bit 1 port 1 On board HIM Default 0 bit 2 port 2 DPI port on control module Default 0 148 Logic Mask _ 0 65535 0 NA bit 3 port 3 DPI port on control module with splitter Default 0 R W bit 4 port 4 Internal Comm module Default 0 bit 5 13 unused bit 14 port 14 DeviceLogix engine bit 15 unused Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 261 Appendix B Parameter Information Table 139 Parameter 149 171
94. Speed UTS at the end of the programmed starting ramp time plus the time programmed in the Stall Delay time Phase Reversal F A Fault Alarm is indicated when the incoming power to the SMC 50 is in any sequence other than ABC Exp Removed F Removing an expansion module device e g a 150 SM4 from a SMC 50 will result in a x026 fault where x is the SMC 50 port number 7 8 or 9 the expansion module was installed DPI devices e g 20 HIM A6 or 20 COMM X will only generate this fault if its associated bit in Logix Mask parameter is set NOTE If an expansion module device e g a 150 SM4 is removed from a SMC 50 the message Device Conflicts Port xy Not Found will be displayed on the HIM or PC software when power returns Exp Incompat F Inserting an expansion module or DPI device into an incompatible controller port number or inserting an expansion module into a controller with incompatible version of firmware will result in this Fault The port number of the offending device is included as the first digit of this Fault code Expansion F General Fault that can be generated by an expansion or peripheral device The port number of the offending device is included as the first digit of this Fault code Starts per Hour F A Starts per Hour is the maximum number of starts user configured within a sliding one hour window Once the number of starts per hour is reached any additional
95. Start gt lt Run gt Coast Reverse Time in Seconds Table 27 Preset Slow Speed amp Slow Speed with Braking Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Name Minimum Maximum Default Access Units 72 Slow Speed 15 to 15 10 73 Slow Brake Cur 0 350 FLC Direction of the motor rotation is dependent on the sign of Slow Speed Brake if Slow Brake Cur Parameter gt 0 and lt 350 coast if 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Operating Modes Chapter 3 Accu Stop This function combines the benefits of the SMB and Preset Slow Speed features For general purpose positioning the Accu Stop function provides a brake from full speed to the preset slow speed setting then a brake or coast to stop The Accu Stop function is enabled whenever the Stop Mode Parameter 65 is configured for SMB and e acontrol input is configured for Stop e acontrol input is configured for Start e acontrol input is configured for Slow Speed With the above SMC 50 control configuration and with the motor running enabling the Slow Speed input will initiate a SMB to the configured Slow Speed percent value Parameter 72 The SMC 50 will continue to run the motor in slow speed until the Slow Speed input is disabled At that point the motor will either Brake to Stop or Coast to Stop depending on the value of the Slow Brake Cur Parameter 73 If the value of Slow Brake Cur is zero
96. Start Sto Input Terminal A4 0 initiates a stop maneuver as set up by stopping 0 13 P parameters 1 initiates a start as set up b the start parameters X5 Input 4 0 NA Slow Speed Runs motor in slow speed mode as set up by slow speed parameters High R W Input Terminal A4 0 use starting mode 1 Dual Ramp 1 use starting mode 2 OL Select Input Terminal A4 0 use Motor Overload Class 1 7 1 use Motor Overload Class 2 Faul A fault condition is forced if Input Terminal A4 1 Fault NC A fault condition is forced if Input Terminal A4 0 Clear Fault Clear a fault from Input Terminal A4 High Emer R n Allows motor to run in emergency run mode if asserted from Input Terminal g A4 does not start motor High Motor Heater Runs motor heating algorithm if asserted at Input Terminal A4 Low Allows the user to configure the functionality of the Aux1 Relay Output on the 150 SM4 Digital 1 0 Option Module Normal Aux1 closes when start asserted opens when motor stops Aux1 closes when motor reaches up to speed and opens when the motor is Up to Speed not at speed Fault Aux closes when the SMC 50 enters a fault state and opens when the fault is cleared Alarm Aux closes when the SMC 50 detects an alarm condition and opens when the alarm is cleared Ext Bypass Aux1 closes when the SMC 50 enters the external bypass mode and opens Yp when it leaves that mode SCR Control 0 11 Aux1 closes when the external braking command is active and opens
97. The In1 Under bit must be set in the Fault Enable R W Parameter 3000 0 3000 0 If Input 2 exceeds this level for the time period set in the In2 Over F Dly X 48 n2 Over F Lvl 1050 ol NA A parameter an In2 Over fault will be signaled The In2 Over bit must be R W set in the Fault Enable Parameter The time period that Input 2 must exceed the In2 Over F Lvl to signal a X49 n2 Over F Dly 0 1 99 0 3 0 Bet A fault The In2 Over bit must be set in the Fault Enable Parameter R W 3000 0 3000 0 If Input 2 exceeds this level for the time period set in the In2 Over A Dly X 50 n2 Over A Lvl 000 0 i NA A parameter an In2 Over alarm will be signaled The In2 Over bit must be R W set in the Alarm Enable Parameter The time period that Input 2 must exceed the In2 Over F Lvl to signal a X51 n2 Over A Dly 0 1 99 0 3 0 SEL A ault The In2 Over bit must be set in the Fault Enable Parameter RW 3000 0 3000 0 If Input 2 remains below this level for the time period set in the In2 X 52 n2 Under F Lvl 50 0 NA A Under F Dly parameter an In2 Under fault will be signaled The In2 R W Under bit must be set in the Fault Enable Parameter The time period that Input 2 must remain below the In2 Under F Lvl to X 53 n2 Under F Dly 0 1 99 0 3 0 sec A signal a fault The In2 Under bit must be set in the Fault Enable R W Parameter 3000 0 3000 0 f Input 2 remains below this level for the time period set in the In2 X 54 n2 Under A Lvl 10 0 NA NA Under A Dly parameter
98. The time period that the peak phase current exceeds the Jam F Lvl to signal a 5 Jam F Diy Secs 0 1 A fault The Jam bit in the Motor fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault RAW 0 1000 If the peak phase current exceeds the Jam A Lvl for the time period set in Jam A 6 Jam A Lvl FLC 1000 A Dly an alarm will be signaled The Jam bit must be set in the Motor Alarm En R W parameter to signal a alarm 0 1 99 0 The time period that the peak phase current exceeds the Jam A level to signal an 7 Jam A Dly Secs 0 1 A alarm The Jam bit in the Motor Alarm En parameter must be set to signal a R W alarm 0 1000 If the average total harmonic distortion THD on the line voltage exceeds the 8 THD V F Lvl 1000 A THD V F Lvl for the time period set in THD V F Dly a fault will be signaled The R W THD V bit must be set in the Starter Fault En parameter to signal a fault 0 1 99 0 The time period that the average THD on the line voltage exceeds the THD V F Lvl g THD V F Dly Secs Che A to signal a fault The THD V bit in the Starter Fault En parameter must be setto R W 0 1 signal a fault 0 1000 If the average THD on the line voltage exceeds the THD V A Lvl for the time 20 THD V A Lvl 1000 A period set in THD V Dly an alarm will be signaled The THD V bit must be setin R W the Starter Alarm parameter to signal a alarm 0 1 99 0 The time period that the average THD on the line voltage exceeds the THD V A 21 THD V A Dly Secs 0 1 A Lvl to s
99. UM011C EN P March 2014 103 Chapter 4 104 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions 20 HIM A6 20 HIM C6 amp Configuration Software e g DriveExplorer The 20 HIM A6 20 HIM C6 and PC configuration monitoring software e g DriveExplorer provide detailed Fault and Alarm information When an SMC 50 Fault occurs the HIM display indicates FAULTED along with the Fault Code a simple fault description and the elapsed time since the fault occurred Other HIM screens provide more detailed data along with the ability to reset the Fault Alarm from the keypad For more details regarding the diagnostic use of these tools see Chapter 9 Diagnostics To simplify identifying the source of a DPI port related Fault or Alarm the SMC 50 displays the DPI port number when posting the Fault or Alarm number EXAMPLE Ifa 150 SM4 Digital I O Option Module is located in the SMC 50 DPI Port 7 and is the source of a Fault port number 7 will be displayed with the Fault Code e g Port 7 Fault 26 is displayed as 7026 Table 31 SMC 50 DPI Assigned Port Numbers amp Source DPI Port Number Source DPI Port Number Source SMC 50 Controller Reserved 1 Front Mounted HIM 7 Control Module Port 7 2 Remote DPI top of SMC 50 8 Control Module Port 8 30 Remote DPI 90 Control Module Port 9 40 20 COMM X Module 10 15 Reserved 5 Reserved When using a 20 COMM X network communication module it must physically be locate
100. Units Default Enum Text Description Access 178 Aux2 On Delay Secs oor NA A time delay in activating the Aux2 relay contact can be programmed R W 179 Aux2 Off Delay Secs cia NA A time delay in de activating the Aux2 relay contact can be programmed R W o When an Auxiliary Relay output is configured for Aux Control a bit within this parameter will control the state of the auxiliary Aux 1 Bit 0 Control Module Aux Relay 1 Aux 2 Bit 1 Control Module Aux Relay 2 Aux 7 1 Bit 2 Expansion Port 7 Aux Relay 1 Aux 7 2 Bit 3 Expansion Port 7 Aux Relay 2 Aux 7 3 Bit 4 Expansion Port 7 Aux Relay 3 Aux 7 4 Bit 5 Expansion Port 7 Aux Relay 4 Aux 8 1 Bit 6 Expansion Port 8 Aux Relay 1 180 Aux Control 0 R W Aux 8 2 Bit 7 Expansion Port 8 Aux Relay 2 Aux 8 3 Bit 8 Expansion Port 8 Aux Relay 3 Aux 8 4 Bit 9 Expansion Port 8 Aux Relay 4 Aux 9 1 Bit 10 Expansion Port 9 Aux Relay 1 Aux 9 2 Bit 11 Expansion Port 9 Aux Relay 2 Aux 9 3 Bit 12 Expansion Port 9 Aux Relay 3 Aux 9 4 Bit 13 Expansion Port 9 Aux Relay 4 Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 Reserved English French Spanish Italian Provides the ability to configure the language that is displayed for any interface device 181 Language 0 The selected language will be the same for all devices connected to the SMC 50 RINN German Portuguese Mandrin The time between asserting a start command with valid 3 phase applied and the 182 Start Delay Secs 0 30 0 NA SMC 50 starting
101. Version The HIM will display the five most recent Fault codes if Faults was selected The HIM will display the 100 most recent Alarm codes with an abbreviated description if Alarm codes were selected The most recent code will be listed as 01 with the second most recent code as 02 and so on Stopped AUTO Ds Ap FO Port 00 Faults 01 61 IO Config A 02 7028 Exp 03 9026 Exp Removed 0 None v 04 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 221 Chapter9 Diagnostics 4 Select the Fault or Alarm in question then press ENTER The date and time that the Fault or Alarm occurred will be displayed amp Stopped AUTO wy 0 Amps FO 2011 05 25 11 43 19 ESC NOTE The Fault Alarm buffers are available using DriveExplorer via the Explore and Device properties drop down menu Ensure 0 SMC 50 is selected from the list of Devices Fault Codes The following table provides a complete cross reference of the available fault codes and corresponding fault descriptions 222 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Diagnostics Chapter 9 Table 109 Fault Alarm Code Cross Reference
102. Voltage Linear Speed Acceleration start Linear Speed Deceleration stop Torque Start Preset Slow Speed and Soft Stop helps reduce fluid surges in centrifugal pumping systems during the starting Pump Control Start amp Stop and stopping period provides motor braking without additional equipment for applications that SMB Smart Motor Braking require the motor to stop quickly provides controlled position stopping during stopping brake torque is applied Accu Stop to the motor until the motor reaches the preset slow speed and holds the Braking P motor at this speed until a stop command is given braking torque is then Control applied until the motor reaches zero speed braking current is programmable used on applications that require slow speed in the forward or reverse Slow Speed with Braking position for positioning or alignment and requires braking control to stop External Braking activates an external braking device by using an auxiliary relay output Protection amp Diagnostics displays Power Loss Line Fault Voltage Unbalance Excessive Starts Hour Phase Reversal Undervoltage Overvoltage Controller Temperature Stall Jam Open Gate Overload Underload and Communication Fault Metering Indication provides Phase Current Current Average Phase to Phase Voltage Voltage P P Average Phase to Neutral Voltage Calculated Torque Real Phase Power Real Power Real Energy R
103. and links to software service packs You can also visit our Support Center at https rockwellautomation custhelp com for software updates support chats and forums technical information FAQs and to sign up for product notification updates In addition we offer multiple support programs for installation configuration and troubleshooting For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http www rockwellautomation com services online phone Installation Assistance If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation support overview page or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to help ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside Unit
104. are missing Failed control module e Check power system e Replace contro module Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 237 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Table 115 Miscellaneous Situations Situation Possible Cause Possible Solutions Motor current and e Motor e Verify type of motor as a standard squirrel voltage fluctuates e Erratic Load cage induction motor e Check load conditions Erratic operation e Loose connections e Shut off all power to controller and check or loose connections Accelerates too fast Starting time e Increase starting time e Initial torque e Lower initial torque setting e Current limit setting e Decrease current limit setting e Kickstart e Lower kickstart time or turn off Accelerates too e Starting time e Decrease starting time slow e Initial torque e Increase initial torque setting e Current limit setting e Increase current limit setting e Kickstart e Increase kickstart time or turn of Fan does not e Control wiring e Check control wiring and correct if necessary operate O e Failed fan s e Replace fan module Motor stops too e Time setting e Verify the programmed stopping time and quickly with Soft correct if necessary Stop option Motor stops too e Stopping time setting Verify the programmed stopping time and slowly with Soft e Misapplication correct if necessary Stop option e The Soft Stop option is intended t
105. avoid nuisance trips Time Delay Aval In addition many have the ability to automatically restart once the condition is cleared Restart En See Chapter 4 for additional information on Faults and Alarms Table 110 Linear Listing Fault amp Alarm Code Overview 24 2 33 gt s S g i lg aoa z t ae Fault Alarm e Description Code Name ic D amp F A Fault amp Alarm A Alarm F Fault AJ 1 Line Loss B 2 N Y Y F ALoss of line power for Phase A B or C C 3 Al 4 ce a NOTE In Wye configurations B 5 topped not running single Phase A B or C Shorted stoppen not Tuning shorted SCR will not be N N NA the SMC 50 monitors are SCR For Current avin detected until the unit is C 6 onaz started This fault is always each individual enabled phase i Open AJ 7 F A Indicates that an abnormal condition that causes G B 8 N Y Y faulty firing e g open SCR Gate has been sensed ate C during the starting sequence SCR F The SMC 50 protects the SCRs from damage caused 0 10 N N NA by overtemperature operation using an internally vertemp configured 27 NOTE This fault is always enabled F A The SMC 50 can determine if a load connection No Load 14 N Y Y exists total load lost or all load leads lost and a No Load Fault and or Alarm can be indicated sah A 15 F A An Open Load A Fault Alarm
106. be configured using the 20 HIM AG6 the 20 HIM C65S or PC software e g DriveExplorer For additional configuration details refer to Chapter 2 Installation amp Wiring and Chapter 5 Programming Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 91 Chapter3 Operating Modes Figure 66 Wiring Diagram for Cat No 150 SC or Cat No 150 SD Devices with Bypass Contactor and Bypass Bus Kit Circuit Protective Device 3 Phase AC oO Line Power all Bypass Contactor BC Customer supplied SMC 50 Bypass bus kit Cat No 150 SCBK Frame C Cat No 150 SC or 150 SDBK Frame D Cat No 150 SD OTE Controller FRN 3 001 or higher is required Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor See the Isolation Contactor Applications for details Bypass must be controlled by an auxiliary contact of the SMC 50 that is configured for external bypass n North America size the bypass contactor per the motor Hp and FLA In IEC applications size the bypass contactor per the motor AC 1 rating The short circuit rating of the bypass contactor must be similar to the SMC 50 NOTE In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one
107. can be configured using a 20 HIM A6 network card or communications software e g Connected Components Workbench Figure 21 Optional Digital 1 0 Module Terminal Id x lt Aux A1 Aux A2 Aux A3 120V 240V AC J Relay qe InA1 InA3 Terminal Number Description A10 Optional Input 1 120 240V AC A2 O Optional Input 2 120 240V AC A3 0 Optional Input 3 120 240V AC A4 O Optional Input 4 120 240V AC A5 Input Common A6 0O Optional Auxiliary Relay Contact 1 A7 0O Optional Auxiliary Relay Contact 1 A8 0O Optional Auxiliary Relay Contact 2 A9 0O Optional Auxiliary Relay Contact 2 A10 00 Optional Auxiliary Relay Contact 3 A11 00 Optional Auxiliary Relay Contact 3 A12 NO CONNECT Do not connect additional loads to this terminal Parasitic loads may cause problems with operation When set to external bypass mode the auxiliary contact is used to control a properly sized external contactor and overload once the motor is at full speed RC snubbers are required when inductive loads are connected to terminal Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Optional Cat No 150 SM3 Analog 1 0 Module An optional Cat No 150 SM3 Analog I O Module provides two analog inputs voltage or current and two analog outputs voltage or current seeTable 8 for specifications The 150 SM3 module can be locate
108. card you must configure Aux 1 Config parameter 6 in the expansion card to Device Logix Analog Inputs gt Available analog inputs to the DeviceLogix program are all 32 bit integers and include the following data points Analog Inputs Name Description Volt PP Ave Average Phase to Phase Voltage Param 1 Volts Ave Average Current Param 5 Amps Torque Average Torque Param 9 Real Power Total Real Power Param 10 Kwatts 22 Network Analog Inputs Power Factor Average Power Factor Param 17 in hundredths Volt PN Ave Average Phase to Neutral Voltage Param 265 Volts Reactive Power Total Reactive Power Param 277 Kwatts Apparent Power Total Apparent Power Param 286 Kwatts DLX In 1 DLX In 2 DLX General Purpose Input parameters Param 335 336 DLX DL1 DLX DL6 DLX Datalink Input Parameters Param 337 342 PX In 1 PX In 2 Analog inputs from the expansion cards See the Expansion Card Mapping table below The function of the expansion port inputs depends on the card installed in the given port The following table shows how the analog inputs are mapped for each card type Bit Input Digital 1 0 150 SM4 Analog 1 0 150 SM3 PTC Grd Fault 150 SM2 Parameter Config 150 SM6 PX In 1 None always 0 Analog In 1 Param X 6 Ground Current Param 11 None alwa
109. concealed damage be found during unpacking it is again the responsibility of the user to notify the freight agent The shipping container must be left intact and the freight agent should be requested to make a visual inspection of the equipment Remove all packing material wedges or braces from within and around the controller After unpacking check the item s nameplate catalog number against the purchase order The controller should remain in its shipping container prior to installation If the equipment is not to be used for a period of time it must be stored according to the following instructions in order to maintain warranty coverage e Store in a clean dry location e Store within an ambient temperature range of 25 C to 75 C 13 F to 167 F Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 15 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring e Store within a relative humidity range of 0 to 95 noncondensing e Do not store equipment where it could be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere e Do not store equipment in a construction area General Precautions In addition to the precautions listed throughout this manual the following statements which are general to the system must be read and understood gt eBo gt ATTENTION The controller contains ESD electrostatic discharge sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairi
110. configured for Dual Ramp is open low Start Profile 1 is selected If the input is closed high Profile 2 is selected Setup of Start Profile 2 is accomplished using the Dual Ramp parameter set Dual Ramp can be accessed with the HIM from the lt Port 00 gt DEV PARAM folder see Setup on page 175 The following parameters are provided for user Dual Ramp adjustment Parameter Option default Starting Mode 2 Select the desired starting mode for Profile 2 Soft Start Full Voltage Linear Speed Torque Start Current Limit Pump Start Ramp Time 2 Programs the Profile 2 time period that the SMC 50 will ramp the output voltage to full voltage and motor speed from the 0 1000 10 seconds programmed Initial Torque value Current Limit Level 2 The Profile 2 setting limits the current supplied in the motor throughout the Soft Start Linear Speed or Torque Ramp cycle NOTE Enter a value so as to limit current but not so low as to inhibit the start cycle Initial Torque 2 The initial reduced output voltage torque level for the Profile 2 Voltage Ramp to the motor is established and adjusted with 0 90 70 this parameter The torque level at which the ramp begins for Profile 2 ay ae NOTE Not used for Torque Ramp Starting Torque 2 For a Torque Ramp Start the programmed initial or start torque point for Profile 2 This parameter is not used for other 0 300 100 RMT starting modes Soft Start Linear etc 50
111. cycle OR 3 When the controller processes a Load Factory Defaults command via Parameter Management Parameter 229 NOTE If a motor that is smaller or larger than normal is used for initial system testing a motor tuning cycle must be performed on the motor used in the final installation The following table lists Parameter 194 Force Tuning along with the key motor parameters checked by the SMC 50 controller during a motor tuning cycle Table 13 Key Motor Parameters Checked During a Motor Tuning Cycle Parameter Number Parameter Name Minimum Maximum Default Access Units awa fFoce ming f FALSE TRUE o w e 195 Stator R 0 00 50 00 Ohms 196 Total R 0 00 50 00 Ohms 197 Coupling Factor 0 00 10 00 R 198 Inductance 0 00 1000 00 mH 45 Motor Connection Line Delta Overview The SMC 50 starting mode is configured using Starting Mode Parameter 49 The available starting modes are Soft Start default Current Limit Torque Ramp Linear Speed Pump Start and Full Voltage Soft Start This mode has the most general application The motor is given an initial torque setting using Parameter 51 which is user adjustable from 0 90 of locked rotor torque From the initial torque level the output voltage to the motor is linearly increased during the acceleration ramp time The acceleration ramp time is adjustable from 0 1000 seconds using Parameter 50 During soft star
112. full speed The red stop button when pressed will provide a coast Preset Slow Speed stop and or reset a fault jA8 E08 This button will display the Control screen Slow Speed cannot be operated via the HIM Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 201 Chapter7 Optional HIM Operation Option Action Operation When Pressed Pump Control The green start button will commence motor acceleration to full speed The red stop button will provide a coast stop and or Pump Control reset a fault One Displays the Control Screen with the Jog button The jog button will initiate a pump stop maneuver H Braking Control The green start button will commence motor acceleration to full speed The red stop button will provide a coast stop and or Smart Motor Braking reset a fault Displays the Control Screen with the Jog button The jog button will initiate a brake stop The green start button will commence motor acceleration to full speed The red stop button will provide a coast stop and or Accu Stop reset a fault ogl Displays the Control Screen with the Jog button The jog button will initiate braking to slow speed operation The controller will maintain slow speed operation as long as the jog button is pressed The green start button will commence motor acceleration to full sp
113. g ON and OFF delay etc are Normal UTS Fault provided in the File Setup Group 1 0 selection sequence See Figure 85 on Alarm Ext Bypass page 159 Ext Brake Aux 2 Config Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact Aux Control 2 wired across control terminal 6 and 7 Network 1 Network 2 NOTE Relay Operational Options e g ON and OFF delay etc are Network 3 Network 4 provided in the File Setup Group 1 0 selection sequence See Figure 85 on page 159 Overload Class Required for motor protection Allows the user to select the time to trip for the built in Motor Overload This selection is based on the 5 30 10 type of motor being used and the application it is being applied to Service Factor Required for motor protection This programmed value is taken directly from the nameplate and used by the controller to determine 0 01 1 99 1 15 the ultimate Overload Trip Current Motor FLC Required for motor protection This programmed value is taken directly 1 2200 Amps from the motor nameplate Starting Torque NOT used for Pump Start 0 300 100 RMT Max Torque NOT used for Pump Start 0 300 250 RMT Rated Torque NOT used for Pump Start 0 10000 10 N m 750 900 1500 1800 3500 3600 RPM For best results with a Pump Start it is recommended that the tuning cycle be run The SMC 50 will automatically perform the uning cycle the first time
114. i WARNING The ground fault sensing feature of the SMC 50 is intended Table 10 Ground Fault Sensor Cable RequirementsO Wire Type Shielded twisted pair Wire Size 0 2 2 5 mm 24 14 AWG Terminal Torque 0 8 Nem 7 0 Ibein See Figure 28 on page 46 for wiring details Figure 25 825 CBCT Dimensions LRI 35 e R a 150 fs 5 91 gt 9 0 0 35 200 i 7 87 a 175 i 0 69 ft A 0110 80 4 33 3 15 lh SSSA l 175 6 90 ceo External Current Transformer Current Sensing in Bypass Mode The 150 SM2 Option Module and an external current sensing device e g 825 MCM can be used to provide current feedback to the SMC 50 when it is used with an external bypass contactor The external current feedback device provides all current measurement and current protection functions while the controller is in external bypass mode running A single 825 MCM Converter provides external current feedback from all three motor phases In all other modes e g starting stopping slow speed the SMC 50 s internal current feedback signals are used NOTE External CTs can be used and enabled even without an external bypass Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 43 Chapter 2 44 Installation amp Wiring The following table provides the 825 converter to use based on the moto
115. in the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 Motor Over Power Real Alarm A motor overpower real Alarm is also available This is set up exactly like the motor Fault using Parameter MWatts Ov A Lvl and MWatts Ov A Dly This alarm is enabled or disabled using the MWatts Over bit in the Motor Alarm Enable Parameter 231 Table 45 Motor Overpower Real Parameter List NameO 91 MWatts Ov F Dly 0 1 99 0 RW SECS 92 MWatts Ov A Lvl 0 000 1000 00 MW 93 MWatts Ov A Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Reactive Power Protection MVAR Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Chapter 4 Motor Under Power Real Fault amp Alarm Motor Under Power Real Fault Code 43 A Motor Under Power Real Fault Fault Code 43 condition occurs when the real power being consumed by the motor falls below a user defined level MWatts Un F Lvl Parameter 94 for the user defined time M Watts Un F Dly Parameter 95 This Fault is enabled or disabled using the M Watts Under bit in the Motor Fault En Parameter 230 Motor Under Power Real Alarm In addition to the Fault an Alarm is also available This is set up exactly like the motor Fault using Parameter M Watts Un A Lvl and MWatts Un A Dly This alarm is enabled or disabled using the M Watts Under bit in the Motor Alarm En Parameter 231 Table 46 Motor Over Power
116. indicates that the os B 16 N Y Y F AAAn OpenLoadB Phase X load lead connection C 17 F A An Open Load is OFF Open F A Indicates that when the calculated unbalance Voltage level is greater than the user defined Fault and or 18 IY JY IY Unbalance Alarm level See Chapter 4 for calculated value details F A Indicates that if the average line voltage is greater Overvoltage 193 Y jY JY than the user defined Fault and or Alarm level F A Indicates that if the average line voltage is less Undervoltage 20 jY Y JY than the user defined Fault and or Alarm level y F A Enabled in the Motor Protection Group by Overload 21 o Y Y programming the Overload Class Overload Reset Motor FLC and Service Factor F A Motor operation will halt Fault only if the value Underload 22 Y _ Y Y ofthemotor s average RMS current is less than the user defined value Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Diagnostics Chapter 9 Fault Alarm Code Name F A Code Time Delay Avail F A Bit Enable Restart Enable Description F A Fault amp Alarm A Alarm F Fault Jam lt lt F A Indicates that the motor current increases above the user defined Fault and or Alarm level while the motor is running at speed This F A condition is not active during starting or stopping Stall F A Condition exists and a Fault Alarm is generated if the SMC 50 senses that the motor is NOT Up to
117. maneuver is commanded the starter will remove power to the motor and close any auxiliary output configured for External Brake The auxiliary output relay configured for External Brake will remain active for the user configured Stop Time Parameter 66 Once the Stop Time is complete the unit will open the auxiliary output and switch to the stopped state While in the External Brake stopped mode all relays and status functions will operate as they would in any other mode The appropriate auxiliary relay must be configured for the Ext Brake stopping function using the Aux X relay configuration parameter e g Aux 1 Parameter 172 Aux 2 Parameter 176 etc Table 29 External Braking Control Mode Parameter List Parameter Number Minimum Maximum Default Access Units 65 Stop Mode Ext Brake 66 Stop Time 0 999 SECS 90 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Running Modes Operating Modes Chapter 3 Solid State SCR Control Mode The unit will run at full voltage under SCR control mode when the unit is at full speed and when no external bypass contactor is provided All SMC 50 diagnostic and power monitoring features are available in this running mode External Bypass Control Mode An external bypass contactor may be configured to operate the motor while running at full voltage and speed The SMC 50 controls the external bypass contactor by using one of the auxiliary relay outputs configured
118. modification requires password entry The password can be modified from the PROPERTIES folder screen of the 20 HIM AG6 or 20 HIM C65S as shown in Figure 82 on page 149 148 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Chapter 5 Figure 82 PROPERTIES Folder Screen PROPERTIES gt Change Password NN 00 Select Language Set Proc Display Set Date and Time v If the default password O default is modified ensure the modified password is NOTE written down in a secure place There is no way to reset the password if it is forgotten For additional information on password modification see the 20 HIM A6 User Manual publication 2OHIM UMO01 To modify the default password perform the following steps using the 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S 1 From the initial power up screen press the FOLDERS single function key 2 Use the forward or back arrow key until the PROPERTIES folder screen is displayed as shown in Figure 82 3 Select the CHANGE PASSWORD option then press the Enter 5 key 4 Enter a numeric password then press the Enter 5 key This will load the password into the SMC 50 s memory Parameter Access Level Modification Using the HIM The SMC 50 provides three different parameter access levels Monitor Basic and Advanced These access levels provide the ability to limit user access and or speed viewing or changing of certain parameters e The access level i
119. n M 29 5 7 53 1 53 1 1 L 7 19 5 34 135 6 ay 0 53 182 6 13 5 7 66 194 6 j 0 98 9 84 250 25 Le 10 75 l ra 273 1 ON Detail A Note When mounted in an enclosure maintain a minimum of 6 0 inches 152 4 millimeters clearance above or below the SMC 50 Side to side clearance is not required Catalog Number 150 SC1 150 SC2 150 SC3 Rockwell Automation Publica Approximate Shipping Weight 47 6 kg 105 Ib ion 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 21 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Figure 7 Dimensions of Cat No 150 SC1 SC3 Controller with Lugs Bypass Kit and MOV options ia 6 08 z 154 4 3 08 78 2 1 44 36 5 0 35 1 02 8 8 26 i 1 sues fantelanler _lanlelant __fanlelanionee G L CZ IOJ y 0 53 e i 5 A 13 4 di Hp 27 23 Fr 2328 26 17 681 8 6918 664 6 m i o o o Ray esS_ cVtTccTwm I j cod l T 1 44 36 5 i 8 23 209 2 Note When mounted in an enclosure maintain a minimum of 6 0 inches 152 4 millimeters clearance above or below the SMC 50 Side to side clearance is not required Catalog Number Approxim
120. period the motor winding heating a Heating Tim Secs 0 NA algorithm is active after asserting the motor heating command R W F 0 100 i ili i i i 2721 Heating Level if NA HG WG E A eee the amount of current applied during the R W 120V Allows the user to configure the voltage applied to the internal SMC 50 222 Fan Confi 0 2 240V cooling fans If configured for Auto Detect Default the SMC 50 will use the R W Sou 0 Auto Detect control voltage applied to the SMC 50 as the level and configure the fans to work at that level 0 1 120V Displays the voltage configuration of the fans If Auto Detect was selected in 223 Fan Connection 0 240V he Fan Config parameter this will display the result of the Auto Detect R process 224 Line Frequency Hy 0 100 0 NA Displays the ie frequency of the three phase voltage applied to the SMC 50 R Allows the user to configure the time period that the supplied line voltage 7 0 1 99 0 requency must exceed Freq High F Lvl parameter value before causing a Freq ae req High F Dly aes 0 1 Ng High fault The Freq High bit must be set in the Starter Fault En parameter for R he fault to activate ows the user to configure the time period that the supplied line voltage All h fig i iod that th lied li 0 1 99 0 requency must exceed Freq High A Lvl parameter value before causing a 226 Fred High Oly Secs 0 1 NA Freq High alarm The Freq High bit must be set in the Starter Alarm parameter R or the fault to activate
121. proper torque mode starts and stops Used to program the SMC controller for the type of starting mode that best fits the application Full Voltage Apply full voltage to the motor at start l 0 5 Current Limit Apply limited current for a programmed period of time 49 Starting Mode 2 Soft Start Slowly increase current to load over a programmed period of time RW Linear Speed Increase current to cause a linear acceleration of the motor Torque Ramp Slowly increase torque generated by motor over fixed period of time Pump Start Special starting algorithm for pump applications gt 0 0 1000 0 Enables the user the ability to configure the time period during which P Ramp Time Sec 10 0 A the controller will ramp the output voltage RAW rm 0 90 The initial reduced voltage output level for the voltage ramp is 51 Initial Torque LRT 70 A established and adjusted with this parameter RW Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 255 Appendix B Parameter Information Table 133 Parameter 52 57 Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access 0 300 Gives the user ability to configure the maximum torque limit of a torque ramp during 9 92 Max Torque h 250 NA a torque start operation RAW PES A 50 600 TR 3 53 Cur Limit Level FLC 350 NA The current limit l
122. rate 60 Hz 13 bit sample rate 250 Hz Data Refresh Rate Filter dependent 100 ms sample rate 60Hz 24 ms sample rate 250Hz Rated Working Voltage 24V DC 17V AC Common Mode Voltage Range 10V DC channel Input Impedance 220 kQ voltage mode 249 Q current mode Input Channel Diagnostics Over and Under Range and Open Circuit Open Circuit Detection Time Positive Full Scale Reading within 3 seconds max Maximum Overload at Input Terminals Voltage 24V DC continuous at 0 1 mA Current 30 mA continuous at 7V DC External Calibration Not required auto calibration performed by the module if required to meet specs Module Isolation to Control Board Yes 1000V AC Removable Terminal Block Yes Cat No 150 SM3RTB as a spare replacement part Cable Type Number of Outputs Belden 8760 or equiv 0 750 mm 18 AWG twisted pair 100 shield with drain 2 Single ended Normal Operating Ranges 10V 0 10V 0 5V 0 20 mA 4 20 mA Full Scale Operating Ranges 10 5V 0 10 5V 0 5 5 25V 0 21 mA 3 5 21 mA Output Resolution 10 5V 0 10 5V 0 5 5 25V 0 21 mA 3 5 21 mA 16 bit 15 plus sign bipolar Resistive Load on Current Output 0 750 Q Load Range on Voltage Output 1 kQ at 10V DC Max Inductive Load Current Outputs 15 mH Max Capacitive Load Voltage Outputs 100 uF Overall Accuracy
123. s Push to Reset Hold to To reset the Test fault press the Push to Reset Hold Test push button was pressed for to Test push button for less than two seconds In All Modes more than three seconds but less NOTE Only use the Push to Reset push button Test Fault 62 thanten when absolutely necessary e The SMC 50 s Push to Reset Hold to Attempt to dislodge the push button or replace the Test push button is stuck or control module if necessary damaged x e A lagging PF is abnormally under the Determine the cause of the reduced Lagging PF typical value less inductance or Modify the programmed fault alarm parameters to more capacitance has been better suit the application Und PF Lag 63 In All Modes introduced to the power line Disable the fault alarm feature e A programmed setting or time value is incorrect for the application e A leading PF is abnormally under the Determine the cause of the reduced Leading PF typical value less inductance or Modify the programmed fault alarm parameters to more capacitance has been better suit the application Und PF Lead 64 Running introduced to the power line Disable the fault alarm feature e A programmed setting or time value is incorrect for the application e A lagging PF is abnormally over the Determine the cause of the Over PF Lagging typical value more inductance or Modify the programmed fault alarm parameters to less capacitance has been better suit the application Ovr PF Lag 65 Running introduced to the p
124. starts will cause a Fault Alarm Code 29 CT Loss FCT Loss A Phase A fault will occur when current feedback is invalid This Fault is always enabled F CT Loss B Phase B F CT Loss B Phase B HAL ID F HAL ID Fault is generated if the controller determines that an incorrect incompatible power pole is installed This Fault is always enabled n NVS Error F Indicates an error in the SMC 50 s nonvolatile memory storage Clearing the Fault requires a change o the parameter or loading defaults preferred It is not cleared by cycling power This Fault is always enabled Future Use Future use V24 Loss F Indicates that the voltage level of the SMC 50 s internal 24V DC supply which provides power to the controller logic and on board 24V DC 1 0 has fallen outside of the allowable range This Fault is always enabled Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 225 Chapter 9 Diagnostics 24 2 3 zI gjg Sl sj ujt Fault Alarm S 2 amp Description Code Name ic D F A Fault amp Alarm A Alarm F Fault F Indicates that the control voltage level of the user applied control voltage has fallen outside the VControl Loss 37 N N NA allowable upper or lower limi
125. stopping parameters at Input Start Coast ee A2 0 stops motor 1 initiates a start as set up by the start Start Stop nput Terminal A2 0 initiates a stop maneuver as set up by stopping 0 13 parameters 1 initiates a start as set up b the start parameters X3 Input 2 0 NA Slow Speed Runs motor in slow speed mode as set up by slow speed parameters High R W Dual Ramp i mi AE tine use starting mode 1 OL Select H pi Pa aame e may Overload Class 1 Fault A fault condition is forced if Input Terminal A2 1 Fault NC A fault condition is forced if Input Terminal A2 0 Clear Fault Clear a fault from Input Terminal A2 High Emerg Run Apos motor to run in emergency run mode if asserted from Input Terminal does not start motor High otor Heater Runs motor heating algorithm if asserted at Input Terminal A2 High Allows the user to select the operation of Input Terminal A3 Option Input 3 on the 150 SM4 Digital 1 0 Option Module Disable Disable the input ignores any assertion to Input A3 Terminal Start nitiate a start as set up by the start parameters at Input Terminal A3 High Coast nitiates a coast stop no current to motor at Input Terminal A3 Low Stop Option ata aaa ver as set up by the stopping parameters at Input Start Coast aT A3 0 stops motor 1 initiates a start as set up by the start Start Stop nput Terminal A3 0 initiates a stop maneuver as set up by stopping 0 13 parameters 1 initiates a start as set up b the start para
126. switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage the installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL The order of the terminal numbers for the option I O module can be reversed depending on which expansion port it is located in on the control module However the function associated with the terminal number remains the same Configure both In1 Input 1 Parameter 56 and In2 Input 2 Parameter 57 to Disable 66 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Slow Speed with Braking Figure 48 For Isolation Contactor with STOP Option Applications AC Inputs T1 2 LIA l Circuit SMC 50 Soft Fast Acting SCR Protective M oan n optional Device 3 Phase AC 00 0 Line Power T3 6 13 5 Isolati riaa H 120V 240V AC Control Transformer 00 10 or AC Power Supply Option Stop ele St swo Start OIC o
127. the application the braking options SMB Smart Motor Braking and Slow Speed may cause some vibration or noise during the stopping cycle To minimize vibration or noise lower the braking current adjustment If this is a concern in your application please consult the factory before implementing the braking options Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 229 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Figure 96 Troubleshooting Flowchart Fault Displayed Define nature of trouble Motor rotates but does not accelerate to full speed Motor stops while running Motor will not start There is no output voltage to the motor Miscellaneous situations See Table 111 See Table 112 Table 111 Fault Display Explanation Display Fault Code Fault Enabled Possible Causes Possible Solutions e High impedance line connection e Check for line and load loose connections Line Loss e Missing supply phase e Check for open line e g blown fuse with phase indication 1 2 3 e Motor not connected properly e Check for open line lead s P e Incoming 3 phase voltage instability Verify power quality e Disable this fault alarm feature Shorted SCR e Shorted power module e Check for shorted SCR perform a resistance check with phase Indication 4 5 6 In All Modes see Power Module Check section or replace P power module if necessary e Open gate circuitry e
128. the motor can be delayed by setting the Start Delay If a stop is R W asserted during the delay period the start is cancelled This parameter is used to force the starting profile to complete its entire time ramp period This ability can help to avoid conditions where an up to speed is sensed before the motor is actually up to speed 183 Timed Start 0 1 0 R W Disable Complete starting mode when up to speed detected Enable Complete starting mode when ramp time expires Provides the ability to manually adjust the threshold for the controller s voltage notch shutoff detection level Since this parameter has the potential to modify the SCR operational control scheme it is important that any change made be in small several 184 V Shutoff Level 0 100 25 NA percent increments Do NOT disable 0 this parameter and Parameter 185 Shutoff R W Level at the same time or SCR firing motor control instability can occur Contact RA Technical Support for assistance When running high efficiency motors with Energy Saver this value may need to be adjusted downward Provides the ability to adjust the level at which the SMC 50 expects to see current or the evel of current which the SMC 50 determines the SCR has turned off A common reason or increasing this value would be to compensate for the inability of the control to sense a voltage notch due to significant LINE voltage noise or LINE distortion Since this 185 Shutoff Level 0 37
129. the terminal numbers for the option nfigured diagram 0 modu ociated with the terminal number remains the same gure both In1 Input 1 Parameter 56 and In2 Input 2 Parameter 57 to Disable ion to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching components allows ed current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or damage the installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the power input ratings 100 240V AC t is confi gured for START input using Parameter 7 3 contro module port 7 if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is configured for COAST or STOP t configured for COAST Stop Option etc using Parameter 7 4 control module port 7 or SLOW SPEED using Parameter 7 2 contro module port 7 F state controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation os recommended if maintenance is required on the or details e can be reversed depending on which expansion port it is located in on the control module However the function C 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured t
130. three phases Line to neutral voltage for each phase and average of all three phases Line frequency Voltage unbalance Current imbalance Torque O Real reactive and apparent power for each phase Real reactive and apparent power maximum demand Real reactive and apparent energy Power factor for each phase and total Energy savings when energy saving mode is selected Motor operation elapsed time total Motor operation elapsed time since start command Motor speed Motor start time duration Peak RMS motor starting current Total motor starts since purchased from Rockwell Automation Total Harmonic Distortion THD for voltage of each phase and the average THD for current of each phase and the average During braking and slow speed torque will be zero Estimated speed during starting and stopping when Linear Speed acceleration and deceleration is used Displays 100 when the motor is at its full steady state running speed Data available for most recent five starts Inputs The SMC 50 has two 24V DC inputs available as standard The operation of each input can be configured from a select group of functions by the user See Figure 1 for the location of the removable standard I O terminal block Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Product Overview Chapter 1 The status of these two 24V DC inputs is available to networked devices using any of the standard SMC 50 communication networks
131. through the product logic status word Chapter 8 Communications NOTE Four additional 120 240V AC inputs can be added using a single Cat No 150 SM4 Digital I O Option Module See Chapter 2 page 38 The available configuration functions for each input are as follows Disable Input not activated Start used in a 3 wire configuration Coast used in a 3 wire configuration Stop Option initiates a stop option stopping mode selected through the Stop Mode Parameter 65 used in a 3 wire configuration Start Coast 2 wire operation with Coast stopping method Start Stop Option 2 wire start stop control with Stop Option stopping mode Slow Speed Overload Select select between Motor Overload Class 1 and Motor Overload Class 2 Fault active high fault input Fault N C active low fault input Clear Fault active high clears fault Emergency Run active high disables all faults Dual Ramp select between Starting Profile 1 and 2 Motor Winding Heater active high enables heating feature when the start command is present The SMC 50 will generate an I O configuration fault if 1 2 3 any input is configured as a start or slow speed input and no input is configured as a coast or stop or any input configuration is changed from a start input Start Start Coast Start Stop or Slow Speed to a non start input or any input configuration is changed from a stop Coast Stop S
132. tirine akaa ed ii N 69 Chapter 3 ODERIGI As tonie a a Da TAE AAT clameleis 73 Motor Configuration sessssreresrereresrrrrererrrrrrsreree 73 Motor TUNN drenare eniT gid a A A E Ea 73 Modes of Operation Starting oo ciiieicie isiesds eee erent coheed 74 Sore Stait a ren rrn E T a E e a Sear amas 74 Selectable Kickstart tuc3 conadedas asec ntntace sti duees elite ees 75 Current Limit Starts c ccepecteeeatesaes bondi bone a S 76 F ll VoltageSt it eeue a EAE E nears 77 Linear Acceleration sman teena a A E R ANTA 78 Torgue C ntrol Start ses dta a E TE aa 79 Pump Control Start amp Stop iy 1 220 cucuss th kia As oe keh eus 80 Additional Start Features Functions 0ceeceeeeeeeneeees 81 Dual Ramp Start date casts hone So Pmcedan teen dash bus REER 81 Start Timer Start Delay n cisuedieeies ee oey ees taeales 83 Timed Statice cee anaes thal shoei ata ota A E dina tt 83 Backspin Timet esaik we peta ea dag ae E A S 83 Motor Winding Heater Function s s s norveetee racemes nantes 83 Modes of Operation Stopping Modes 0 0 c eee eee e eee 84 Coast t SOP ations b pag careers EAE O EARE AAAA S 84 SOLE SCO Diere rads aene ie caer a aa one E a a NA 85 Linear Drecele tat loti ts ieccw mdi ara n o e Ray 85 Smart Motor Braking SMB 24 condvdc lew oei at oce neu crdeis 86 Preset Slow Speed amp Slow Speed with Braking 87 ACCU SLOP eio iaie Rare ETERRA ee AARET ENE EEEE REAA 89 External Braking Con
133. use the up or down arrow to view the module switch positions Ry Stopped AsH Amps Port 08 Host Param Rotary Switch 4 ESC The following table provides the parameter detail of the 150 SM6 Parameter Min Max Number O Name Default Access Units X 1 Module Status Ready R aoe d X 2 Rotary Switch 1 Initial Torque X 3 Rotary Switch 2 Current Limit X4 Rotary Switch 3 Ramp Time 0 0 15 0 R 0 1 5 0 F X5 Rotary Switch 4 Stop Time X 6 Rotary Switch 5 Motor FLC X 7 Device Config X 8 Protect Config 0 0 255 0 R W Bit Numbered X9 0 Config X indicates the SMC 50 s port number 07 08 or 09 that the 150 SM6 is connected to This port number is displayed on the HIM screen below the AB brand logo For 150 SM6 Rotary Switch 1 S1 Rotary Switch 2 S2 etc Rotary switch positions equal 1 to F As displayed on the HIM A 10 B 11 C 12 etc Bit 0 and 1 values represent the ON OFF switch positions within the associated switch bank e g Device Config where O OFF and 1 ON NOTE Switch 1 Bit 0 Switch 2 Bit 1 etc as displayed on the HIM For switch setting details see Table 63 through Table 67 beginning on page 140 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 187 Chapter 5 Programming 150 SM2 PTC Ground Fault amp External Current Transformer Module The 150 SM2 Option Module provides simultaneous interface
134. 0 cece eee eee ee eee ee eees 210 Reference Feedback 0 cece cece cece ence eee eeeeenneens 211 Parameter Information 0 0 e cece cece cee eeeeeeeneeees 211 Scale Factors for PLC Communication 00 cece eee ee 211 Display Text Unit Equivalents sais ssc sna see nidaneue aa nar autos 212 Configuring Data tile co Sea wteateg wt ata cheueorais tiara stem ews ocnees 212 Updating Fitin wate cin once bcarekbhhd biaae ee boon yeaa bees 213 Chapter 9 CVV CIVIC Wo cena eens fie tik E ere ei oe Seelam a aa ar 215 Protection ProstammMinta c ues eid Sader eee es 215 Diagnostie LED sire coe beck w aus satade 26 oe EAN EE A 215 Fault Display 20 HIM A6 cisieh encase ads Votan e389 218 Gl ar Fault 20s ee ois da in a oben oe bod aes 218 Fault amp Alarm Buffer Parameter List 0 cece eee ee 219 Accessing the Fault amp Alarm Parameters 000 00005 219 Accessing the Fault amp Alarm But cteicm saan sistantahy dosimaitoerentena 221 eee Codes E EO A EE E EE NEE EERS 222 Auxiliary Relay Output Fault or Alarm Indication 228 Chapter 10 Introductionicciiitid Bak teed ek ei AL ee rrrr oen 229 Power Module Check 0 c cece cece eee eee enaeens 239 Appendix A Standard Features 0 cece e cece ce ccc eee n eee eeeeeeenneens 241 Electrica Ratings e eraa sedis a e E e A parte 242 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 7 Table of Contents Parameter
135. 0 918 Po Boe ee ee zoog g i LOH L2 41 q O Qo o Aue Aux1 S 3 O lt A Lu Control Module Control Module Standard 1 0 Power amp Ground A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 o A8 A9 aro an Ai2 gt zA 2 gZ H NC 2 O awa aaa AURS AC Inputs Auxilliary Relay Outputs 150 SM4 Option I O Module Customer supplied See the controller nameplate to verify the control power input ratings 100 240V AC Option 1 0 Terminal A2 InA2 100 240V AC input is configured for START input using Parameter 7 4 control module port 7 Option 0 Terminal A3 InA3 100 240V AC input configured for COAST STOP OPTION etc using Parameter 7 3 control module port 7 NOTE The controller will generate an 1 0 configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is configured for COAST or STOP Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor See the Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details The order of the terminal numbers for the option I O module can be reversed depending on which expansion port it is located in on the control module However the function associated with the terminal number remains the same Configure both In1 Input 1 Parameter 56 and In2 Input 2 Parameter 57 to Disable NOTE In additio
136. 0 000 Displays the Real Power of the Phase B branch which is equal to Phase 210 Real Power B MW 0 000 NA B Voltage x Phase B Current x PF R Displays the real power of the Phase C branch which is equal to Phase C 271 Real Power C Voltage x Phase C Current x PF 1000 000 1000 000 Displays Real Energy MWH averaged over a period of time defined by zie Real Derand W 0 000 Na Demand Period j 1000 000 1000 000 Displays the Maximum energy demand recorded since the last energy 273 Max Real Demand Ww 0 000 NA meter reset R 274 Reactive Power A Displays the reactive power of the Phase A branch 3 1000 000 1000 000 i 275 Reactive Power B VAR 0 000 NA Displays the reactive power of the Phase B branch R 276 Reactive Power C Displays the reactive power of the Phase C branch 277 Reactive Power VAR fe fae 000 000 NA Displays the total reactive power R 278 Reactive Energy C Displays the reactive energy being consumed by the load 279 Reactive Energy P VRH z e 000 000 NA Displays the reactive energy being produced by the load R 280 Reactive Energy Displays he total reactive energy which is equal to Reactive Power X 1000 000 1000 000 Displays the Reactive Energy consumed or generated by the system over 281 Reactive Demand MVAR t0 oog NA the Demand Time Period R Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 271 Appendix B Parameter Information Table 149 Parameter 282 302
137. 0 pee 000 00 A Displays the total Real Power R 1000 000 1000 00 Displays the Real Energy where Real Energy equal to Real Power X Real Energy MWH 0 000 A Time This parameter is updated every 1 10 of an hour 6 minutes R 7 0 0 50000 0 Displays the elapsed motor running time since the last reset of the 2 Elapsed Time Hours 0 0 A Elapsed timer by the user R 3 Elapsed Time 2 Hiis ae A nip ays the elapsed motor running time since the control module was R 0 0 50000 0 Displays the time the motor has been running since the last start 4 Running Time Hours 0 0 i A command This value will go to zero when a motor is restarted after a R stop command or fault 5 Energy Savings a 00 A Displays the energy saving when the energy saving mode is enabled R _ Provides the user the ability to reset various timers and counters by selecting the appropriate reset option Ready Ready state of parameter waiting for selection 16 Meter Reset nA oh Elapsed Timer Zero the elapsed timer RW Time to PM ha the Time to PM timer to the value set in parameter PM Hours Starts to PM Reset the Starts to PM counter to the value set in parameter PM Starts 127 Ba 1 00 1 00 Displays the Cosine of the phase angle between the voltage and n Power Factor 0 00 NA current A positive values is leading and negative value is lagging R Displays the thermal capacity utilized in the motor overload algorithm A 18 Motor Therm MT 0 200 NA value of 100 will result in a motor overl
138. 0 provides overload protection through true RMS current measurement of the individual phase currents of the connected motor A thermal model that simulates the actual heating of the motor is calculated based on the following e measured maximum motor current value e Motor FLC Setting Parameter 78 Overload Trip Class Setting Parameter 75 and e Motor Service Factor Parameter 77 obtained from the motor nameplate Trip Class is defined as the maximum time in seconds for an overload trip to occur when the motor s operating current is six times its rated current The SMC 50 overload function offers an adjustable Trip Class range of 5 30 which can be programmed in increments of one via Overload Class Parameter 75 and Overload Class 2 Parameter 76 configuration for a second OL Class 108 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Chapter 4 The Motor Thermal Usage MTU Parameter 18 displays the percentage of the motor overload currently utilized The SMC 50 overload fault will trip the motor when 1 the motor overload fault is enabled and 2 the MTU reaches 100 The overload function calculates and provides motor overload data through e MTU Parameter 18 e Time to OL Trip Parameter 19 and e Time to OL Reset Parameter 20 NOTE Trip rating is 118 of the programmed motor FLC The SMC 50 continues to calculate the reduction in MTU decay rate when the m
139. 00 240V AC Operating Voltage Range 85V 264V AC 47 63 Hz Current Minimum 5 1 mA 47 Hz 5 0 mA 62 4 Hz PIE See irage Minimum 74 5 V AC 47 Hz 55 8 V AC 62 4 Hz Current Maximum 4 7 mA 47 Hz 4 8 mA 62 4 Hz Dale itage Maximum 68 6 V AC 47 Hz 53 5 V AC 62 4 Fz Inrush Current Maximum 3 64 A Input Delay Time On to Off 30 mS Off to On 25 mS Rated Insulation Voltage NA 240V Rated Impulse Voltage NA 3000V Dielectric Withstand 1600V AC 2000V 150 SM4 Optional Digital Outputs Terminals A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 Type of Control Circuit Electromagnetic Relay Number of Contacts per Relay 1 Type of Contacts Programmable N 0 N C Type of Current AC Rated Operational Current 3A 120V AC 1 5 A 240V AC Conventional Thermal Current hp 5A AC DC Make Brake VA 3600 360 Utilization Category B300 AC 15 0 024 mA 24V Off State Leakage Current 0 12 mA 120V 0 24 mA 240V Meets IEC Type 2 Specifications for Inputs per EN 60947 1 for 240V AC only Electrically held closed 244 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Specifications Appendix A Table 121 Cat No 150 SM3 Optional Analog Control Input Output Ratings Cat No 150 SM3 Optional Analog Control Inputs Terminals B5 B10 Number of Inputs 2 differential inputs Normal Operating Input Ranges 10V 0 10V 0 5V 1 5V 0 20 mA 4 20 mA Full Scale Operating Input Ranges 10 5V 0 10 5V 0 5 5 25V 0 5 5 2
140. 1 2345 10 Multiples of FLC Multiples of FLC Multiples of FLC Class 20 Class 25 Class 30 10000 10000 10000 1000 1000 1000 So 100 Approximate Trip Time in seconds Approximate Trip Time in seconds Approximate Trip Time in seconds 1 1 2345 10 1 2 3 45 10 1 2345 10 Multiples of FLC Multiples of FLC Multiples of FLC Approximate Trip Time for 3 Phase Balanced Condition from Cold Start Hot Start Figure 77 Restart Trip Curves after Auto Reset 100000 1000 n gej 8 10 95 g 6 Auto Reset Time Class in Seconds 10 90 1 es ee 5 135 POIRES 20 180 A ET 30 270 0100 1000 Full Load Current Setting Overload Shunt Time Parameter 81 allows disabling shunt the overload at the beginning of the start cycle The length of time that the overload is disabled shunted is defined by this parameter The motor overload is not accumulating data MTU during this period 110 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Chapter 4 The SMC 50 can be configured to automatically reset the overload fault when it has cooled to the set Overload Reset Level Parameter 80 The Motor Restart Enabled Motor Restart En Parameter 264 must be enabled
141. 100 240V AC input is configured for SLOW SPEED using Parameter 7 3 control module port 7 Configure Aux1 to NORMAL using Parameter 172 NORMAL Aux contact will close to energize the IC coil with the START push button and open to de energize when the stop maneuver initiated by the STOP push button is complete The order of the termina associated with the terminal number remains Configure both In1 Inpu the same 1 Parameter 56 and In2 Input 2 Parameter 57 to Disable numbers for the option I O module can be reversed depending on which expansion port it is located in on the control module However the function NOTE In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage the installation of an isolation contactor as shown in this diagram or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014
142. 11C EN P March 2014 181 Chapter 5 Programming Table 78 SMC 50 Parameter Linear List Parameter 334 346 Number Name 335 M B A DLX Input 1 336 M B A DLX Input 2 337 M B A DLX DL Input 1 338 M B A DLX DL Input 2 339 M B A DLX DL Input 3 340 M B A O DLX DL Input 4 341 M B A pane DLX DL Input 5 342 M B A DLX DL Input 6 343 M B A DLX Output 1 344 M B A DLX Output 2 345 M B A DLX Command 346 M B A DLX Status M B A Access Level see Parameter Access Level using the HIM SMC 50 Option Module Basic Configuration using the HIM Configuration When an SMC 50 Option Module is plugged into one of the three available ports 07 08 or 09 the option module may require parameter configuration The option module parameters are resident in the option module through one of the controller ports 07 08 or 09 and are not included in the SMC 50 Controller Port lt 00 gt parameter list Perform the following steps to access the option module parameters using the HIM NOTE Before proceeding with these steps Take note of the SMC 50 port number 07 08 or 09 that the option module is connected to 1 Press the FOLDERS single function key 182 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Chapter 5 2 Use the forward or back arrow until the PORTS folder screen is dis
143. 132 Expansion Module Functions oc Ssuse dass Se een ec axes 133 Expansion Device Removed Fault s cic acscucediee de deheeeees 133 Expansion Device Paulie cocci stencil ieveade eerie bas 134 Expansion Module Incompatible Fault 0 000 134 R al Time Clock hd C csscnatsneeea sais tat ce cae dund A 134 Configuration Functions cn ayarciewagaksuntnchd ashes eeewsaned 134 Configuration Change Fault amp Alarm 008 134 I O Configuration Fault iy c00 disease aveeek caeee eens 135 Buffers amp Storage PUunconSi auac laces inasenekeneeneivaoruys 135 Non volatile Storage NVS Fault 000 c cess eee eee 135 Fault Buffer amp Fault Storage Parameters 00000 135 Alarm Event Buffer amp Alarm Event Storage Parameters 136 Auto Restart from Fault Function 000s cece cece eee eeaes 137 Chapter 5 C VERVIEW 2 55 a toad DURST ee eae ase SSS Oe eo Re 139 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 5 Table of Contents Metering Parameter Configuration Module PCM 0 eee ee eee Human Interface Module HIM ic ice wseanacciwedat hea taeda Parameter Manhapemontycccit isl tA eee a te ey RAM Random Access Memoty 00eeeceee eee eeeeeeee ROM Read only Memory Set Defaults 045 EEPROM j 2 ccwcoasosoudor dea Sia Cie Gi Ssodede be sseeeacaedet Parameter Configuration ss srsrrererererrerererrereerere U
144. 19 Pump Start Control Mode Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Name Minimum Maximum Default Access Units 49 Starting Mode Pump Start 50 Ramp Time 0 0 1000 0 10 0 SEC 51 Initial Torque 0 90 70 LRT 67 Backspin Timer 0 999 R W SEC 54 Kickstart Time 0 0 2 0 SEC 55 Kickstart Level 0 0 90 LRT 78 Motor FLC 1 0 2200 0 Amps Table 20 Pump Stop Mode Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Name Minimum Maximum Default Access Units 65 Stop Mode Pump Stop 66 Stop Time 0 0 999 0 R W SEC 68 Pump Pedestal 0 0 50 0 NOTE Pump Pedestal Parameter 68 provides the ability to modify the internal pump control algorithm for special application conditions For example if overload trips persist during stopping either reduce the Stop Time Parameter 66 or increase the Pump Pedestal in 5 increments Try not to exceed 40 A A Additional Start Features Dual Ramp Start Functions ATTENTION Pump stopping is not intended to be used as an emergency stop See the applicable standard for emergency stop requirements ATTENTION Pump stopping may cause motor heating depending on the mechanical dynamics of the pumping system Therefore select the lowest stopping time setting that will satisfactorily stop the pump This feature is useful for applications that have varying loads and therefore varying starting feature requirements Dual Ramp allows the user to select between two separate st
145. 2 A2 163 B1 m Data Out 166 C2 167 D1 168 D2 The data transferred via the DataLink function is the setting content s of the parameter number as entered by the user here Upd ating Firmware The latest version of firmware and instructions for the SMC 50 can be obtained from www ab com Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 213 Chapter8 Communications 214 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Overview Protection Programming Diagnostic LEDs Diagnostics Chapter 9 This chapter describes the fault diagnostics of the SMC 50 Further this section describes the conditions that cause various faults to occur Many of the protective features available with the SMC 50 can be enabled and adjusted through the programming parameters provided For further details on programming see Motor Protection on page 172 in Chapter 5 Programming The SMC 50 multi color Diagnostic LED Status Indicator and HOLD TO TEST PUSH TO RESET button are located below the HIM bezel port The Status LED indicates the status and fault conditions of the SMC 50 Table 105 Corresponding LED Color and Fault Conditions Status LED Device Color Mode SMC Status Green Running Running without an alarm Green Amber Running Running with an alarm Green Flashing Ready Ready no inhibit and no fault without an alarm Amber Flashing Ready Ready no inhibit and no
146. 3 Overload A Level MTU 90 A otor Alarm En parameter must be set to signal an alarm R W 400 1000 The peak phase current to the load that if exceeded for the time period defined 84 Locked Rtr F Lvl FLC 600 A in Locked Rtr Delay will signal a fault The Locked Rotor bit in the Motor Fault En R W a parameter must be set to signal a fault 0 1 100 0 The time period that the peak phase current exceeds the Locked Rtr F Level to 85 Locked Rtr F Dly Secs 0 1 i A signal a fault The Locked Rotor bit in the Motor Fault En parameter must be set R W i o signal a fault 0 99 f phase current drops below this level for the period of time set in Underload F 86 Underload F Lvl FLC 0 A Dly parameter an Underload Fault will be signaled The Underload bit in the R W Motor Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault 0 1 99 0 The time period that the phase current must be below the level set in the 87 Underload F Dly Secs 0 1 s A Underload F Level parameter before a underload fault is signaled The Underload R W bit in the Motor Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault 0 99 If phase current drops below this level for the period of time set in Underload A 88 Underload A Lvl FLC 0 A Dly parameter an Underload Alarm will be signaled The Underload bit in the R W Motor Alarm En parameter must be set to signal a alarm 0 1 99 0 The time period that the phase current must be below the level set in the 89 Underload A Dly Secs 0 1 A Underl
147. 3 Phase AC n OCHT ae Device wT nese AN Jes 1 Line Power M oc m oo o H OC oc le 120V 240V AC Control H Transformer or AC Power LC o o LOS Supply Two Speed HOL LOL o Motor Starter dye rg O 09 20 Teta 1 sec A H j d ARMAOLEA JE Li L2 4L1 gt oO X E a F Q Aux2 E 7 S a u Customer supplied Control Module Standard I O See the controller nameplate to verify the control power input ratings 100 240V AC Terminal 11 In1 DC 24V DC input is configured for ST NOTE The controller will generate an 1 0 configuration Acustomer supplied jumper is required to enable the Customer supplied timers with hard contact are requi Two speed consequent pole operations The SMC 50 overload must be disabled Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF sta motor See the Isolation Contactor Application for details NOTE In addition to a small amount of leakage current TART COAST using Parameter 56 fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is configured for COAST or STOP controller 1 0 operation ed to accept DC power Control Module__ Power amp Ground e controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the lowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s o
148. 40V AC input is configured for SART input using Parameter 7 3 control module port 7 Option 0 Terminal A1 InA1 120 240V Input configured for COAST using Parameter 7 2 contro module port 7 Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor See the Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details The order of the terminal numbers for the option I O module can be reversed depending on which expansion port it is located in on the control module However the function associated with the terminal number remains the same Configure Stop Mode to SMB using Parameter 65 Braking Current using Parameter 69 Slow Speed using Parameter 72 and Slow Brake using Parameter 73 Parameter 73 0 results in Coast Configure both In1 Input 1 Parameter 56 and In2 Input 2 Parameter 57 to DISABLE NOTE In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage the installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommende
149. 5V 0 21 mA 3 5 21 mA Input Resolution 16 bit sample rate 60 Hz 13 bit sample rate 250 Hz Data Refresh Rate Filter dependent 100 ms sample rate 60Hz 24 ms sample rate 250 Hz Rated Working Voltage 24V DC 17V AC Common Mode Voltage Range 10V DC channel Input Impedance 220 kQ voltage mode 249 Q current mode nput Channel Diagnostics Over and Under Range and Open Circuit Open Circuit Detection Time Positive Full Scale Reading within 3 seconds max aximum Overload at Input Terminals Voltage 24V DC continuous at 0 1 mA Current 30 mA continuous at 7V DC External Calibration Not required auto calibration performed by the module if required to meet specs odule Isolation to Control Board Yes 1000V AC Removable Terminal Block Yes Cat No 150 SM3RTB as a spare replacement part Belden 8760 or equiv 0 750 mm 18 AWG twisted pair 100 shield Cable Type with drain Cat No 150 SM3 Optional Analog Control Outputs Terminals B1 B4 Number of Outputs 2 Single ended Normal Operating Ranges 10V 0 10V 0 5V 0 20 mA 4 20 mA Full Scale Operating Ranges 10 5V 0 10 5V 0 5 5 25V 0 21 mA 3 5 21 mA Output Resolution 16 bit 15 plus sign bipolar 10 5V 0 10 5V 0 5 5 25V 0 21 mA 3 5 21 mA Resistive Load on Current Output 0 750 Q Load Range on V
150. 99 0 Delay Lead PF Ov F Dly If the current actual Power Factor value is leading 249 Lead PFOvFDly Secs 1 A more than the Lead PF Ov F Lvl for a period greater than that defined by Lead R W PF Ov F Dly a Lead PD Ov fault will be signaled 1 Allows the user to enter a value for the Leading Power Factor Over Alarm 0 00 1 00 Level Lead PF Ov A Lvl If the current actual Power Factor value is leading 250 Lead PF Ov A Lvi 0 00 A more than the Lead PF Ov A Lvl for a period greater than that defined by Lead R W PF Ov A Dly a Lead PD Ov alarm will be signaled o Allows the user to enter a time value for the Leading Power Factor Over Alarm E 0 1 99 0 Delay Lead PF Ov A Dly If the current actual Power Factor value is leading 251 Lead PF Ov A Dly Secs 1 A more than the Lead PF Ov A Lvi for a period greater than that defined by Lead PAW PF Ov A Dly a Lead PD Ov alarm will be signaled Allows the user to enter a value for the Leading Power Factor Under Fault 7 0 00 1 00 Level Lead PF Un F Lvl If the current actual Power Factor value is leading 252 Lead PF Un FLvi 0 00 A ess than the Lead PF Un A Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by P W Lead PF Un A Dly a Lead PD Un Fault will be signaled o Allows the user to enter a time value for the Leading Power Factor Under 0 1 99 0 Fault Delay Lead PF Un F Dly If the current actual Power Factor value is 253 Lead PF Un F Dly Secs 1 A eading less than the Lea
151. A A Dly 76 B A Overload Class 2 110 B A F Lvl 77 B A Service Factor 111 B A F Dly Cur Imbal c 78 B A Motor FLC 112 B A A Lvl 79 B A Motor FLC 2 113 B A A Dly 80 B A OL Reset Level 114 B A F Lvl 81 B A OL Shunt Time 115 B A i F Dly am c 82 B A OL Inhibit Time 116 B A A Lvl 83 B A Overload A Lvl 117 B A ADly 84 B A F Lvl 18 B A F Lvl _____ Locked Rotor c 85 B A F Dly 119 B A F Dly THD V e 86 B A F Lvl 120 B A A Lvl 87 B A F Dly 121 B A ADly ___ Underload 88 B A A Lvl 122 B A F Lvl 89 B A ADly 123 B A F Dly THD c 90 B A F Lvl 124 B A A Lvl 91 B A FDI 125 B A ADI MWatts Ov y y 92 B A A Lvl 126 B A PM Hours 93 B A A Dly 27 B A PM Starts 94 B A F Lvl 28 B A Starts Per Hour 95 B A F Dly 129 B A Frequency High F Lvl MWatts Un 96 B A A Lvl 130 B A Frequency Low F Lvl 97 B A A Dly 131 B A Frequency High A Lvl 98 B A F Lvl 32 B A Frequency Low A Lvl 99 B A F Dly 133 B A Restart Attempts Undervolt 100 B A A Lvl 34 B A Restart Delay 101 B A A Dly 35 B A Starter Restart Enable M B A Access Level see Parameter Access Level using the HIM 178 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014
152. A Motor FLC BA Expansion C Configuration Parameter Management A Rated Torque BA Rated Speed BA User CT Ratio A Factory CT Ratio A Voltage Ratio A Parameter Management A DeviceLogix parameters are Parameters 335 346 located in the parameter linear list See Appendix F for additional information and programming examples 176 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Table 73 SMC 50 Parameter Linear List Parameter 1 67 Chapter 5 Number Name Number Name 1 M B A Voltage P P Ave 35 M B A Va 2 M B A A B 36 M B A Vp 3 M B A ltsPhase fac 371MB A V 4 M B A C A 38 M B A Vave THD 5 M B A Current Average 39 M B A la 6 M B A A 40 M B A Ib 7 M B A Current Phase B 41 M B A le 8 M B A C 42 M B A lave 9 M B A Torque 43 M B A Product Status 0 M B A Real Power 44 B A Motor Config 1 M B A Real Energy 45 M B A Motor Connection 2 M B A Elapsed Time 46 B A Line Voltage 3 M B A Elapsed Time 2 47 B A Torque Rated 14 M B A Running Time 48 B A Speed 15 M B A Energy Savings 49 B A Starting Mode 16 M B A Meter Reset 50 B A Ramp Time 17 M B A Power Factor 51 B A Initial Torque 18 M B A Mot
153. A Starting BA Stopping BA Advanced VO BA Advanced Tuning Motor Config Starting Mode Stop Mode toad Tyree A Input 1 Hae HE o Line Voltage Ramp Time Stop Time oad Type Input 2 tarter Starting Mode Cur Limit Level Braking Current High Eff Brake A Ag 1 Config Total R MBA Ramp Time Initial Torque Backspin Timer UTS Level A Aux 1 Invert Coupling Factor MBA Initial Torque Starting Torque Stall Position A Aux 1 On Delay Inductance MBA Max Torque Max Torque Slow Speed Stall Level A Aux 1 Off Delay Speed PGain A Cur Limit Level Kickstart Time Slow Speed BA V Shut Off Level A Aux 2 Config Transient Gain A Stop Mode Kickstart Level p Shut Off Level A Aux 2 Invert Transient Zero A Stop Time Heating Time raea PA Notch Maximum A Aux 2 Invert Transient Mag A Input 1 Heating Level SS Trans Gain A Timed Start A Aux 2 On Delay Ping Degree A Input 2 Start Delay Bypass Delay A Aux 2 Off Delay Pings A Aux1 Config Dual R BA Energy Saver BA Aux Control Phase Shift 0 A Aux2 Config ual Ramp BA Demand Period BA Phase Shift 10 A Overload Class Starting Mode 2 Num of Periods BA Phase Shift 20 A Service Factor Ramp Time 2 Phase Shift 30 A Motor FLC Cur Limit Level 2 Phase Shift 40 A Starting Torque Initial Torque 2 Phase Shift 50 A Max Torque Starting Torque 2 Phase Shift 60 A Rated Torque Max Torque 2 Phase Shift 70 A Rated Speed Kickstart Time 2 Phase Shift 80
154. AL A stop maneuver initiated by the stop push button is complete 56 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 x 1 contact will close to energize the M coil with the START push button and will open to de energize it when the Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Figure 38 For Isolation Contactor Applications DC Inputs T1 2 LIA ae Circuit SMC 50 Soft ae aa 1 Protective Starter uses optiona j M Device 3 Phase AC oo T2 4 L2 3 e P Sana Line Power T3 6_ L3 5 Isolation do l Contactor O 120 240V AC Control Transformer Wr or AC Power Supply Co l o Stop 0 ic Start o cil 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 gt O oO O fs L2 411 F a o 8 Aux2 Aux1 z 8 O E Q e g Control Module Standard I O Control Mod Power amp Ground Customer supplied See the controller nameplate to verify the control power input ratings 100 240V AC Terminal 11 In1 DC 24V DC input is configured for START input using Parameter 56 Terminal 10 In2 DC 24V DC input configured for COAST STOP OPTION etc using Parameter 57 NOTE The controller will generate an 1 0 configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is configured for COAST o
155. Applications DC Inputs No DPI Control OC M e Circuit Protective Device T1 2 LLA SMC 50 Soft Fast Acting SCR Starter Fuses optional T2 4 L23 T3 6 L35 T_2 __ OC M oC 3 Phase AC Line Power Existing Motor Starter O 120 240V AC Control Transformer AAAA ol AC Power Supply it Q A customer supplied jumper is required to enable the controller 1 0 operation Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor In this example the existing Motor Starter fulfills hat requirement 12 u 10 9 8 gt O O o a OQ QO x t U o O E 3 8 m Control Module Standard 1 0 Control Mod Power amp Ground he control power input ratings 100 240V AC nfigured for START input using Parameter 56 gured for COAST STOP OPTION etc using Parameter 57 if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is configured for COAST or STOP Due to existing motor starter overload protection the overload protection should be disabled in the SMC 50 controller Set Aux 1 to NORMAL using Parameter 172 NORM
156. B A A 312 A Product Command 284 M B A Apparent Power B 285 M B A C 313 B A Rebalance Level 286 M B A Apparent Power 314 M B A A 287 M B A Apparent Energy 315 M B A Peak Voltage B 288 M B A Apparent Demand 316 M B A C 289 M B A Max Apparent Demand 317 M B A A 290 B A Demand Period 318 M B A Peak Current B 291 B A Number of Periods 319 M B A C 292 M B A A 320 M B A Phase A B Voltage 293 M B A Power Factor B 321 M B A Phase B C Voltage 294 M B A C 322 M B A Phase C A Voltage 295 M B A Current Imbal 323 M B A Phase A Current 296 M B A Voltage Unbal 324 M B A Phase B Current 297 B A Ov F Lvl 325 M B A Phase C Current 298 B A Ov F Dly 326 M B A Power Factor ase a Snap Shot 299 B A OvA Lvl 327 M B A Motor Thermal Usage 300 B A Ov A Dly 328 M B A Motor Speed WAR 301 B A Un F Lvl 329 M B A THD Voltage Average 302 B A Un F Dly 330 M B A THD Current Average 303 B A Un A Lvl 331 M B A Product Status 304 B A Un A Dly 332 M B A Board Temp 305 B A Starting Torque 333 M B A Line Frequency 306 B A Starting Torque 2 334 M B A Restart Auto 307 A SS Ref Gain M B A Access Level see Parameter Access Level using the HIM The for MVAR indicates power generated C Consumed P Produced Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM0
157. C are module firmly seated to the contro module CT Loss 30 e Phase A F30 B F31 or C F32 e Replace the control module and or the power AB or 31 or In All Modes current transformer feedback circuit section B OF 32 has failed e Inspect the CT sensor cables for loose connections e Option Module 150 SM2 with check CTs for damage repair replace CTs if external CT operation Fault Code necessary replace 150 SM2 option module if 7030 8030 necessary e Loose cables between the controller Remove the control module from the power section and power section verify connectors TB2 A TB3 B and TB4 C are Hall ID 33 In All Modes e Incompatible power section firmly seated to the contro module installed with the controller e Check the power section and replace if necessary e Controller memory corrupted e Modify a parameter or load parameter defaults e Option module error Fault Code preferred and reload the customer specific NVS Error 34 In All Modes 7034 8034 or 9034 parameters e Check the option module sensor cables e Replace the option module Future Use 35 NA NA NA e Loose connection at Control e Check the control power and verify it is within the Terminals 1 L1 and 2 L2 specification check the line connections and V24 Loss 36 In All Modes e Excessive load on internal 24V grounding to the SMC 50 control terminals supply e Replace the control module e Low line voltage condition e Loose connection at Control e Che
158. C 50 DataLink is a mechanism used by most drives to transfer data to and from the controller without using an explicit message The SMC 50 supports a 32 bit DataLink therefore the device can be configured to return up to eight additional pieces of information without the need for an explicit message Criteria for Using DataLink e Each set of DataLink parameters in an SMC 50 can be used by only one adapter If more than one adapter is connected multiple adapters must not try to use the same DataLink e Parameter settings contents in the SMC 50 determine the data passed through the DataLink mechanism e When DataLink is used to change a value in the SMC 50 the value is not written to the Non Volatile Storage NVS However if the SMC 50 is powered down the current value is written to NVS To configure DataLink Parameters 153 168 of the SMC 50 must be used See Table 104 below for a detailed listing of these parameters For additional information regarding DataLink see the communication interface s user manual Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Communications Chapter 8 Table 104 Parameter 153 168 DataLinks Detail Parameter Number Description Min Max Default Access Units 53 Al 154 A2 155 B1 Data In Ee 157 C1 158 C2 159 D1 160 D2 T IX 0 Max Parameter Number RW 16
159. Config Aux X Invert Aux X On Delay or Aux X Off Delay then press ENTER keypad or soft key 3 Modify the auxiliary relay output as desired If necessary use the back arrow to return to the previous selection Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 185 Chapter 5 Programming Digital 1 0 Option Module Parameter List The allowable selections for the 150 SM4 are listed below Parameter Min Max Number Name default Access Units Ready Disabled Bit 4 Input 4 Bit 1 Input 1 Status 0 Disabled X1 Module l Status Bit 5 Aux 1 Status R OFF i Status Bit 2 Input 2 Bit 6 Aux 2 Status 1 Enabled Status Bit 7 Aux 3 Status ON Bit 3 Input 3 Status X 2 Input 1 Disable Dual Ramp X3 Input 2 Start OL Select X4 input 3 Coast l Fault Stop Option Fault NC R W NA Start Coast Clear Fault X 5 Input 4 Start Stop Emerg Run Slow Speed Motor Heater Normal DeviceLogix UTS Up to Speed Aux Control Fault Network 1 X 6 Aux 1 Config Alani Network 2 R W NA Ext Bypass Network 3 Ext Brake Network 4 X 7 Aux 1 Invert Disable Enable R W X 8 Aux 1 On Delay 0 0 10 0 R W seconds X 9 Aux 1 Off Delay 0 0 10 0 R W seconds Normal DeviceLogix UTS Up to Speed Aux Control Fault Network 1 X 10 Aux 2 Config Alarm Network 2 R W NA Ext Bypass Network 3 Ext Brake Network 4 X 11 Aux 2 Invert Disable Enable R W NA X
160. Configure both In1 Input 1 Parameter 56 and In2 Input 2 Parameter 57 to Disable NOTE In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage the installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL 64 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Figure 46 For Hand OFF Auto DPI with Start Stop Push Buttons AC 1 0 O Fast Acting SCR ane Fuses optional Device 3 Phase AC 0 Line Power 120 240V AC Control Transformer Off or AC Power Supply Hand Auto peat xO 0 7 _ e Stop pi a2 1 J Ee e Stat o 7 S T 12 11 1
161. Covers 7 62 lt lt 193 7 20 13 511 3 a U PA __4 H B H wy 6 OH Ta ere a 7 40 peg0000se00000800 maani ht peedo0dggs0000888 moon L a a 4 544 gt ia lq 10 19 gt 258 9 Note When mounted in an enclosure maintain a minimum of 6 0 inches 152 4 millimeters clearance above or below the SMC 50 Side to side clearance is not required Catalog Number Approximate Shipping Weight 150 SB2 15 92 kg 150 SB3 35 1 Ib 150 SB4 20 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Cat No 150 SC Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Controllers Figure 6 Dimensions of Cat No 150 SC1 SC3 Controller 10 75 le 9 84 250 272 9 7 17182 1 o y 9 11 J ha AR 231 3 62 8 F 200 L 3 92 99 6 See detail A 0 67 HS 50 8 17 0 25 z 2 j a Tr T ji N 1 1 S Tl ZN ppn e SS S j TE o i ENE E k y e r 9 30 E 236 2 23 25 24 24 Lt 24 08 5906 615 7 2514 i 611 6 638 5 l i P 0 281 dia E p wJ mY 07 P e e 1 2 00 disa fp J 50 8 m 0 ia 1 b es i i ai 10 49 2 holes H F 2 09 La 209
162. Default Units Name E T w As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools PM Hours Protection Fault amp Alarm PM Hours Fault Code 50 and Alarm The SMC 50 can be configured to provide a Fault and or Alarm to indicate that PM should be performed after a programmed number of hours have elapsed Fault Code 50 This is done by setting a value in the Time to PM Parameter 21 to indicate the amount of running time before PM needs to be done The programmed Time to PM value counts down while the motor is starting stopping operating in slow speed and running When the Time to PM parameter value reaches zero the configured Fault and or Alarm condition is activated and the parameter counter stops decrementing After the preventative maintenance is complete the user can reset the Fault and or Alarm The user must reload the Time to PM to the value configured and stored in the PM Hours Parameter 126 through the Meter Reset Parameter 16 via the HIM or network connection Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 127 Chapter 4 128 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions The PM Hours Fault is enabled using the PM Hours bit in the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 The PM Hours Alarm is enabled using the PM Hours bit in the Motor Alarm Enable Parameter 231 Table 55 PM Hours Protection Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Minimum Maximum Default Access U
163. Description 0 148 14 Host Parameter 148 Logic Mask Set bit 14 Allow DeviceLogix to control the motor Bit 14 86 Auxiliary 1 is used to control the Sensor E zan apne ae Failure pilot light In order for DeviceLogix to p t Ort 8 Aux 1 Config Device Logix control the Auxiliary it must be configured to arameter 6 Device Logix 8 10 Auxiliary 2 is used to control the Critical f 7 a aA ote Ba Level pilot light In order for DeviceLogix to p ort 8 Aux 2 Config Device Logix control the Auxiliary it must be configured to Parameter 10 Device Logix Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 303 Using DeviceLogix Appendix F Figure 102 Function Block Programming sete tele b a eran wnl Ss awn omen eda tce asin e wee weewlaw sl own see cel cds wend wien enews Sues wewesehaweaie ant siecle nee Owe w newt ee meee cee wen cenadeaseaecaneenesceseecascens Ginosiqeua es l a 9 s s ulaMeua ja Gjino Bazi Ghanosigeus upeaa D J anos qeuR UPIJELS 9 puy ueajoog s d zu pO nee Mage i Api rpl ban ao a a Sele ee eel ow a oleae ale Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 304 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical and application notes sample code
164. En PTC 0 R W T Gnd Flt 1 pane As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools X the control module port number 7 or 8 in which the 150 SM2 resides 150 SM3 Option Module The 150 SM3 Option Module has individually enabled faults and alarms associated with the analog inputs and outputs The following table provides an overview Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 107 Chapter4 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Protection amp Diagnostics Table 35 150 SM3 Faults amp Alarms Parameter Function Fault Alarm Bit Bit Units Number Description NameO Assignment Access Default X37 Fault En IN1 Over R W NOTE IN1 Under Bit 0 Disabled IN2 Over Bit 1 Enabled IN2 Under AII Disabled OUT1 Shorted OUT1 Open OUT2 Shorted OUT2 Open X38 O Alarm En IN1 Over IN1 Under IN2 Over IN2 Under OUT1 Shorted OUT1 Open OUT2 Shorted OUT2 Open R W NOonFPWNH O NOoBRWN O As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools X the control module port number 7 or 8 in which the 150 SM2 resides The following describes the SMC 50 protection and diagnostic functions Overload Fault amp Alarm Overload Fault Code 21 The SMC 50 meets applicable requirements as a motor overload protective device Thermal memory provides added protection and maintains motor thermal data when control power is removed The SMC 5
165. F Lag 6 M X Expansion 28 D X X Ovr PF Lead 66 M X Excess Starts 29 M X MVAR Over 67 M X 30 MVAR Under 68 M X CT Loss B 31 4 DX RIC Battery Low 69 5 D xX j cC 32 Locked Rotor 70 M X J HAL ID 3315D X Stat 1 i NVS Error 34 5 D Slow Speed 72 i V24 Recovery 3515 D X Stop Option 73 i V24 Loss 36 15 D X l Coast 74 I VControl Loss 37 5 D X Clear Fault 75 1 38 X X Fault 76 I TB Input 2 39 61D X X Param Change 7 i 3 40 X Reserved 78 99 4 4 X Current bal ym x System Faults 100 199151 D X O For Category M Motor D Device TB Terminal Block Input Codes 71 77 are Event codes Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 223 Chapter 9 224 Diagnostics The following table provides an overview of the Fault and Alarm codes with Time Delay and Restart options plus a basic description of what causes each Fault or Alarm to occur NOTE Most Faults and Alarms are individually bit enabled and disabled F A Bit Enab and can have a user configurable delay time to help
166. F R W Dly a MVAR Ov Fault will be signaled 1 Allows the user to enter a time value for the MVAR Over Fault delay If the 0 1 99 0 current actual value of Consumed Reactive Power MVAR is greater than 233 HMVAR Ov F Dly Secs ig A he MVAR OV F Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by MVAR Ov PAW F Dly a MVAR Ov Fault will be signaled o Allows the user to enter a value for the Consumed Reactive Power Over 0 000 1000 000 Alarm Level MVAR OV A Lvl If the current actual MVAR value is greater 234 tMIVAR Ov A Lvi MVAR 0 000 A han the MVAR OV A Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by R W MVAR Ov A Dly a MVAR Ov Alarm will be signaled 1 Allows the user to enter a time value for the MVAR Over Alarm Delay 0 1 99 0 MVAR Ov A Dly If the current actual value of Consumed Reactive Power 235 HMIVAR Ov A Dly Secs ig A MVAR is greater than the MVAR Ov A Level for a time period greater than PAW hat defined by MVAR Ov A Dly a MVAR Ov Alarm will be signaled Allows the user to enter a value for the Consumed Reactive Power Under 0 000 1000 000 Fault Level MVAR Un F Lvl If the current actual MVAR value is less than 236 HMVAR Un F Lvi MVAR 0 000 A he MVAR Un F Level for a time period greater than that defined by MVAR R W Un F Dly a MVAR Un Fault will be signaled Allows the user to enter a time value for the MVAR Under Fault delay If the 0 1 99 0 Consumed Reactive Power MVAR is less t
167. Factor Over Fault 256 F Ov F Lvl 1 00 0 00 A Level Lag PF Ov F Lvl If the current actual Power Factor value lags more R ag ENN a 0 00 han the Lag PF Ov F Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by Lag PF P W Ov F Diy a Lag PF Ov Fault will be signaled Allows the user to enter a time value for the Lagging Power Factor Over 0 1 99 0 Fault Delay Lag PF Ov F Dly If the current actual Power Factor value lags 257 Lag PF Ov F Dly Secs 0 1 NA more than the Lag PF Ov F Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by P W Lag PF Ov F Dly a Lag PF Ov Fault will be signaled Allows the user to enter a value for the Lagging Power Factor Over Alarm 1 00 0 00 Level Lag PF Ov A Lvl If the current actual Power Factor value lags more 258 Lag PF Ov A Lvl a 0 00 NA han the Lag PF Ov A Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by Lag PAW PF Ov A Dly a Lag PF Ov Alarm will be signaled Allows the user to enter a time value for the Lagging Power Factor Over E 0 1 99 0 Alarm Delay Lag PF Ov A Dly If the current actual Power Factor value lags 259 Lag PF Ov A Dly Secs 0 1 A more than the Lag PF Ov A Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by P W Lag PF Ov A Dly a Lag PF Ov Alarm will be signaled Allows the user to enter a value for the Lagging Power Factor Under Fault 260 F Un F Lvi 1 00 0 00 A Level Lag PF Un F Lvl If the current actual Power Factor value lags less Lag rr EV 0 00 han the Lag PF Un F Lv
168. ION For Overload Protection it is critical that the data be entered into the SMC 50 as it appears on the motor nameplate Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 161 Chapter 5 162 Programming Current Limit Start with Simple Stop Mode To program a Current Limit Start with simple Stop Mode operation the following parameters are provided for user adjustment The basic parameter set can be accessed with the HIM see Figure 88 on page 175 Parameter Option default Motor Config Setting for the motor configuration Line Connected Wye or Inside the Delta Line Delta NOTE In the AUTO Detect default selection the controller will automatically check the motor configuration Auto Detect Line Voltage Select the value of line voltage being used in the system The correct line voltage value must be entered for the voltage protection functions to work properly 0 700V 480V Starting Mode This mode must be programmed for Current Limit Current Limit O Ramp Time Programs the time period that the SMC 50 will HOLD the fixed reduced voltage current before switching to full voltage 0 1000 10 seconds Initial Torque NOT used for a Current Limit Start 0 90 70 LRT Current Limit Level Limits the current supplied to the motor throughout the Start cycle NOTE Enter a value so as to limit the current but not so low as to inhibit the start cycle 50 600
169. In2 I nA3 100 240V AC input is configured for START input using Parameter 7 4 control module port 7 ault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is configured for COAST or STOP igured for COAST Stop Option etc using Parameter 7 3 contro module port 7 gured for SLOW SPEED using Parameter 7 2 control module port 7 hrough an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the am for details numbers for the option I O module can be reversed depending on which expansion port it is located in on the control module However the function me nput 2 Parameter 57 to Disable Il amount of leakage current fi owing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage th e installa ion of an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL Rockw ell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 69 Chapter 2 Installation amp Wiring
170. Inputs T1 2 L1 1 Circuit SMC 50 Soft Fast Acting SCR Protective Starter Fuses optional Device 3 Phase AC T2 4 L23 M ji 0 Line Power T3 6 L3 5 1 AAAS 120 240V AC Control Transformer or AC Power Supply eo i eles oC Ep T N 2 u o o lsas z7 le ls als 2 i o 2 eg z if L2 L1 feo Ave Aux1 lt Q i g Control Module Standard I O e cg Customer supplied See the controller nameplate to verify the control power input ratings 100 240V AC Terminal 11 In1 DC 24V DC input is configured for START input using Parameter 56 Terminal 10 In2 DC 24V DC input configured for COAST STOP OPTION etc using Parameter 57 NOTE The controller will generate an 1 0 configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is configured for COAST or STOP A customer supplied jumper is required to enable the controller 1 0 operation Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor See the Isolation Contactor Application for details Configure Aux 1 to FAULT using Parameter 172 During a
171. Line Frequency parameter displays zero until a valid AC Line Frequency is measured When three phase power is removed from the SMC 50 the parameter maintains the value of the previous frequency reading Table 92 Metering Parameters Associated with Line Frequency Parameter Number Name Description Min Max Default Access Units 224 Line Frequency 0 100 Ro Hz Current Imbalance The SMC 50 provides a calculated Current Imbalance value The Current Imbalance calculation is equal to the largest deviation of the three RMS phase Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Metering Chapter 6 current signals from the average RMS phase current divided by the average Note that the SMC 50 Power Pole Current is used for the Current Imbalance calculation Table 93 Metering Parameters Associated with Current Imbalance Parameter Number Name Description Min Max Default Access Units 295 Current Imbalance 0 100 Ro Voltage Unbalance The SMC 50 provides a calculated Voltage Unbalance value The Voltage Unbalance calculation is equal to the largest deviation of the three RMS phase voltage signals from the average RMS phase voltage divided by the average Note that the phase to neutral voltage is used in the calculation for voltage unbalance Table 94 Metering Parameters Associated with Voltage Unbalance Parameter Number Name Description Min Max Default Access Units 296 Voltage Unbalanc
172. Lvl 0 1 00 259 Lag PF Ov A Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS 260 Lag PF Un F Lvl 0 1 00 261 Lag PF Un F Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS 262 Lag PF Un A Lvl 0 1 00 263 Lag PF Un A Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools 126 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Excessive Starts Hour Protection Preventive Maintenance PM Protection Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Chapter 4 Motor Starts Hour Fault amp Alarm Starts per Hour Fault Code 29 The SMC 50 can be programmed to limit the maximum number of starter motor starts within a sliding one hour time window Once the number of starts per hour is reached as configured by the user in Starts Per Hour Parameter 128 any additional starts will cause an Excessive Starts Fault Fault Code 29 This fault is enabled or disabled using the Starts Hr bit in the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 Starts per Hour Alarm A Starts Per Hour Alarm is also available This Alarm is enabled or disabled using the Starts Hr bit in the Motor Alarm Enable Parameter 231 The Starts per Hour Faults and Alarm is activated when the starts within the last hour exceed the value configured in Starts Per Hour Parameter 128 The starts count value is cleared when the starts in the previous hour are less than or equal to the Starts Per Hour parameter Table 54 Starts per Hour Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Minimum Maximum
173. March 2014 Troubleshooting Chapter 10 Table 111 Fault Display Explanation Display Fault Code Fault Enabled Possible Causes Possible Solutions e Power line grid voltage is greater e Check the power system and correct if necessary than the programmed value NOTE If the power source is a backup generator e Abnormal voltage regulation check the stability of the generator voltage Overvoltage 19 Running e The parameter settings amp or delay regulator Replace if necessary time programmed are not suited for Modify the parameter amp or extend the delay time to the application match the application requirements e Disable this fault alarm feature e Power line grid voltage is less than e Check the power system and correct if necessary the programmed value NOTE If the power source is a backup generator e Abnormal voltage regulation check the stability of the generator voltage Undervoltage 20 Running e The parameter settings amp or delay regulator Replace if necessary time programmed are not suited for Modify the parameter amp or extend the delay time to the application match the application requirements e Disable this fault alarm feature e Motor overloaded e Check motor overload condition e Overload parameters are not e Check programmed values for overload class and Overload 21 Running matched to the motor mo
174. Maximum Default Access Units F some o w E Soft Stop The Soft Stop feature can be used in applications that require an extended stop time The voltage ramp down time is user adjustable from 0 999 seconds using Stop Time Parameter 66 The load will stop when the SMC 50 output voltage drops to a point where the load torque is greater than the developed motor torque ATTENTION Soft Stop is not intended to be used as an emergency stop See the applicable standards for emergency stop requirements Figure 61 Soft Stop 100 Oo gt a Soft Start ious Ramp Time Start gt 4 Run pi Soft Stop _ Time in Seconds Table 24 Soft Stop Mode Parameter List Parameter Number Minimum Maximum Default Units 65 Stop Mode Soft Stop 66 Stop Time 0 999 SECS NOTE For additional details see Figure 68 on page 95 Linear Deceleration When Stop Mode Parameter 65 is configured for Linear Speed the SMC 50 will stop the motor following a timed linear speed ramp configured in Stop Time Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 85 Chapter 3 86 Operating Modes Parameter 66 A current limit setting is also available to limit the current while stopping If the current limit level is reached the motor will decelerate faster than the defined ramp If motor current falls below the current limit the ramp is resumed ATTENTION Linear Stop is not
175. NA X 15 CT Scaling C Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 189 Chapter 5 190 Programming Parameter Min Max Number Name default Access Units X 16 Phase Shift A X 17 Phase Shift B 12 50 12 50 0 00 R Degree X 18 Phase Shift C X 19 Parameter Mgmt Ready Factory Default R W NA X indicates the port number 07 08 or 09 the 150 SM4 is connected to the SMC 50 This port number is displayed on the HIM screen below the AB brand logo The sensing range of the module Inhibit Time provides the ability to inhibit disable ground fault protection for the time selected during starting Configure Turns Ratio to the value of the Ground Fault sensor CT Turns Ratio e g 825 CBCT 100 1 Set X 5 to 100 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Chapter 6 Metering Overview While the SMC 50 operates a motor it is also monitoring several different parameters to provide a full function metering package Viewing Mete ring Data To access the metering information using the 20 HIM A6 follow the procedure below using the keypad 1 From the SMC 50 standard power up screen select FOLDERS 2 Use the right or left arrow until the Port 00 DEV PARAM screen is displayed NOTE Ensure the Advanced Access Level is selected located at the bottom of the DEV PARAM screen For additional configuration details see Parameter Access Level M
176. OTE Relay Operational Options e g ON and OFF delay etc are provided in the File Setup Group 1 0 selection sequence See Figure 85 on page 159 Normal UTS Fault Alarm Ext Bypass Ext Brake Aux Control Network 1 Network 2 Network 3 Network 4 Overload Class Required for motor protection Allows the user to select the time to trip for the built in Motor Overload This selection is based on the 5 30 10 type of motor being used and the application it is being applied to Service Factor Required for motor protection This programmed value is taken directly from the nameplate and used by the controller to determine 0 01 1 99 1 15 the ultimate Overload Trip Current Motor FLC Required for motor protection This programmed value is taken directly from the motor nameplate 1 2200 Amps Starting Torque NOT used for Full Voltage Start 0 300 100 RMT Max Torque NOT used for Full Voltage Start 0 300 250 RMT Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Chapter 5 Parameter Option default Rated Torque NOT used for Full Voltage Start 0 10000 10 N m 750 900 1500 1800 3500 3600 RPM A Start Delay Time can also be programmed to delay starting for a period of time after the initiation of the START command The Start Delay parameter can be accessed from the Group Starting selection In addition to S
177. P switches Each of the three banks is defined by a high level functional name with each switch having a unique function 142 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Chapter 5 Table 68 ON OFF 8 Switch DIP Switch Definitions Device DEVICE Configuration Bank Switch Number 0 Switch OPEN Starting Mode Linear Speed Acceleration default Controller Parameter 49 Current Limit Soft Start Pump Start Stop Mode Linear Speed Deceleration default Controller Parameter 65 Soft Stop Braking Pump Stop Energy Saver Enable Controller Parameter 193 Disable default Braking Current 50 Controller F Parameter 69 100 150 200 default 250 300 350 400 When the Stop Mode is configured as a Linear Speed Decel b Soft Stop c Pump Stop and the Stop Time rotary switch S4 is set to zero a Coast stop will result A non zero Stop Time value for the three previously listed Stop Modes defines the time to stop period which is based on that specific configuration If the Stop Mode is configured as Braking then the Stop Time setting Rotary Switch S4 is used to select either the Automatic Zero Speed Detection method Stop Time is set to zero or the Timed Brake method Stop Time is not set to zero With the Energy
178. PPB4UR 210 A 200 480V AC line 150 SPPC1B 260 A 200 480V AC line 150 SPPC2B ot Frame C Power ius a 320 A 200 480V AC line 150 SPPC3B and beateinle assembly ane cable 210 A 200 690V AC line 150 SPPC1U 260 A 200 690V AC line 150 SPPC2U 320 A 200 690V AC line 150 SPPC3U 361 A 200 480V AC line 150 SPPD1B 420 A 200 480V AC line 150 SPPD2B ec StR 520 A 200 480V AC line 150 SPPD3B and heatsink assembly and cable 361 A 200 690V AC line 150 SPPD1U 420 A 200 690V AC line 150 SPPD2U 520 A 200 690V AC line 150 SPPD3U SMC 50 Control Modules Table 159 SMC 50 Replacement Control Module Cat Nos Description Cat No Replacement Control Module 100 240V AC Control Power Two 24V DC 150 SCMD Inputs Two Relay Outputs Replacement Control Module 24V DC Control Power Two 24V DC Inputs Two 150 SCMR Relay Outputs Control module includes cover Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 287 AppendixC Spare Replacement Parts Option Modules Table 160 Option Module Cat Nos Description Rating Cat No PTC Ground Fault amp Current Feedback 150 SM2 Two analog inputs voltage or 150 SM3 Analog 1 0 Module current and two analog outputs voltage or current oa Four inputs 120 240V AC 150 SM4 Digital 1 0 Module 3 relay outputs Parameter Configuration Module DIP amp Rotary Switch Configuration 150 SM6 Removable Term
179. Parameter Information Min Max z ae Read Write Number Name Units Enum Text Description uy Default Access z Allows the user to configure the functionality of the Aux2 Relay Output on the 150 SM4 Digital O Option Module Normal Aux2 closes when start asserted opens when motor stops Aux2 closes when motor reaches up to speed and opens when the motor is Up to Speed not at speed Fault Aux2 closes when the SMC 50 enters a fault state and opens when the fault is cleared Alarm Aux2 closes when the SMC 50 detects an alarm condition and opens when the alarm is cleared Ext Bypass Aux2 closes when the SMC 50 enters the external bypass mode and opens YP when it leaves that mode SCR Control 0 11 Aux2 closes when the external braking command is active and opens when X 10 Aux2 Config 0 NA Ext Brake eis notactiver R W Device Logix Auxz is controlled by the Device Logix program Aux Control When an auxiliary output is configured for Aux Control a bit within the parameter Aux Control will control the state of the auxiliary Network 1 With an auxiliary configured as Network 1 it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 1 Network 2 With an auxiliary configured as Network 2 it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 2 Network 3 With an auxiliary configured as Network 3 it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 3 Network 4 With an auxiliary configured as Network 4 it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 4 Enables the user to invert the logic of th
180. Parameter Minimum Maximum Default Access Units NameO 133 Restart Attempts 0 5 R W 134 Restart Dly 0 60 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools 138 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Overview Parameter Configuration Module PCM Chapter 5 Programming This chapter provides a basic understanding of the programming configuration tools available to modify the SMC 50 s parameters Unlike previous SMC products e g SMC 3 and SMC Flex the SMC 50 comes without a built in programming tool This allows the user to select from several programming tools to best suit their application Using the PCM 150 SM6 The Cat No 150 SM6 PCM provides simple and limited configuration of the SMC 50 This PCM can be inserted into any control module option port 7 8 or 9 Only one PCM is allowed per control module Parameters that are configured by the PCM will appear as read write parameters to other configuration devices and whose values represent the switch settings The parameter values set by the PCM are stored in the control module memory Therefore using the appropriate removal procedure remove all power to Control Module and Power Module the PCM can be removed from the control module with its parameter settings retained Parameters that are not defined and therefore are not configurable by the Cat No 150 SM6 PCM can be configured through other means e g
181. Q O Z OA n H Control Module Standard I O ee Ai A2 A3 A4 A ELA ag 9 alan A12 gt 0 S AuxAl AuxA2 AUXA3 m AC Inputs Auxilliary Relay Outputs 150 SM4 Option I O Module Customer supplied See the controller nameplate to verify the control power input ratings 100 240V AC or 24V DC Terminal A2 InA2 100 240V AC input is configured for START input using Parameter 7 3 control module port 7 Terminal A1 InA1 100 240V AC input configured for COAST STOP OPTION etc using Parameter 7 2 contro module port 7 NOTE The controller will generate an 1 0 configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is configured for COAST or STOP Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor See the Isolation Contactor Application for details Configure Aux 1 to FAULT using Parameter 172 During a controlled fault condition the Aux 1 contact will close to energize the Shunt Trip ST coil The order of the terminal numbers for the option 1 0 module can be reversed depending on which expansion slot it is located in on the contro module However the function associated with the terminal number remains the same NOTE In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or mo
182. R overtemperature condition When the stall feature is enabled the SMC 50 will start an internal timer when the programmed Ramp Time expires When this timer reaches the time value programmed in the Stall Delay Parameter 188 a Stall Fault is generated If the Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 117 Chapter 4 118 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Stall Delay parameter is set to zero then the Fault will occur immediately if the motor is not UTS at the completion of the programmed Ramp Time If the SMC S50 detects that the motor is UTS before the Stall Delay it will consider the start sequence complete switch to full voltage and not generate a Stall Fault Alarm NOTE Due to the beginning of the Linear Speed Starting mode being an open loop voltage control the actual starting time may vary depending on the motor load For this reason and to avoid nuisance faults the SMC 50 automatically adds a time to the configured starting ramp time before the stall timer begins to count The time factor is 50 of the configured start ramp time Stall Fault protection is enabled or disabled via the Stall bit in the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 Stall Alarm In addition to the Stall Fault a Stall Alarm can also be enabled which will activate under the same condition as the Stall Fault In this case the Alarm will be cleared once the motor leaves the starting state e g is UTS is stopped faulted et
183. Real Parameter List NameO 95 MWatts Un F Dly 0 1 99 0 RW SECS 96 MWatts Un A Lvl 0 000 1000 000 MW 97 MWatts Un A Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools The SMC 50 has the ability to protect against excessive reactive power MVAR The user can protect Fault or issue a warning Alarm in the event that the motor reactive power MVAR consumption or generation is too high This protection can be used with synchronous motors or motors that have active Power Factor correction capacitors Motor Over Power Reactive Positive Motor Consumed Fault amp Alarm Motor Over Power Reactive Positive Fault Code 46 A Motor Over Power Reactive Positive Fault condition Fault Code 46 occurs when the reactive power being consumed by the motor rises above a user defined level MVAR Ov F Lvl Parameter 232 for the user defined delay time MVAR Ov F Dly Parameter 233 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 121 Chapter 4 122 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions This Fault is enabled or disabled using the MVAR Over bit in the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 Motor Over Power Reactive Positive Alarm In addition to the Fault a Motor Over Power Reactive Alarm is also available This is set up exactly like the Fault using parameters MVAR Ov A Lvl and MVAR Ov A Dly as shown in Table 47 The Alarm is enabled or disabled using the
184. Setup Group can be accessed with the HIM from is mode is used Access these he Port lt 00 gt DEV PARAM folder under the File Group File Setup Group Starting selection sequence see Figure 85 on page 159 Setting either parameter to zero disables Kickstart AStart Delay Time can also be programmed to delay starting for a period of time after the initiation of the START command The Start Delay parameter can be accessed from the Group Starting selection as noted in O above In addition to Stop Mode for SMB a Braking Curren page 159 value must be configured from the Group Stopping selection see Figure 85 on O To use Ext Braking one of the Auxiliary Outputs must be programmed to Ext Brake When programmed for Ext Brake the function of this Auxiliary is to energize the external brake device to stop the motor The relay stays ON from the beginning of the STOP command until the STOP time parameter has timed out 6 Any auxiliary output configured for Aux Control using the AuxX Config parameter will be under control of its associated bit from the Aux Control Parameter 180 See Parameter 180 information for bit assignments NOTE This function enables forcing an output ON or OFF ATTENTION For Overload Protection it is critical that the data be entered into the SMC 50 as it appears on the motor nameplate Linear Acceleration Speed Sense Start with Stop To use the Basic Setup Group to program a Linear
185. Speed operation the calculated current is estimated based on time and current settings The accuracy of the current calculation is 5 of the true RMS current Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Metering Chapter 6 Table 79 Metering Parameters Associated with Current Parameter Number Name Description Min Max Default Access Units 5 Current Average 6 Current Phase A Q 15 000 A 7 Current Phase B gl ne 8 Current Phase C Voltage Line to Line and Line to Neutral RMS voltage is calculated for all three phases with the average of the three voltages also provided The data is provided whenever 3 phase power is applied The accuracy of the voltage calculations will be 2 of the true RMS voltage Table 80 Metering Parameters Associated with Voltage Parameter Number Name Description Min Max Default Access Units 1 Voltage P P Average 2 Volts Phase A B 3 Volts Phase B C 0 700 R Volts 4 Volts Phase C A 265 Voltage P N Average 266 Volts Phase A N 267 Volts Phase iN U R Volts 268 Volts Phase C N Torque The SMC 50 calculates true electromechanical torque based on the existing motor voltage and current feedback data NOTE 1 During Braking and Slow Speed operations Torque will read 0 2 In order for the Torque parameter to display correctly the motor value for Rated Torque Parameter 47 and Rated Speed Parame
186. Standard I O Control Module_ Power amp Ground See the controller nameplate to verify the control power input ratings 100 240V AC Terminal 11 In1 DC 24V DC input is configured for START COAST using Parameter 56 NOTE The controller will generate an 1 0 configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is configured for COAST or STOP A ccustomer supplied jumper is required to enable the controller 1 0 operation Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor In this example the reversing contactor provides isolation Configure In2DC Input 2 Parameter 57 to Disable NOTE The SMC 50 minimum transition time for reversing is 0 5 s The SMC 50 phase reversal must be disabled in reversing applications Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 61 Chapter 2 Installation amp Wiring Figure 43 For Two Speed Applications DC Control L T1 2 LIA ea T SLC SMC 50 Soft Fast Acting SCR Circuit H T Starter Fuses optional Protective
187. TB3 BEN TB4 gt TB2 TB3 TB4 a E 2S Be E g 5 SS a e os J So S hs S oO Positive Temperature Coefficient PTC Sensor Motor Temperature Sensing The optional 150 SM2 module provides the ability for the SMC 50 to interface with motor PTC sensors PTC thermistor sensors are commonly embedded in motor stator windings by the motor manufacturer to provide temperature monitoring of the motor windings Since PTC thermistor sensors react to the actual motor winding temperature enhanced motor protection can be provided to address such conditions as obstructed motor cooling and high ambient temperature The following table defines the required PTC thermistor input and response ratings for operation with the 150 SM2 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 y Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Table 9 PTC Thermistor Input amp Response Ratings Thermistor Input Response Ratings Response Resistance 3400 Q 150 Q Reset Resistance 1600 Q 100 Q Short circuit Trip Resistance 2559 10 Q Maximum Voltage at PTC Terminals RPTC 4 K ohms lt 7 5V Maximum Voltage at PTC Terminals RPTC open 30V Maximum Number of Sensors Connected in Series 6 Maximum Cold Resistance of PTC Sensor Chain 1500 Q Response Time 800 ms The following figure shows the required PTC sensor characteristics for operation
188. Table 30 Energy Saver Mode Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Name Minimum Maximum Default Access Units 15 Energy Savings 0 100 R 17 Power Factor 1 00 1 00 R 193 Energy Saver 0 00 1 00 R W NOTE Set Parameter 193 0 to diable Energy Saver mode Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 93 Chapter3 Operating Modes Sequence of Operation 94 Emergency RUN With the SMC 50 a control terminal or network via Comm Control Word input can be configured as the Emergency Run command input When this input is active all faults are disabled NOTE The Emergency Run command input does not actually start the unit but causes the unit to run in the Emergency Run mode The Emergency Run command can be initiated at any time This command is not latched allowing the Emergency Run mode to be cancelled while the unit is still running Figure 68 through Figure 73 show the different operation sequences for the Soft Stop Preset Slow Speed Pump Control SMB Smart Motor Braking Accu Stop and Slow Speed with Braking options When control power is present but 3 phase line power is not applied a valid START command causes AUX contacts configured for Normal to close While waiting for 3 phase line power the SMC 50 controller will indicate Starting When 3 phase line power is applied the start sequence will be initiated ATTENTION The user is responsible for determining wh
189. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage the installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL 50 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Figure 32 For 2 Wire Control with Stopping Capability AC Inputs No DPI Control T1 2 L1 1 Fast Acting SCR Fuses Optional T2 4 L2 3 T3 6 L3 5 120V 240V AC Control Transformer i or AC Power Supply 0 AAAA CY YY Start Stop 00 Circuit Protective Device PO Intl 24V Int DC _ In2 DCI 3 Enable 1 0 7 6 HH Aux2 nt DC COM Control Module Standard 1 0 5 OH Aux1 7 Control Mod _ Power amp Ground See the controller nameplate to verify contro Terminal A1 InA 100 240V AC N O input contact open stop initiated When using s NOTE Due motor See the The order of the solation Contactor Applicat erminal numbers for the op However the function ass
190. UM011C EN P March 2014 Parameter Information Appendix B Table 134 Parameter 58 71 Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access Allows the user to program an alternate starting mode for the SMC 50 that suits the application Full Voltage Apply full voltage to the motor at start Current Limit Apply limited current for a programmed period of time 38 Starting Mode 2 0 5 2 Soft Start Slowly increase current to load over a programmed period of time R W Linear Speed Increase current to cause a linear acceleration of the motor Torque Ramp Slowly increase torque generated by the motor over a fixed period of time Pump Start Special starting algorithm for pump applications 0 0 1000 0 Allows the user to set an alternate time period during which the controller will 39 Ramp Time 2 Sec 10 0 A ramp the output voltage RW R P 0 90 Allows the user to set an alternate initial reduced voltage output level for the 60 Initial Torque 2 LRT 70 A voltage ramp R W x 0 300 Allows the user to set a alternate maximum torque limit of a torque ramp during a a Max Torque 2 250 A torque start operation R W z re 50 600 Allows the user to set an alternate current limit level that is applied for the ramp 62 Cur Limit Level 2
191. User Manual Allen Bradley SMC 50 Solid State Smart Motor Controller Bulletin 150 a a ome TTEN gn o Rockwell Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circui
192. Wiring Table of Contents Important User Information as3 0230 8 si celeee eee leteaesied le 2 Chapter 1 Other Related Documents cccccucesccccucucseessscuvas 9 DesCHOUlO nc treitirn coy hads pen hna gota ed eee eater ates 9 Metering oss oo Si isd ox wire nan E a Rese Nene Medaka R eS aR oman ee 10 VOS acs Son an eae caso Sera Os wel oT nuke SO aaa 10 GommMmiunicatiOn 4 secs oh ae hk Bo es NG eh BAe au 12 Pr gramminp So E Stel el eae ada ne been aaa 13 DCS OC titet orien iis paca nternen gid taeda a aparece wei aa 14 Chapter 2 COV ELVIS Weare 5 Bee nfs E E EE sassy ERS ERE 15 Degreegf Protection orim rcs osoni rna A pE E a 15 Receiving oseseseni i E et E A E oars EEE EA 15 Unpackih een tied ccenicig a ieai ne EE Eak 15 Inspectii 5 5 9 5 eek cascades Ro Paree ea olla tanita eed Ree a 15 STOTINE TEA OTAS DEA AE eee ewe ees owas okey 15 General Precautions st stsiiatd deere Re bau vi Cie ee ieee ho cle 16 Heat Dissipation sce We arteries eiue ha Made Yamin EN 17 PC OSES en uriou ite Rarnte a aod shad a Pun eas asad Scares 18 SUEY sinpi Hed id ot ahd el ee diac toncanec hed ERAN deel ce Sacien ard Ok 18 DimMeENnSiONS 3 Seebeck oe br sa N ca ESSA CoS oe a era SOE ES 19 Power Factor Correction Capacitors PFCC e eee e eee 24 Protective Modules 3st soe duad ewes ten oarcachoouseemateedomcate 26 Motor Overload Protection iii Gedo hee tad eeweeacier destin 27 Two Speed Motors 20 a iatdepe eis areg te Gens peetasines 27
193. Z vA c Z apls auly Ul eq S Ul eq S Ul eq S Z Ul eq S Z Ul eq S Z Ul eq S Z 6n7 211M WeN Zy WeN Zy WeN LE WeN LE WeN LE WeN LE anbioy Ul eq 097 Ul eq 097 Ul eq 002 Ul eq 002 Ul eq 002 Ul eq 002 sng 6n WeN 82 WeN 8z WeN EZ WeN EZ WeN EZ WeN EZ e jaq y p suj M u17 b 8q 84 apisu aAM aul f eyaq ayj apisuj aAp auly uonenfyuog 006 S29 029 L9E pag Ege OZE OLZ LLE GGL 081 06 v G6uney ON 389 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 34 Control Power Fan Power Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Control Power Ratings The SMC 50 can accept control power input of 100 240V AC 15 10 or 24V DC 10 10 A minimum control power source is required See Table 5 This base control power requirement is for the control module with fan The control power requirement for the fan is supplied by the control module and auto configured The control module and option module control power requirements are shown in Table 5 Table 5 Control Power Requirements Max Control Circuit Consumption Control Voltage D ipti C tR A HERRA ront RahgalAl 100 240VAC 24V DC 90 180 150 VA 75W Base Power Draw Control Module with Heat Sink Fan 210 320 150 VA 75W 361 520 300 VA 300 W Human Interface Module HIM 10 VA 2W 150 SM2 30 VA 4W Optional Po
194. a R W 260 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Parameter Information Appendix B Table 138 Parameter 135 148 Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access Volt Unbal Overvoltage Undervoltage Phase Rev Allows the user to select which type of fault that the SMC 50 can try to restart 0 Line Loss from once the restart delay period has expired To enable a restart from a fault 135 Strtr Restart En the function must be selected 1 R W Open Gate Restart Attempts Parameter 133 and Restart Delay Parameter 134 must be Config Change configured Freq THD V Future Future 0 Volt Unbal 0 Overvoltage 0 Undervoltage 0 Phase Rev Allows the user to enable faults associated with the control module The bit for a 136 Starter Fault En a 1 Line Loss fault must be set 1 for the fault to be asserted R W 1 Open Gate 0 Config Change 0 Freq 0 THD V Volt Unbal Overvoltage Undervoltage Phase Rev r Allows the user to enable alarms associated with the control module The bit for 137 Starter Alarm En _ 0 Line Loss an alarm must be set 1 for the alarm to be asserted R W Open Gate Config Change Freq THD V 138 First entry in the fault buffer and is the most recent fault to have occurred 139 2
195. able 40 on page 115 Current imbalance protection is enabled or disabled using the Current Imbalance bit in the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 Current Imbalance Alarm In addition to the Current Imbalance Fault a Current Imbalance Alarm is also available This is set up exactly like the Current Imbalance Fault using the Current Imbalance Alarm Level and Current Imbalance Alarm Delay parameters The Current Imbalance Alarm can be enabled or disabled using the Current Imbalance bit in the Motor Alarm Enable Parameter 231 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Chapter 4 Table 40 Current Imbalance Parameter List Name 110 Cur Imbal F Lvi 1 25 15 111 Cur Imbal F Dly 0 1 99 0 3 0 SECS R W 112 Cur Imbal A Lvl 1 25 10 113 Cur Imbal A Dly 0 1 99 0 3 0 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Voltage Unbalance Protection Fault amp Alarm An unbalance in the voltage supply results in a current imbalance This causes the motor to experience an additional temperature rise resulting in degradation of the motor insulation and reducing its life expectancy Voltage unbalance detection helps extend the motor life expectancy and minimize potential damage and loss of production The voltage unbalance Vu calculation is equal to the largest deviation Vd of the three phase voltage signals RMS phase voltag
196. age during the motor start run and 314 Va Peak Volt 0 15000 0 NA stop cycle The value resets to 0 when the motor starts R The peak value of the Phase B line to neutral voltage during the motor start run and 315 Vb Peak Volt 0 15000 0 NA stop cycle The value resets to 0 when the motor starts R The peak value of the Phase C line to neutral voltage during the motor start run and 316 Vc Peak Volt 0 15000 0 NA stop cycle The value resets to 0 when the motor starts R The peak value of the Phase A current during the motor start run and stop cycle The 317 la Peak Amps 0 15000 0 NA value resets to 0 when the motor starts R The peak value of the Phase B current during the motor start run and stop cycle The 318 Ib Peak Amps 0 15000 0 NA value resets to 0 when the motor starts i The peak value of the Phase C current during the motor start run and stop cycle The 319 Ic Pea Amps 0 15000 0 NA value resets to 0 when the motor starts R SSVolts Snapshot of the Phase A B voltage when a fault occurs The value is overwritten if a 320 Phas A B Volt 0 700 0 NA subsequent fault occurs R SSVolts Snapshot of the Phase B C voltage when a fault occurs The value is overwritten if a 321 Phas B C Volt 0 700 0 NA subsequent fault occurs R SSVolts Snapshot of the Phase C A voltage when a fault occurs The value is overwritten if a 322 Phas C A Volt 0 700 0 NA subsequent fault occurs R SSCurrent Snapshot of the Phase A current when a f
197. al 1 0 Option Module parameters to di Parameter 0 1 Na gerau values a Management 0 Ready Waiting for command to set defaults Factory Default Set all writable parameters to factory default values X indicates the Control Module port number in which the 150 SM4 Option Module is installed Allowable ports 7 8 or 9 N C is electrically held closed 150 SM2 Ground Fault Table 156 Parameter X 1 X 19 Module Information Min Max z ee Read Write Number Name 4 Units Enum Text Description dad Default Access 0 7 _ Displays information about the operational status of the 150 SM2 PTC X1 Module Status 7 NA Ground Fault and External Current Transformer CT Option Module Ready Bit 0 Ready Bit Set 1 indicates the module is ready for operation R PTC Bit 1 PTC 1 PTC Indicating Fault 0 No fault CT Loss Bit 2 CT Loss 1 CT disconnected 0 CT Connected X 2 Fault Enable A A PTC 0 PTC Fault Disabled 1 PTC Fault Enabled R W Ground Fault 0 Ground Fault Disabled 1 Ground Fault Enabled x3 Alarm Enable ti A P 0 PTC Alarm Disabled 1 PTC Alarm Enabled R W Ground Fault 0 Ground Fault Alarm Disabled 1 Ground Fault Alarm Enabled 0 3 A PTC 0 does not restart after PTC Fault is cleared 1 restart after PTC Fault is X 4 Restart Enable 0 cleared R W 0 does not restart after the Ground Fault is cleared 1 restart after the Ground Fault Ground Fault is cleared 100 2000 7 A A X 5 Turns Ratio 1000 1 NA
198. alarm condition all 150 SM6 LEDs will not be illuminated The 150 SM6 gt lt LED indicates whether the fault alarm is a SMC 50 device fault alarm or a motor fault alarm The on off status of the other three LEDs indicate the actual fault alarm codes Depending on which SMC 50 port the 150 SM6 is installed into the position of the LEDs e g gt II II and I versus I I III and lt change The table below displays the LED order when the 150 SM6 is installed in port 7 When the 150 SM6 is installed in port 8 or 9 the order is reversed but the LED diagnostic code is the same Table 107 LED Order When 150 SM6 is Installed in Port 7 of the SMC 50 LED On Off State LED Error Code gt Il le i 0 Off Off Off 1 Off Off On Off On Off Red SMC Off On On Yellow Motor Off No Fault or Alarm On Off Off On Off On On On Off On On On y oO om A wt N The displayed LED error code is either a fault or an alarm code depending on the cause For example if the LED code is 1 Line Loss A is either a fault or an alarm 216 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Diagnostics Chapter 9 Ifa more detailed display of the error code source is desired a human interface module HIM or configuration software is recommended The following table provides a list of faults with LED fault alarm
199. alue of the Real Time Clock RTC is low and needs to be replaced immediately Alarm is always enabled F A Occurs when the motor current increases above the user defined fault alarm level while the motor is in Locked Rotor WY Y JY any running mode This F A condition is not active during starting or stopping Start 71 NA NA NA Start Event tracking Slow Speed 72 NA NA NA Slow Speed Event tracking Stop Option 73 NA NA NA 7 Stop Option Event tracking This is an Event Code z Coast 74 NA NA NA and is stored ii the Coast Event tracking Clear Fault 75 NA NA NA Alarm Buffer for Clear Fault Event tracking Fault 76 NA NA NA Fault Event tracking Parameter Change Event Parm Change 77 NA NA NA tracking 78 Reserved 99 N N N Future Use 100 A general Fault Alarm typically associated with the System Faults 199 N N NA SMC 50 hardware e g system Watchdog Time failure Overload is inherently a time based fault Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 227 Chapter9 Diagnostics Auxiliary Relay Output Auxiliary Relay Output contacts can be programmed for Fault or Alarm N O or Fault or Alarm Indication N C indication In addition an ON or OFF Delay Time can also be configured 228 Basic parameter setup without N C or timed functions can be found in the Setup I O Parameter Group Alternatively full configuration is available from the Setup I O Paramet
200. ameter and has no function at 690 volts and R W below 262 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Parameter Information Appendix B Table 140 Parameter 172 177 Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access Allows the user to configure the functionality of the Aux1 relay output on the control module based on the following selections Normal Aux 1 closes when start command asserted and opens when motor stops Default ail Aux 1 closes when motor reaches up to speed and opens when motor is not at speed Fault Aux closes when the SMC 50 enters a fault state and opens when the fault is cleared Alarm Aux1 closes when the SMC 50 detects an alarm condition and opens when alarm is cleared Aux closes when the SMC 50 enters the external bypass mode and opens when it 7 0 11 Ext Bypass leaves that mode 172 Aux1 Confi R saat 0 Ext Brake Aux1 closes when Ext Braking command is active and opens when it is not active W DeviceLogix Aux1 is controlled by DeviceLogix program Aux Control When an auxiliary is configured for Aux Control a bit within the parameter Aux Control controls the state of that auxiliary Network 1 With an auxiliary configured as Network 1 it is controlled over the Local Area Network LAN as Relay 1 Network 2 Wi
201. ansion Removed Fault Code 26 is generated For SMC 50 expansion modules the Fault code includes the control module port number 7 8 or 9 to distinguish which expansion module caused the Fault e g an expansion module located in port 8 would display the Fault Code 8026 For physical DPI devices that support this function the Fault will be generated only when the associated bit is set in the Logic Mask Act Parameter 149 IMPORTANT Ensure all line and control power is removed from the SMC 50 before removing or installing any expansion or communication module Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 133 Chapter4 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Real Time Clock RTC Configuration Functions Expansion Device Fault Expansion Module Fault Code x028 This fault code is generated directly by any option module or DPI device and is separate from the Expansion Device Removed fault control module generated This fault is always enabled user cannot disable in the control module Individual option modules or DPI devices may enable or disable these faults as needed NOTE Notall devices use this fault Expansion Module Incompatible Fault Incompatible Expansion Module Fault Code x027 Ifan expansion module e g 150 SM is plugged into an incompatible expansion port or the expansion module is not supported by the control module firmware revision FRN an Expansion Incompatible Fault Code 27 w
202. arameter Disabled Stall Fault Parameter 230 Enabled default Disable Phase Reversal Fault Enable Parameter 136 Disable default OL Restart Parameter 264 Enable Disable default OL Enable Parameter 230 Enabled default Disable OL Class Parameter 75 10 default 15 20 30 The Preset Production Level DIP switch allows the following Faults to be enabled 1 or disabled 0 as a group e Current Imbalance Fault Parameter Number 110 default value 15 e Voltage Unbalance Fault Parameter Number 106 default value 15 e Line Loss Fault Parameter Number NA default value no value required see Chapter 4 Line Loss Protection on page 129 e Open Gate Fault Parameter Number NA default value no value required see Chapter 4 Open SCR Gate Fault amp Alarm Phase A B or C on page 130 e No Open Load Fault Parameter Number NA default value no value required see Chapter 4 Open Load Fault amp Alarm on page 132 The PCM configuration setting for each of these Faults follows the currently entered loaded parameter value for each Fault This will typically be the default setting unless a 20 HIM A6 or other configuration tool e g PC software or network device is used to change a parameter setting The switch setting also overrides the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 and Starter Fault Enable Parameter 136 fu
203. are provided for EMC installation compliance Enclosure Install the product in a grounded metal enclosure Wiring Wire in an industrial control application can be divided into three groups power control and signal The following recommendations for physical separation between these groups is provided to reduce the coupling effect e Different wire groups should cross at 90 inside an enclosure e Minimum spacing between different wire groups in the same tray should be 16 cm 6 in e Wire runs outside of an enclosure should be run in conduit or have shielding armor with equivalent attenuation e Different wire groups should be run in separate conduits e Minimum spacing between conduits containing different wire groups should be 8 cm 3 in e For additional guidelines please see the installation instructions Wiring and Ground Guidelines publication DRIVES IN001 Additional Requirements e Wire earth ground to control terminal 3 control ground e Use shielded wire for PTC and ground fault input e Terminate shielded wires to the control module terminal 3 control ground e Ground fault CT must be inside or within 3 m 9 84 ft of metal enclosure e When an external HIM is used a ferrite core must be placed around the HIM cable The recommended core is Fair Rite Products Corp part no 0461164181 or equivalent For additional PTC external CT and ground fault requirements see footnote of Figure
204. art 50 600 350 FLC Stop Mode Programs the desired Stop Mode NOTE The mode of stopping does not need to match the starting mode e g a Soft Start can have a stop mode programmed for Coast Linear Stop or SMB there is no Current Limit Stop or Torque Stop mode Coast Soft Stop Linear Speed Pump Stop SMB Ext Brake Stop Time Programs the amount of time desired to ramp from full to zero voltage for Soft Linear and Pump Stop mode The actual ramp stop time will depend on the stopping mode selected and load inertia 0 999 seconds Input 1 Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input 1 wired to control terminal 11 24V DC Default Start Coast Input 2 Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input 2 wired to control terminal 10 24V DC Default Disable Disable Start Coast Stop Option Start Coast Start Stop Slow Speed Dual Ramp OL Select Fault Fault NC Clear Fault Emerg Run Motor Heater Aux 1 Config Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact 1 wired across control terminal 4 and 5 NOTE Relay Operational Options e g ON and OFF delay etc are provided in the File Setup Group 1 0 selection sequence See Figure 85 on page 159 Aux 2 Config Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact 2 wired across control terminal 6 and 7 N
205. art Enable MVAR Ov A Level Locked Rotor A Dela Overvolt F Level MVAR OV A Delay Lag PF F Delay Frequency Low F Level y Lag PF A Level Frequency Low F Delay Overvolt F Delay MVAR Un F Level Lag PF A Delay Frequency Low A Level Overvolt A Level MVAR Un F Delay Frequency Low A Dela Overvolt A Delay MVAR Un A Level ee aueney ow y MVAR Un A Delay Voltage Unbal BA Starter Fault Enable Reactive Power BA Starter Alarm Enable Starter Restart Enable Molor raut nane Voltage Unbal F Level Motor Restart Enable Voltage Unbal F Delay MVAR Ov F Level Voltage Unbal A Level MVAR OV F Delay Voltage Unbal A Delay MVAR Ov A Level MVAR OV A Delay MVAR Un F Level MVAR Un F Delay MVAR Un A Level MVAR Un A Delay Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 175 Chapter 5 Programming Figure 90 Communications Communications Communcation Masks BA Data Links BA Logic Mask Data In A1 Logic Mask Act Data In A2 Write Mask Cfg Data In B1 Write Mask Act Data In B2 Port Mask Act Data In C1 Data In C2 Data In D1 Data In D2 Data Out A1 Data Out A2 Data Out B1 Data Out B2 Data Out C1 Data Out C2 Data Out D1 Data Out D2 Figure 91 Utility Utility Preferences Motor Data Expansion MBA Language BA Motor Connection MBA Expansion A Configuration Fan Configuration BA Line Voltage BA Expansion B Configuration Motor Configuration B
206. art profiles with separately adjustable ramp times initial torque settings etc to best meet the application needs The second start profile is enabled by configuring one of the controller auxiliary inputs to Dual Ramp and activating that input When the Start command is then activated the second start profile will begin Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 81 Chapter3 Operating Modes Figure 60 Dual Ramp Start Curent O O Loan Current Limit 100 Initial Torque 2 Percent Voltage Initial Torque 1 dH _ _ Start 4 _ gt d gt M_ _ Pun 1 gt Start 2 gt _ Run 12 gt Time in Seconds Table 21 Dual Ramp Start Mode Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Name Minimum Maximum Default Access Units Start Linear Speed Torque Ramp Pump Start 50 Ramp Time 0 0 1000 0 10 0 SEC 51 Initial Torque 0 90 70 LRT 52 Max Torque 0 300 250 53 Cur Limit Level 50 600 350 FLC 54 Kickstart Time 0 0 2 0 SEC 55 Kickstart Level 0 0 90 LRT 305 Starting Torque 0 300 100 58 Starting Mode 2 Full Voltage Current Limit Soft R W Start Linear Speed Torque Ramp Pump Start 59 Ramp Time 2 0 0 1000 0 10 0 SEC 60 Initial Torque 2 0 90 70 LRT 61 Max Torque 2 0 300 250 62 Cur Limit Level 2 50 600 350 FLC 63 Kickstart Time 2 0
207. arting mode is used for applications requiring across the line starting The controller supplied voltage to the motor will reach full voltage within five AC line cycles 0 08 s at 60 Hz and 0 1 s at 50 Hz To enable Full Voltage Start set Parameter 49 to Full Voltage Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 71 Chapter3 Operating Modes Figure 56 Full Voltage Start 100 Percent Voltage Time in Seconds Linear Acceleration The SMC 50 has the ability to start the motor following a timed linear ramp The Ramp Time Parameter 50 is selectable from 0 0 1000 0 seconds and determines the time the motor will ramp from a zero speed to full speed condition An Initial Torque Parameter 51 value sets the starting torque supplied to the motor from the controller A current limit setting 50 600 selectable of motor FLC is also available If the controller reaches the current limit setpoint the acceleration ramp will stop When the unit comes out of current limit the linear ramp will resume NOTE Kickstart is not available with this starting mode Figure 57 provides a graphical example of a linear acceleration and Table 17 provides a list of linear acceleration parameters Figure 57 Linear Acceleration Current Limit 100 Linear A Linear Acceleration Deceleration Percent Speed Ramp Time 4 Stat gt _ _ Rn gt 4 Stop Time in Seconds
208. ate Shipping Weight 150 SC1 Ee 47 6 kg 150 SC2 105 Ib 150 SC3 22 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Cat No 150 SD Controllers Figure 8 Dimensions of Cat No 150 SD1 SD3 Controller X 15 00 381 Lae 11 64 295 8 1 13 28 7 dia Oa spe Beadle 9 96 253 lifting holes 4 La 10 69 128 3 a 8 68 220 5 N 271 5 0 39 10 dia 2 04 51 7 T mounting holes 4 0 25 6 4 BE 1 31 33 3 1 3 00 76 2 I es ina wel a4 0 69 T N ty f 17 5 a I RU Tah 9 21 mo a 54 233 8 i N i 0 53 dia Detail A 13 5 12 holes 26 43 671 3 25 88 25 25 27 25 657 3 641 4 692 2 wie wate tars is 3 Mes i Tay A fi r a E gt ee A 4 a oC eo ee fits t j d 23 156 am 3 156 a lt Ad 80 16 80 16 p 7 844 199 24 8 63 219 2 10 908 277 06 15 00 381 17 38 441 5 18 00 457 2 Note When mounted in an enclosure maintain a minimum of 6 0 inches 152 4 millimeters clearance above or below the SMC 50 Side to side clearance is not required Catalog Number 150 SD1 77 1 kg 150 SD2 170 Ib 150 SD3 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Approximate Shippi
209. ated 5 30 Sets the desired trip class of internal solid state overload Overload fault and 75 Overload Class 10 A alarms are enabled and disabled in the Starter Fault En and Starter Alarm R W parameters 5 30 Allows user to set the internal solid state overload to an alternate trip class This a Overload Class 2 10 A Trip Class is used when an input configured as overload select is asserted RAW 71 Service Factor fect 980 A Parameter to enter the value of the motor s service factor from the nameplate R W 0 2200 0 78 otor FLC Amps 11 0 A Parameter to enter the Full Load Current FLC value from the motor s nameplate R W 0 2200 0 Second motor FLC setting to be used when Overload 2 is selected using the 79 otor FLC 2 Amps 1 0 A Overload 2 input R W 99 When the level of Motor Thermal Usage MTU drops below this limit after an OL 80 OL Reset Level MTU 75 A fault an overload reset can occur If restart is enabled the motor overload will R W automatically reset when the MTU drops below this level 0 999 Disables the overload from incrementing MTU for the selected time period after 81 OL Shunt Time Secs 0 A a start or stop command is initiated R W Falher 0 999 Disables the overload from tripping during slow speed and stopping maneuvers ue OL Inhibit Time Seis 0 A The MTU Therm Usage continues to increment during these maneuvers RW 0 100 The MTU level that will set off an alarm when exceeded The Overload bit the 8
210. ation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Metering Chapter 6 Actual Start Time The SMC 50 logs the start time of the last five motor starts and stores that information in Parameters 24 through 28 The start time data is stored in a first in first out method so the record of the last five starts is always maintained Table 88 Metering Parameters Associated with Actual Start Time Parameter Number Name Description Min Max Default Access Units 24 Start Time 1 25 Start Time 2 26 Start Time 3 0 1000 R Seconds 27 Start Time 4 28 Start Time 5 Peak Start Current The SMC 50 logs the peak average RMS current during each start and stores that information in Parameters 29 through 33 The Peak Start Current data is stored in a first in first out method so the record of the last five starts is always maintained Table 89 Metering Parameters Associated with Peak Start Current Parameter Number Name Description Min Max Default Access Units 29 Peak Current 1 30 Peak Current 2 31 Peak Current 3 0 15 000 R Amps 32 Peak Current 4 33 Peak Current 5 Total Starts The SMC 50 maintains a Total Start counter which is incremented each time the controller is started As shipped the counter value is zero It cannot be reset by the user NOTE The Total Starts counter is not incremented if the controller faults on a pre start fault It is incremented once SCR gating beg
211. ault occurs The value is overwritten if a 323 Phas A Amps 0 15000 0 NA subsequent fault occurs R SSCurrent Snapshot of the Phase B current when a fault occurs The value is overwritten if a 324 Phas B Amps 0 15000 0 NA subsequent fault occurs R SSCurrent Snapshot of the Phase C current when a fault occurs The value is overwritten if a 325 Phas C Amps 0 15000 0 NA subsequent fault occurs R 274 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Parameter Information Appendix B Table 152 Parameter 326 333 Min Max Enum Read Write Number Name Units Default Text Description Access SSPower Snapshot of the Motor Power Factor when a fault occurs The value is overwritten if 326 Factor m 1 00 1 00 0 A a subsequent fault occurs R SSMtr Thrm Snapshot of the Motor Thermal Usage when a fault occurs The value is overwritten 327 Usage MTU 0 200 0 A if a subsequent fault occurs R SSMotor Snapshot of the Motor Speed when a fault occurs The value is overwritten if a 328 Speed 0 100 0 A subsequent fault occurs R Snapshot of the average voltage Total Harmonic Distortion THD when a fault 329 SSTHD Vave 0 0 1000 0 0 A occurs The value is overwritten if a subseq
212. avi gsi eieren rinni a eta ge Bana an turer ete Elapsed Time ia ruia Tea eS Go guys ele Seen says Ranting Times cciaceieiaescs super CEE ESCOT a ess Motor Speeds cick uaa siaa soaked cucu ie MA ae Mus ole Actual Start J MINES hearer le cats woes Sabo E a eke ome Peak Start C arrenteces ictesentin whut caer ooo a a a iaaa AE CAL SCAT te viictate a 0 teed did EEE NE Total Harmonic Distortion THD 0004 f0 coc netd staeeneevevs Line Freg icy osanaan a E EE E oe te o EET EN EN Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Optional HIM Operation Communications Diagnostics Troubleshooting Specifications Table of Contents Current Imbalance 0 cece cece eee cece eens e ee eren 198 Voltage Un balance aus anioi eene E E EEA EEA 199 Chapter 7 CIEN E eaa ar a Boe wee ee E AETA 201 HIM Control Buttons 0 ce eee eee cece cece eeeeeneees 201 HIM Control Screen o n 00 cece eee cece ce enee eens 203 CopyCat Function of the 20 HIM AG cee eee eee ee eee 204 Chapter 8 OVERVIEW SEES Ba he AO EE OEO IE A EE 205 Communication Ports 0 r naar ie bbe eae bead reales oe SOE TE bea es 205 HIM Keypad amp Displays su 0o uc tueeds vacua nial Abie 2 iy lal ou 205 Control Enable 0 cece cece cece cence eneenneees 207 Loss of Communication with DPI Device 0 000s 209 Default Input Output Communication Configuration 209 SMC 50 Bit Identification 0
213. bits are read R and write W enabled Table 32 Enable Disable Starter Fault Alarm Matrix Parameter Function Fault Alarm Bit Bit Units Number Description NameO Assignment Access Default Starter Fault 136 Starter Fault En Volt Unbal 0 R W Bit 0 Disabled Overvoltage 1 Bit 1 Enabled Undervoltage 2 Enabled Phase Rev 3 Line Loss 4 Open Gate 5 Config Change 6 Freq 7 THD V 8 Starter Alarm 137 Starter Alarm En Volt Unbal 0 R W Bit 0 Disabled Overvoltage 1 Bit 1 Enabled Undervoltage 2 All Disabled as Phase Rev 3 Default Line Loss 4 Open Gate 5 Config Change 6 Freq 7 THD V 8 As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 105 Chapter 4 106 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Table 33 Enable Disable Motor Fault Alarm Matrix Parameter Function Fault Alarm Bit Bit Units Number Description NameO Assignment Access Default Motor Fault 230 Motor Fault En Overload 0 R W Bit 0 Disabled Underload 1 Bit 1 Enabled MWatts Over 2 Enabled MWatts Under 3 MVAR Over 4 MVAR Under 5 MVAR Over 6 MVAR Under 7 MVA Under 8 MVA Over 9 Curr Imbal 10 Jam 11 Stall 12 Starts Hr 13 PM Hours 14 PM Starts 15 Power Qual 16 Open Load 27 THD1 18 Lead PF Un 19 Lead PF Ov 20 Lag PF Un 21 Lag PF Ov 22 Locked Rotor 23 Motor Alarm 231 Motor Alarm En Overload
214. bles the SMC 50 to interface with other DPI communication devices e g a 20 HIM A6 a 1203 SSS or a 1203 USB AnaCANda cable for PC interface software such as DriveExplorer and software that is PC based and network compatible e g Connected Components Workbench Figure 1 DPI Location amp Standard Terminal Block Top of SMC 50 DPI port 2 Standard 1 0 terminal block Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Product Overview Chapter 1 Programming The SMC 50 Controller supports DPI communication port numbers 1 2 3 and 4 Port 1 is assigned to support the optional slide in front mounted HIM see Figure 2 Port 2 is assigned to the DPI port located on the top of the control module see Figure 1 Communication port 4 is assigned to a 20 COMM X network module hardware expansion slot 9 see Figure 2 NOTE When the DPI splitter is placed into port 2 it is assigned communication port numbers 2 and 3 The front of the controller also contains a multi color diagnostic STATUS LED to provide simple operational and fault information A PUSH TO RESET and HOLD TO TEST push button provides the ability to reset a fault without additional hardware More detailed information about these tools can be found in Chapter 10 Troubleshooting The SMC S0 has three hardware expansion ports 7 8 and 9 which are used to house optional expansion modules These expansion modules provide additional features functions e g
215. c The Stall Alarm is enabled or disabled via the Stall bit in the Motor Alarm Enable Parameter 231 Table 43 Stall Protection Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Minimum Maximum Default Units NameO 188 Stall Delay 0 0 30 0 10 0 R W SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Figure 78 Stall Protection 600 FLC lt Programmed Start Time gt lt Stall gt Time in Seconds Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Chapter 4 Jam Detection Fault amp Alarm Motor operational run current greater than the motor nameplate rating may indicate a jam condition due to a conveyor jam or jammed drive gear These conditions can result in overheating of the motor and equipment damage Rapid Jam detection helps to minimize damage and loss of production NOTE The SMC 50 starter SCR Overtemperature Fault see SCR Overtemperature may occur before the jam trip in the case of high current situations Jam Fault Code 23 The SMC 50 Jam Fault Fault Code 23 provides detection of a motor jam A jam condition exists if the motor current rises above a user defined level for a user defined time while in the run mode NOTE This fault is not active during starting or stopping The Jam Level Parameter 114 is a percentage of the motor s Full Load Current Parameter 78 If the actual motor current rises abo
216. capability to three different types of external sensing devices which can be used by the SMC 50 for certain application conditions When installing the 150 SM2 into the SMC 50 the following installation requirements must be followed e Only one 150 SM2 can be installed in one SMC 50 e The 150 SM2 must reside in port 7 or 8 only DO NOT use port 9 with the 150 SM2 e When the external CT function is enabled through the 150 SM2 CT Enable Bit the external CT is calibrated by the SMC 50 for scaling phase shift and inversion The calibration cycle will automatically occur before the first START occurs after the 150 SM2 installation and when the CT Enable Parameter X 12 Enable after a Load Defaults occurs and when the user forces tuning of the SMC 50 through the Force Tuning Parameter 194 or the HOLD TO TEST button on the SMC 50 is held for gt 10 seconds when stopped To configure the 150 SM2 follow the steps in Basic Configuration using the HIM on page 182 then proceed with the steps below E Stopped AUTO wy 0 Amps Port 07 Param File Group FILE Linear List GROUP Linear List Module Status Alarm Enable 1 Using the File Group selection press ENTER number 5 on the keypad until the Group Linear List is displayed 2 Use the up or down arrow to scroll to the desired parameter then press ENTER If the parameter is bit configured e g Fault Enable a Use the left or right arrow to
217. capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the ice should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 3 Phase AC Line Power contact closed start initiated COAST or STOP maintenance is required on the 51 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Figure 33 For Dual Ramp Applications AC amp DC Inputs Circuit Fast Acting SCR Fuses Optional Protective SMC 50 Soft Starter 3 Phase AC Line Power 120V 240V AC Control Transformer or AC Power Supply Ramp 2 _ Ramp 1 ac Aux2 Aux1 Intl DC COM Control Module Standard JO tp vontio Mod 09 98 Ai A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 AQ A10 A11 A12 gt uN Q S NC F Q AwAt AuxA2 AuxA3 AC Inputs Auxilliary Relay Outputs 150 SM4 Option I O Module Customer supplied See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings 100 240V AC Terminal 11 In 1 DC 24V DC input configured for START input using Parameter 56 Terminal 10 In 2 DC 24V DC input configured for COAST STOP option etc using Parameter 57 NOTE The controller will generate an O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is selected for COAST or STOP Terminal A1 INA1 100 240V AC input is co
218. cation 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 SMC 50 Option Modules Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 The SMC 50 has three expansion ports to place optional modules see Figure 20 These ports provide the capability to add control modules e g additional inputs and outputs I O simple start stop parameter configuration capability ground fault etc Brief functional explanations are provided here with the wiring termination identifications See Chapter 5 Programming for more detailed functional and configuration information See Figure 20 for compatible port locations of the selected module ATTENTION There is the potential to have voltage values above 220V A AC on the option modules Before removing the control module cover to access option modules disconnect ALL power to the SMC 50 Controller Figure 20 Port Number Identification Expansion Port for 20 HIM A6 DPI Port 1 ie ol DPI Port 4 Control Module Expansion Port 7 4 d Control Module Control Module Expansion Expansion Port 8 VO Port 9 E i 3 4 Table 7 Port Location for Compatible Option Modules Compatible Control Maximum Number of this SMC 50 Control Module Module Port Type of Option M
219. ceptable level to potentially RTC Battery Low 69 Pre Start maintain the real time clock and calendar e Motor has stalled rotor is not e Check motor and load for binding or jammed turning conditions Locked Rotor 70 In All Modes e Parameters are not adequately configured for the application Review and adjust e Disable the fault alarm feature P e A start event command has e NA Start a Starting occurred This is not a fault e A slow speed event command has e NA Slow Speed a Slow Speed occurred This is not a fault i e A stop option event command has e NA Stop Option 733 Stop Option occurred This is not a fault A e Acoast to stop event command e NA geast ue Coast has occurred This is not a fault e Aclear fault event command has e NA Clear Fault 75 Faulted occurred This does not generate a fault n e A fault event command has e NA ault 76 Faulted occurred This is not a fault e A change to one of the controller e NA Param Change 71 Stopped parameters has occurred This is not a fault Reserved 78 99 NA NA NA e There is an issue with the control e Review the control module wiring Ensure the module wiring ground terminal is secure and connected to the e The control module is defective system s earth ground Ensure an RC System Faults 100 199 In All Modes snubber suppressor is connected to all inductive loads in the control circuit See input wiring e Replace the control module X indicates a port number in which the expan
220. chanical removal of power Figure 17 SMC 50 Connected to a Line Controlled Motor SMC 50 Co o He e IRETE Xa Ico M o he 4 32 Tare 3 Ico ole II A ee T1 Recommended See Table 4 for lug information Delta Connected Motors The SMC 50 has the ability to run Wye Delta motors in an inside the delta configuration These motors typically have 6 or 12 leads The SMC 50 automatically detects the motor wiring configuration during the tuning process In a delta configuration it is required that an isolation contactor IC be added Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 to the circuit to provide galvanic isolation of the motor and final electromechanical removal of power Figure 18 SMC 50 Connected to a Delta Connected Motor T5 Delta SMC 50 Distribution Block S L3 5 T3 6 L3 L3 LS Q E lS L2 3 T2 4 O Li 1 71 2 L1 L1l Ic 0 T6 17 Required See Table 4 for lug and delta distribution block information Grounding Provision Provision for connecting a field installed grounding conductor is provided on controllers rated 210 520 A The grounding location is identified by the green grounding nut size 1 4 20 near the controller s bottom mounting holes Power Lugs Table 4
221. ck the control power and verify it is within the Terminals 1 L1 and 2 L2 specification check the connections and grounding V Control Loss a7 In All Modes e Low line voltage condition to the SMC 50 control terminals e Replace the control module 38 e The condition to generate the TB e Clear the fault condition TB Input 39 Input fault is satisfied e Rewire and or reconfigure the input 12384 40 amp In All Modes e Terminal wiring configuration or ES i fault N O N C configuration of 41 input is incorrect e Power line unbalance is greater than Check the power system and correct if necessary or the programmed value change the programmed value ae ae o 42 or 18 Running e The delay time programmed is too e Extend the delay time to match the application Uem myaiante short for the application requirements e Disable this fault alarm feature e Abnormally reduced real MW e Repair replace the condition causing the reduced power draw by the motor possibly real power load due to broken mechanical e Modify the programmed fault alarm parameters to connection belt gears etc better suit the application Und Pwr Real R Running between motor and load e Disable the fault alarm feature e Pump cavitation e Programmed setting is incorrect for the application e Abnormally high real KW power e Repair replace the condition causing the high KW Ovr Pwr Real draw by the motor power draw 44 Running e Programmed setting is incorrect for e Modify
222. codes for the 150 SM6 Parameter Configuration Module Table 108 LED Error Code with Respective Fault Alarm Source Referenced HIM Referenced HIM LED Fault Alarm Configuration LED Fault Alarm Configuration Error Code Source Software Code Error Code Source Software Code O Red SMC A 1 HAL ID 33 Line Loss B 2 NVS Error 34 C 3 V24 Recovery 35 1 A 4 5 V24 Loss 36 Shorted SCR B 5 V Control Loss 37 C 6 RTC Battery Low 69 A 7 System Faults 100 199 2 Open Gate B 8 1 38 C 9 Terminal 2 39 Block SCR Overtemp 10 6 Input 3 40 Pwr Pole PTC 60 4 41 A 30 Test Fault 62 31 A 1 4 CT Loss 7 Open Bypass 2 C 32 C 3 Yellow Motor No Load 14 4 Overload 21 A 15 5 Stall 24 Open Load 16 6 Phase Reversal 25 C 17 7 rate 42 3 Volt Imbalance 18 mbalance The Fault Alarm code available from a HIM or configuration software provides more detailed information concerning the source of the fault alarm Fault and Alarm codes for the same event e g Line Loss are the same Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 217 Chapter9 Diagnostics Fault Display 20 HIM A6 When the SMC 50 is used with a 20 HIM A6 the HIM displays the fault information Figure 95 Fault Display Faulted wy 0 Amps A Fault Code Exp Removed Elapsed Time ESC IMPORTANT Resett
223. components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage the installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL 54 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Figure 36 For Retrofit Applications AC Inputs No DPI Control Circuit Protective Device 3 Phase AC Line Power Existing Motor Starter 120 240V AC Control Transformer or AC Power Supply Aux2 a Control Mod Control Module Standard I O ower amp Groun A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 DPO OE Gt OA Ne AuxA1 AuxA2 AuxA3 Auxilliary Relay Outputs 150 SM4 Option I O Module Al x InA2 InA3 3 InA4 INCOM e AC Inputs Customer supplied See the controller nameplate to verify the control power input ratings 100 240V AC Terminal A2 InA2 100 240V AC input configured for START input using Parameter 7 3 control module port 7 Terminal A1 InA1 100 240V AC input configured for Coast Stop Option etc using Parameter 7
224. contains 12 control terminals and is equipped as standard with two digital 24V DC on off inputs and two relay outputs for auxiliary control function Figure 19 Standard Digital 1 0 Wiring Terminal Block Identification 2 u s 7 e s f4 3 2 1 Q Q Q Q O S L2 L1 Q Q 2 2 S E Aux 2 Aux 1 y T amp uw oO Q z Control 24V DC Inputs Relay Outputs Power amp Ground inputs on controllers rated 120 240V AC AND 24V DC Voltages exceeding specified input range may cause damage to the controller ATTENTION IN1 DC terminal 11 and IN2 DC terminal 10 are 24V DC Terminal Number Description 10 Control Power L1 20 Control Power Common L2 3 Ground To connect to the system control ground point 400 Auxiliary Relay Contact 1 500 Auxiliary Relay Contact 1 6 00 Auxiliary Relay Contact 2 700 Auxiliary Relay Contact 2 8 DC Internal 1 0 Power DC Common 9 Enable 1 0 1000 Input 2 24V DC range 15 30V DC 1100 Input 1 24V DC range 15 30V DC 12 24V DC Internal 1 0 Power Do not connect any additional loads to this terminal Parasitic loads may cause problems with operation When set to external bypass mode the auxiliary contact is used to control a properly sized external contactor and overload once the motor is at full speed RC snubbers are required when inductive loads are connected to terminal Rockwell Automation Publi
225. controller fault condition the Aux 1 contact will close to energize the Shunt Trip ST coil NOTE In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage the installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 59 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Figure 41 For Shunt Trip Applications AC Inputs o Fast Acting SCR i ee Fuses optional i ective p evice 0 3 Phase AC Line Power 120V 240V AC Control Transformer or AC Power Supply WO Q Stop e ele Start oS i o e nosa 7j ej s5 4 3 2 1 So QQ eB Wt QOH l 2 1 2a ce 8 Au2 Aut
226. cycles the heating current to each of the phases This feature provides a programmable heating level heating time and a control terminal block input which can be used to start the process NOTE Configuration of control module inputs is done via Input 1 Parameter 56 or Input 2 Parameter 57 If a 150 SM4 Optional Digital I O Module is configured its inputs can also be used for the motor winding heater function Table 22 Motor Winding Heater Parameter List Parameter Number 220 Heating Time 0 1000 221 Heating Level 0 100 The motor winding heater function can be activated after a valid start command is received After a valid start the activation of the heating function can be performed by e programming the Heating Time Parameter 220 to a non zero value or Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 83 Chapter3 Operating Modes Modes of Operation Stopping Modes 84 e configuring an input to Motor Heater and activating that input prior to the start command The heater function will continue for the specified time or until the input is deactivated at which time the motor will start The heater function will be disabled if the e Heating Level Parameter 221 is set to zero or e Heating Time Parameter 220 is set to zero or e input is inactive or not configured at the time of the start command Overview Stop Mode Parameter 65 defines the type of stop maneuver performed by
227. d Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 71 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Notes 72 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Operation Motor Configuration Motor Tuning Chapter 3 Operating Modes The SMC 50 can operate standard squirrel cage induction motors rated 30 520 A or star delta wye delta type motors rated 52 900 A operated inside the delta IMPORTANT Verify line and control as the voltage values on the product before applying power Line connected wye line connected delta and inside the delta motor configurations are possible with the SMC 50 The motor tuning feature of the SMC 50 will automatically determine the motor connection Motor tuning is done automatically by the controller on initial motor start or forced to occur by the user The user can also enter the configuration of the Motor Connection Parameter 44 into the SMC 50 The Motor Line Voltage rating Parameter 46 must be entered into the controller by the user to enable the motor protection features to function default 480V The SMC 50 will perform the motor tuning process on the initial start sequence of the motor Motor tuning includes the identification of the motor parameters and the detection of the motor connection type Line or Delta The SMC 50 uses the motor tuning
228. d PF Un A Lvl for a time period greater than that R W defined by Lead PF Un A Dly a Lead PD Un Fault will be signaled Ot implement an Alarm or Fault the appropriate bit in the Motor Fault En Parameter 230 or Motor Alarm En Parameter 231 must also be set Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 269 Appendix B Parameter Information Table 147 Parameter 254 263 Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access Allows the user to enter a value for the Leading Power Factor Under Alarm 0 00 1 00 Level Lead PF Un A Lvl If the current actual Power Factor value is leading 254 Lead PFUnALvl 0 00 A less than the Lead PF Un A Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by PAW Lead PF Un A Dly a Lead PD Un Alarm will be signaled Allows the user to enter a time value for the Leading Power Factor Under 0 1 99 0 Alarm Delay Lead PF Un A Dly If the current actual Power Factor value is 255 Lead PF Un A Dly Secs 0 1 A leading less than the Lead PF Un A Lvl for a time period greater than that R W defined by Lead PF Un A Dly a Lead PD Un Alarm will be signaled Allows the user to enter a value for the Lagging Power
229. d in Control Module Port 9 However its DPI Port Number assignment is 4 because of the cable connection to the DPI Port 4 located below the front mounted HIM To access Port 3 the use of a 1203 S03 splitter inserted into Port 2 is required Enabling Starter amp Motor Faults amp Alarms Motor and starter Faults and Alarms can be individually configured enabled and disabled by the user The parameters Motor Fault En Starter Fault En Motor Alarm En and Starter Alarm En are numbered bit fields for configuration to enable bit 1 or disable bit 0 specific motor and or starter Faults and Alarms This can be done by configuration tools e g HIM or PC software or network communications Due to the number of Faults and Alarms being greater than 32 the configuration bits are located in the lower and upper 16 bit fields numbered 0 31 of the associated SMC 50 parameters The bits are broken up into the starter Faults and motor Faults Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Chapter 4 These parameters do not enable or disable Faults that may be generated by expansion modules e g 150 SM2 SM4 etc When an expansion module is plugged into a control module port 7 8 or 9 a set of configuration parameters appear to enable configuration of that specific module The following tables provide an overview of the motor and starter Fault and Alarm Enable parameters All
230. d in any of the three control module option ports See Figure 20 Up to three 150 SM3 modules can be used with a single control module The 150 SM3 module terminal block used to wire the I O is removable 1 When installed in Control Module Port 7 the orientation of the module terminal block is rotated 180 along with its terminals NOTE 2 The Cat No 150 SM3 Analog I O Module can NOT be configured using a 150 SM6 PCM This module can be configured using a 20 HIM A6 network card or communications software e g Connected Components Workbench Figure 22 Analog 1 0 Module Wiring Diagram Voltage or Current Voltage or Current Current Transmitter Current Transmitter V I V I V I V I V V I V V I NC Control OUT OUT OUT OUT IN IN IN IN IN IN Ground 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 Output 1 Output 2 Input 1 Input 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 39 Chapter 2 Control Circuit 150 SM3 Optional inputs Terminals B5 B10 150 SM3 Optional outputs Terminals B1 B4 40 Installation amp Wiring Table 8 Cat No 150 SM3 Input and Output Specifications Specification Number of Inputs 2 differential inputs Normal Operating Input Ranges 10V 0 10V 0 5V 1 5V 0 20 mA 4 20 mA Full Scale Operating Input Ranges 10 5V 0 10 5V 0 5 5 25V 0 5 5 25V 0 21 mA 3 5 21 mA Input Resolution 16 bit sample
231. d manage status information locally within the soft starter It can function stand alone or complimentary to supervisory control See Appendix F Using DeviceLogix for additional information and programming examples 14 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Overview Degree of Protection Receiving Unpacking Inspecting Storing Chapter 2 Installation amp Wiring The SMC 50 Soft Starters can be used to start three phase line type up to 690V or delta type up to 600V motors Line voltage and motor type are automatically detected by the SMC 50 or can be configured by the user The line and load power terminals of the SMC 50 Soft Starters have an IP00 rating Units rated 90 180 A can have an IP2X rating with the addition of optional 150 STCB terminal covers Taking into account the ambient conditions the device must be installed in a suitable enclosure Make sure that no dust liquids or conductive parts can enter the soft starter Soft starter operation produces waste heat i e heat loss For details see Table 1 in this chapter or Appendix A Specifications It is the user s responsibility to thoroughly inspect the equipment before accepting the shipment from the freight company Check the item s received against the purchase order If any items are damaged it is the responsibility of the user not to accept delivery until the freight agent has noted the damage on the freight bill Should any
232. d to clear reset to 0 the contents of metering parameters Elapsed Time Energy Time to PM Preventative Maintenance and Starts to PM To clear the contents of any one of these parameters configure Meter Reset to the specific parameter you wish to clear EXAMPLE To clear reset to 0 the Elapsed Time configure Meter Reset to Elapsed Time The controller will then clear the Elapsed Time and the value of Meter Reset will return to Ready 0 To access Meter Reset using the 20 HIM AG6 perform steps 1 through 4 Viewing Metering Data beginning on page 191 1 From Step 4 select the Metering Basic Group then press ENTER number 5 on the keypad 2 Use the down arrow on the keypad to select highlight Meter Reset 3 With Meter Reset highlighted press the ENTER key number 5 on the keypad or the ENTER soft key 4 Press the EDIT soft key 5 Use the up or down arrow to select the desired parameter Elapsed Time Energy Time to PM or Starts to PM to be reset then press the soft ENTER soft key The selected parameter will be reset to zero with the exception of the Starts to PM NOTE When the ENTER key is pressed and Starts to PM is selected its contents will be set to the value contained in PM Starts Parameter 127 Current The SMC 50 calculates true RMS current based on Current Transformer CT feedback for all three phases In addition an average value of the three phase currents is calculated During Braking and Slow
233. data in its control algorithm During the tuning process the motor will not turn and will make some audible noise including pulsing and buzzing The time to complete the tuning process is approximately 10 to 20 seconds but may vary based on the size and characteristics of the individual motor being used After successful completion of the tuning process the motor will start based on the user programmed start profile If the tuning process is interrupted by the user giving a stop command or removing power from the unit the tuning process will be repeated on the next start command Subsequent starts of the motor after a successful tuning will not perform the tuning process After the initial successful tuning of the motor the process may be re initiated by the user via one of the following methods 1 Change the status of Force Tuning Parameter 194 to TRUE by using a configuration tool e g a HIM with the motor stopped During the next start cycle the tuning process will occur and Parameter 194 will change back to FALSE OR Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 73 Chapter3 Operating Modes Modes of Operation Starting 74 2 Press the HOLD TO TEST PUSH TO RESET push button located on the front of the controller for ten seconds with the motor stopped During the next start cycle the tuning process will occur The controller s status LED will flash amber indicating that Tuning will occur on the next start
234. dication requires the use of a HIM or PC software configuration tool for full local access Full access to data can also be obtained via network using a 20 COMM XX communication module Not intended to be used as an emergency stop See applicable standards for emergency stop requirements Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 241 Appendix A Specifications Electrical Ratings 242 Table 117 Power Circuit amp Utilization Category Ratings Device Type Rating UL CSA NEMA IEC Power Circuit of Controlled Poles 3 480V 200 480V AC 15 10 200 415V 15 10 Rated Operation Voltage 690V 200 600V AC 15 10 200 690V Y 15 10 480V 500V Rated Isolation Volt N A ated Isolation Voltage 690V 690V 480V Rated Impulse Voltage N A 6000V 690V raie 480V Dielectric Withstand 530V 2200V AC 2500V Repetitive Peak Inverse 480V 1400V 1400V Voltage Rating 690V 1800V 1800V Operating Frequency All 47 63 Hz 47 63 Hz Utilization Category N Dut AC 53a 3 5 10 99 2 eer 90 520 A MGI Heavy Duty AC 53a 3 5 30 99 1 Protection Against 90 520 A N A IP20 Control Terminals only Electrical Shock 90 1804 IP2X i with 150 STCB Terminal Cover 480V DV DT Protection RC Snubber Network 690V i 480 600V Metal Oxide Varistors 220 Joules Transient Protection 690V None Contr
235. e 0 100 R gt Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 199 Chapter6 Metering 200 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Chapter Optional HIM Operation Overview The SMC 50 offers a variety of unique control options that provide enhanced motor starting and stopping capabilities H M Control Buttons The control buttons available with the Bulletin 20 HIM A6 LCD modules are compatible with the SMC 50 s control options The following table details the functionality of each control button with regards to each option IMPORTANT The logic mask port must be enabled prior to initiating control commands except for Stop which will always initiate a Coast to Stop to the SMC 50 See Chapter 8 Control Enable on page 207 for instructions The control terminals must be wired according to Figure 35 on page 54 or Figure 46 on page 65 in Chapter 2 Installation amp Wiring Figure 92 20 HIM A6 Control Button Functionality Option Action Operation When Pressed Standard The green start button will commence motor acceleration to full speed Soft Stop Current Limit The red stop button will provide a coast stop and or Full Voltage reset a fault Linear Speed This button will bring up the Control Screen to enable the stop option maneuver See the HIM Control Screen section on page 203 The green start button when pressed will commence motor acceleration to
236. e from the average of the RMS phase voltage Vave divided by the average voltage In other words Vu 100 Me Vave Note that the phase to phase voltage is used in the calculation for voltage unbalance Voltage Unbalance Fault Code 18 A Voltage Unbalance Fault condition Fault Code 18 occurs when the calculated unbalance level rises above a user defined level Voltage Unbalance Fault Level for a user defined time Voltage Unbalance Fault Delay See Table 41 on page 116 Voltage unbalance protection is enabled or disabled using the Voltage Unbalance bit in the Starter Fault Enable Parameter 136 Voltage Unbalance Alarm In addition to the Voltage Unbalance Fault a Voltage Unbalance Alarm is also available This is set up exactly like that of the Voltage Unbalance Fault using the Voltage Unbalance Alarm Level and Voltage Unbalance Alarm Delay parameters This Voltage Unbalance Alarm is enabled or disabled using the Voltage Unbalance bit in the Starter Alarm Enable Parameter 137 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 115 Chapter 4 116 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Table 41 Voltage Unbalance Protection Parameter List Name 107 Volt Unbal F Dly 0 1 99 0 3 0 RW SECS 108 Volt Unbal A Lvl 1 25 10 109 Volt Unbal A Dly 0 1 99 0 3 0 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Phase Reversal Protection Phase Reversal
237. e Aux2 output When disabled it is Lf a normally open relay output contact when de energized By enabling the 0 1 invert function the relay contact becomes a normally closed contact when X 11 Aux2 Invert 0 NA de energized R W Disable Aux2 Relay Output is not inverted N 0 Enable Aux2 Relay Output is inverted N C 0 0 10 0 A user selected time delay in activating the Aux2 Relay Contact can be X 12 Aux2 On Delay 0 0 sec NA programmed R W 0 0 10 0 A user selected time delay in de activating the Aux2 Relay Contact can be X 13 Aux2 Off Delay 0 0 sec NA programmed R W oo Allows the user to configure the functionality of the Aux3 Relay Output on the 150 SM4 Digital 1 0 Option Module Normal Aux3 closes when start asserted opens when motor stops ne Aux3 closes when motor reaches Up to Speed and opens when the motor is Up to Speed not at speed Fault Aux3 closes when the SMC 50 enters a fault state and opens when the fault is cleared Alarm Aux3 closes when the SMC 50 detects an alarm condition and opens when the alarm is cleared Ext Bypass Aux3 closes when the SMC 50 enters the external bypass mode and opens EXE DYP when it leaves that mode SCR Control 0 11 s Aux3 closes when the external braking command is active and opens when X 14 Aux3 Config 0 NA Ext Brake eis nabactiie R W Device Logix Aux3 is controlled by the Device Logix program Aux Control When an auxiliary output is configured for Aux Control a bit within the parame
238. e application This can have an adverse effect on the performance of the overall system THD Fault and Alarm parameters are available for both voltage THDV and current THD I A Fault and Alarm delay time and a level are also available to configure each of these parameters Table 57 THD Parameter List Name 118 THD V F Lvl 0 0 1000 0 119 THD V F Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS 120 THD VALVI 0 0 1000 0 121 THD V A Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS R W 122 THD I F Lvl 0 0 1000 0 123 THD I F Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS 124 THD IA Lvl 0 0 1000 0 125 THD A Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Power Pole Overtemperature Fault PTC Power Pole Overtemperature Fault Code 60 A built in PTC is used to measure the SMC 50 s power pole temperature The SMC 50 will generate a Power Pole PTC Fault Fault Code 60 when the temperature in the power pole rises above the PTC trip temperature p P P p temp NOTE There are no user configurable Power Pole Overtemperature Fault parameter and it cannot be disabled The Fault cannot be reset until the unit cools Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 131 Chapter 4 132 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Open Load Fault amp Alarm No Load Motor Fault Code 14 Open Motor Phase A Loss Fault Code 15 Open Motor Phase B Loss Fault Code 16 Open Motor Phase C Loss Fault
239. e is a Fault code determined by port number DPI provides a separate Exp fault for each port This fault can be generated directly by the peripheral and is separate from the Exp Removed fault device specific The default configuration for I O communication is 4 bytes in and 4 bytes out TX 4 bytes RX 4 bytes The total size may very when used with a communication card The default configuration is arranged according to the following table Table 100 Default Configuration Word Produced Data Status Consumed Data Control 0 Logic Status Logic Command 1 Feedback Reference The feedback word is always Ave Current The reference word is not used with the SMC 50 however the space must be reserved le p p Contigua TIP The total data size produced or consumed may vary depending on the communication card being used For more information see the User Manual of the specific communication card being used with the SMC 50 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 209 Chapter8 Communications SMC 50 Bit Identification 210 The SMC 50 supports 32 bit Data Links Therefore the device can be configured to return additional information The I O message size depends on how many DataLinks are enabled The following table summarizes the I O data sizes Table 101 1 0 Data Sizes n DataLinks Rx Tx Logic Status Command Reference FeedBack ____ Size Si
240. eLogix Example 1 Selector Switch Operation This example demonstrates how a selector switch could be used to select 1 or 4 parameters to write to one of the scratchpad output parameters The truth table below represents the inputs and outputs for a 4 position selector switch Inputs Outputs Input 1 Input 2 Output Selection Selector Switch Output 0 0 0 Volt PP Ave 0 1 1 Volt Phase A B 1 0 2 Volt Phase B C 1 3 Volt Phase C A Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 299 Appendix F Using DeviceLogix 300 Parameter Configuration Since the individual phase voltage parameters are not directly available in DeviceLogix only the average voltage Volt PP Ave is we will use three of the DeviceLogix Datalink parameters to make those values available to DeviceLogix as follows Parameter No Parameter Value Description 337 DLX DL Input 1 Port 0 Volts Phase A B Value for Selection 01 338 DLX DL Input 2 Port 0 Volts Phase B C Value for selection 10 339 DLX DL Input 3 Port 0 Volts Phase C A Value for selection 11 Figure 99 Function Block Programming Vdt PFAve DLX DL 1 Selectorin C Selectorin ome eh eh em ces peo mea eee ene ane eae cewoeyseereerEernenneaneene C Ensblein EnsbleOut A DLX DL3 C Selectorin Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Using DeviceLogix Appendix F Exa
241. eObserver Includes Cat No 1203 SFC and 1202 C10 cables ncludes Cat No 20 HIM H10 and 22 HIM H10 cables O00000 000 294 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Introduction Parameters Appendix F Using DeviceLogix DeviceLogix DLX is a standard feature in the SMC 50 firmware 4 002 and higher DeviceLogix can be used to control and monitor the SMC 50 DeviceLogix programming for the SMC 50 is accomplished through a DeviceLogix Editor component 4 icon available in Connected Components Workbench version 6 and later Other DeviceLogix Editors such as RSNetWorx for DeviceNet cannot be used Table 166 Basic features SMC 50 4 002 and later Devicelogix Library Version 5 Maximum number of function blocks 32 20 ms fixed 1 10 blocks Program update time per number of blocks used 30 ms fixed 11 21 blocks 40 ms fixed 22 32 blocks The SMC 50 DeviceLogix implementation provides basic logic capability for applications A 20 40 ms scan time is provided depending on program size DeviceLogix can be used in both networked and stand alone environments DeviceLogix continues execution independent of the SMC 50 s state starting running fault etc There is no data retention in DeviceLogix during a power cycle Timer and counter accumulators calculation results latched bits etc will be cleared Controlling the SMC 50 operating modes starting stopping
242. eal Demand Max Real Demand Reactive Power Reactive Energy amp Reactive Energy Reactive Demand Max Reactive Demand Apparent Power Apparent Energy Apparent Demand Number of Periods Power Factor Energy Savings Elapsed Time 1 amp 2 Running Time Motor Speed Start Time 1 5 Peak Current 1 5 Total Starts THD V THD I THD V Average THD Average Line Frequency Current Imbalance and Voltage Unbalance LED Status Indication by Multi Color standard displays status fault and alarm codes Running with alarm Running no alarm Ready with alarm Ready no alarm Ready tuning enabled on next start and Firmware Download Active with alarm Auxiliary Contacts two standard two fully programmable contacts as normal UTS fault alarm external brake auxiliary control network or external bypass The configuration option must be ordered separately from the controller which does not include a setup tool Accu Stop is accomplished using the SMB Mode and Slow Speed with Braking Diagnostic indication depends on the type of configuration tool used The standard LED status indication displays Inhibit stop enabled Fault non resettable Fault resettable For full local access a HIM or PC software is required Remote full access to data can also be obtained using a 20 COMM XX communication module Metering Indication depends on the type of configuration tool being used Metering In
243. econds l l l L _ al lf Brake Selected l L If Coast to Rest Selected When Stop Mode Parameter 65 is configured for SMB and the Input push button is configured for Stop Option Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 MOTOR SPEED 100 STOP Closed Open START Closed Open SLOW SPEED Closed Open NORMAL Closed Open UTS Closed Open Operating Modes Chapter 3 Figure 72 Accu Stop SN Coast to Rest N Brake S Coast from Slow Speed Brake from Slow Speed N N s N Swe Start pi Run _ ____ Accu Sup i gt pas Time in Seconds i 1 Li 1 Li l i l l i l l l i l l l l Li I Li e 1N Coast Input Slow Brake Open Current 0 Coast NOTE Parameter Selections 1 Parameter 65 Stop Mode SMB 2 Parameter 69 Braking Current User Defined Value 3 Parameter 72 Slow Speed User Defined Value Selection 4 Parameter 73 Slow Brake Cur User Defined Value 0 selected enables Coast to Rest Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 99 Chapter3 Operating Modes Figure 73 Slow Speed with Braking Motor Speed 100 h Coast to Stop x 1 N 1 1 XN Coast s s AN i i s Brake x i i Slow Speed gt Starii Run Brake Time in Seconds Push Buttons Stant o Closed i i i Open f BE Closed 1 i i i Open i Coast Slow Sp
244. ed States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation about us sustainability ethics product environmental compliance page Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A Kar Plaza Is Merkezi E Blok Kat 6 34752 erenk y stanbul Tel 90 216 5698400 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation NV Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Supersedes Publication 150 UM011B EN P January 2013 Copyright 2014 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
245. ed for a Soft Start 790 900 1500 1800 3500 3600 RPM O Kickstart is available when using Soft Start A Kickstart Level and Time must be configured if this mode i s used Access these parameters via the Starting Setup Group The Starting Setup Group can be accessed with the HIM from the Port lt 00 gt DEV PARAM folder under the File Group File Setup Group Starting selection sequence see Figure 85 on page 159 zero disables Kickstart Setting either parameter to AStart Delay Time can also be programmed to delay starting for a period of time after the initiation of the START command The Start Delay parameter can be accessed from the Group Starting selection as noted in O above In addition to Stop Mode for SMB a Braking Current value must be configured from the Group Stopping selection see Figure 85 on page 159 O Tuse Ext Braking one of the Auxiliary Outputs must be programmed to Ext Brake When programmed for Ext Brake the function of this Auxiliary is to energize the external brake device to stop the motor The relay stays ON from the beg until the STOP time parameter has timed out Any auxiliary output configured for Aux Control using the AuxX Config parameter will be under control of i Control Parameter 180 See Parameter 180 information for bit assignments NOTE This function enables forcing an output ON or OFF inning of the STOP command ts associated bit from the Aux ATTENT
246. ed in this diagram is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor Configure Aux 1 to NORMAL using Parameter 172 NORMAL Aux 1 contact will close to energize the IC coil with the START push button and will open to de energize it when the stop maneuver initiated by the stop push button is complete The order of the terminal numbers for the option 1 0 module can be reversed depending on which expansion slot it is located in on the control module However the function associated with the terminal number remains the same NOTE In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage the installation of an isolation contactor as shown in this diagram or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL Configure both In1 Input 1 Parameter 56 and In2 Input 2 Parameter 57 to Disable 58 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Figure 40 For Shunt Trip Applications DC
247. eed i Closed Open SMB Stop Option i Closed i i i a Open Auxillary Contacts Brake Normal i i Closed i 1 i i Open i Up to Speed i i i Closed If the Coast to Rest Open is Selected Coast if Slow Brake Cur Parameter 0 Brake if Slow Brake Cur Parameter gt 0 and lt 350 When the Stop Mode Parameter 65 is configured for SMB and the Input push button is configured for Stop Option 100 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Operating Modes Chapter 3 Figure 74 External Braking Motor Speed 100 Start l l l l l Closed Open l l Stop Closed I Open L Ext Brake Stop Option tone Closed _ Open External Brake Aux Normal Closed Open Coast Pp 7 7 Aux External l l Brake l Closed User Defined Time Open When the Stop Mode Parameter 65 is configured for Ext Brake Eternal Brake and the input push button is configured for STOP option Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 101 Chapter3 Operating Modes 102 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Overview Chapter 4 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions The SMC 50 provides both diagnostic and protection functions These functions are in the form of user configured parameters which provide motor and starter Alarms and Faults Each config
248. eed The red stop button will provide a coast stop and or Slow Speed with reset a fault Braking Displays the Control Screen with the Jog button The jog button will initiate a brake stop from slow speed Slow Speed cannot be operated via the HIM o Accu Stop is not included as a parameter function as the SMC Flex was However Accu Stop is accomplished with the Stop option and the Slow Speed with Braking NOTE For additional details on using the 20 HIM A6 see the 20 HIM A6 User Manual publication 20HIM UM001 ATTENTION The Bulletin 20 HIM A6 LCD module s stop push button is not intended to be used as an emergency stop See applicable standards for emergency stop requirements 202 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Optional HIM Operation Chapter 7 HIM Control Screen The HIM Control Screen is typically used to directly control a drive Press the controls key to display the Control Screen IMPORTANT To navigate from the Control Screen to another HIM menu screen the ESC soft key must be pressed This deactivates the Control Screen and displays the previous screen Figure 93 HIM Control Screen Control Screen Navigation Control Screen s Key Function Number Keys amp Stopped AUTO uy 0 Amps FO AL REMOVE REF EDIT TE koz y NOTE The Control Screen s Key Function map coorespond with the Control
249. endix B SMC 50 Information Parameter Information Table 130 Parameter 1 18 Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access 1 PP Ave Displays the calculated average voltage of the applied three phase to phase line voltages being measured by the SMC 50 2 AB Displays the Phase A to Phase B voltage applied to the SMC at the Volts Volt 0 700 NA supply terminals R 3 Phase BC 0 Displays the Phase B to Phase C voltage applied to the SMC at the supply terminals 4 C A Displays the Phase C to Phase A voltage applied to the SMC at the supply terminals 5 Ave Displays the average of the three phase currents flowing through the SMC Power section to the load 6 A Displays the Current flowing through the Phase A power pole of the Current Amps 0 15000 NA SMC Power section to the load i 7 Phase B 0 Displays the Current flowing through the Phase B power pole of the SMC Power section to the load 8 c Displays the Current flowing through the Phase C power pole of the SMC Power section to the load 5 0 30 0 Displays the true electromechanical torque calculated based on current 9 Torque 0 0 j A and voltage feedback In order for this reading to display correctly the R f value for Rated Torque parameter must be set 0 Real Power MW
250. ensions 05 3 0 2 i Optional Cat No 150 SM6 Parameter Configuration Module PCM The Cat No 150 SM6 PCM provides simple and limited configuration of the SMC 50 This PCM can be inserted into any control module option port 7 8 or 9 This module contains five rotary dials and three banks of two position eight switch DIP switches Parameters that are configured by the PCM will appear as read write parameters to other configuration devices whose values represent the switch settings The parameter values set by the PCM are stored in the control module memory If any of these parameters are changed by an external device the value will revert to the PCM setting Parameters that are not defined and therefore are not configurable by the PCM can be configured through other means e g Human Interface Module HIM DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive software if necessary Only one 1 150 SM6 Option Module can be installed in the control module Any of the three control module expansion ports can be used A fault will be generated if an attempt is made to install more than one 150 SM6 into the control module A single PCM can be used to configure multiple SMC 50 controllers After s
251. ent Parameter i 229 available in the Utility File Group see Figure 91 on page 176 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 151 Chapter 5 Programming Parameter Configuration 152 EEPROM The SMC 50 provides a non volatile area for storing user modified parameter values in the EEPROM Using the START UP Configuration Tool 20 HIM AG6 or 20 HIM C6S The general START UP configuration tool provides the ability to rapidly configure an SMC 50 Enabled by the SMC 50 and the 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C65 a series of questions required to configure starting e g Soft Linear Pump etc and stopping e g Coast Pump etc modes are displayed on the HIM via this tool Not all parameters are configured with this tool Non configured START UP parameters can be configured using the parameter number or File Group search method See the Basic Configuration using the HIM on page 182 Accessing the General START UP Tool 1 Select the FOLDERS single function key located on the lower left portion of the keypad 2 Use the left or right arrow key until the START UP folders screen is displayed amp Stopped AUTO wy 0 Amps EO STARTUP L gt Begin Start Up 3 Press the ENTER 5 key to begin the configuration process The HIM will display Run General Start up Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Chapter 5 4 Press the Yes soft key to beg
252. er Aux 1 Config Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact 1 wired across control terminal 4 and 5 NOTE Relay Operational Options e g ON and OFF delay etc are provided in the File Setup Group 1 0 selection sequence See Figure 85 on page 159 Normal UTS Fault Alarm Ext Bypass Ext Brake Aux 2 Config Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact 2 wired across control terminal 6 and 7 Aux Control Network 1 Network NOTE Relay Operational Options e g ON and OFF delay etc are provided in the A 3 File Setup Group I O selection sequence See Figure 85 on page 159 Overload Class Required for motor protection Allows the user to select the time to trip for the built in Motor Overload This selection is based on the type of 5 30 10 motor being used and the application it is being applied to Service Factor Required for motor protection This value is taken directly from the nameplate and used by the controller to determine the ultimate Overload Trip Current 0 01 1 99 1 15 Motor FLC Required for motor protection This programmed value is taken directly from the motor nameplate 1 0 2200 0 1 0 Amps Starting Torque NOT used for a Soft Start 0 300 100 RMT Max Torque NOT used for a Soft Start 0 300 250 RMT Rated Torque NOT used for a Soft Start 0 10000 10 Nem Rated Speed NOT us
253. er Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Using DeviceLogix Appendix F Bit and Analog 1 0 Points Blalel a The DeviceLogix controller in Port 14 uses 32 bit inputs 18 bit outputs 24 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs Bit Inputs D Available bit inputs to the DeviceLogix program include Bit Inputs Name Description Input 1 Input 2 State of the 2 inputs on the control module Status indicating that the expansion card installed into 17 Hardware Boolean Inputs P7 u aaa Pg the corresponding expansion port is functioning and Ready _ py Status of the Boolean inputs from the expansion cards PX input 1 PX input 4 See the Expansion Card Mapping table below Running Phase Rotation Phase Detection Starting ee These Boolean inputs correspond to the statuses listed Fault in Table 102 Logic Status on page 210 15 Network Boolean Inputs At Speed Start Bypass Ready Network Bit 1 aden a 2 These Boolean inputs correspond to the statuses listed Network Bit 3 in Table 103 Logic Command Word Control on 211 Network Bit 4 page The function of the expansion port inputs depends on the card installed in the given port The following table shows how the bit inputs are mapped for each card type Bit Input Digital 1 0 Analog 1 0 PTC Grd Fault Parameter Config 150 SM4 150 SM3 150 SM2 150 SM6 PX Input 1 Input 1 DAC 1 Open Sta
254. er Group Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Introduction For safety of maintenance personnel as well as others who might be exposed to electrical hazards associated with maintenance activities follow the local safety related work practices e g NFPA 70E Part II in the United States Maintenance personnel must be trained in the safety practices procedures and requirements that pertain to their respective job assignments SHOCK HAZARD Hazardous voltage is present in the motor circuit even when the SMC 50 is off To avoid shock hazard disconnect main power before working on the controller motor and control devices e g Start Stop push buttons Procedures that require parts of the equipment to be energized during troubleshooting testing etc must be performed by properly qualified personnel using appropriate local safety work practices and precautionary measures insulation resistance IR of the motor windings Voltages used for insulation resistance testing can cause SCR failure Do not make any measurements on the controller with an IR tester megger ATTENTION Disconnect the controller from the motor before measuring The following flowchart is provided to aid in quick troubleshooting NOTE The time it takes for the motor to come up to speed may be more or less than the time programmed This depends upon the motor and load characteristics NOTE Depending upon
255. ermination of the phase au Phase Shift B 0 00 Deg A shift between external CT and the internal current measuring circuitry R X 18 Phase Shift C X 19 Parameter Mgmt s NA Ready Waiting for command to set defaults R W Factory Default Set all writable parameters to factory default values X indicates the Control Module port number in which the 150 SM2 PTC Ground Fault and External CT Option Module is installed Allowable ports 7 or 8 150 SM3 Analog 1 0 Module Information Table 157 Parameter X 1 X 56 Number Min Max F os Read Write Name Units Enum Text Description oO Default P Access Displays information about the operational status of the 150 SM3 Analog 1 0 Option Module Bit 0 Ready Ready Bit Set indicates the module is ready for operation Bit 1 Input 1 Over Fault n1 Over Fit Bit Set Input 1 Overrange fault Bit 2 Input 1 Over Alarm n1 Over Alm Bit Set Input 1 Overrange alarm Bit 3 Input 1 Under Fault n1 Undr Flt Bit Set Input 1 Underrange fault Bit 4 Input 1 Under Alarm n1 Undr Alm Bit Set Input 1 Underrange Alarm Bit 5 Input 2 Over Fault n2 Over Flt Bit Set Input 2 Overrange fault X 1 Module Status 0 4096 0 NA Bit 6 Input 2 Over Alarm R n2 Over Alm Bit Set Input 2 Overrange alarm Bit 7 Input 2 Under Fault n2 Undr Fit Bit Set Input 2 Under
256. ers Param Access Level V 3 Using the DOWN arrow key scroll to the File Group selection then press ENTER 5 keypad The screen will display Port 00 Param File Group at the top of the screen Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 157 Chapter 5 Programming 4 Using the DOWN arrow key scroll to the Set Up selection then press ENTER The screen will display the Set Up categories e g Basic Starting etc AUTO Fi Param File Group Monitorin Motor Protection Communications Utility 5 With Basic highlighted press ENTER number 5 on the keypad 6 Scroll to the desired parameter e g Line Voltage to modify it then press ENTER number 5 on the keypad 7 With the parameter displayed press the EDIT soft key 8 Enter the desired value then press the ENTER soft key to save the value 9 Press the ESC key to return to the Basic category 10 To modify another parameter in the Basic category follow step 5 though 7 above To back out to a higher level category press the BACK arrow key Using the DEV PARAM folder screen and the File Group selection SMC 50 parameters NOTE can be selected and configured by functional category See the SMC 50 Category File Structure parameters Figure 87 through Figure 91 beginning on page 174 158 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Chapter 5 Parameter Configuration Using the Setup Fi
257. eter an In1 Over alarm will be signaled The In1 Over bit must be R W set in the Alarm Enable Parameter The time period that Input 1 must exceed the In1 Over F Lvl to signal a X43 Int Over A Dly 0 1 99 0 3 0 SEE NA fault The In1 Over bit must be set in the Fault Enable Parameter RW 3000 0 3000 0 If Input 1 remains below this level for the time period set in the In1 X 44 Ini Under F Lvl 50 0 NA NA Under F Dly parameter an In1 Under fault will be signaled The In1 R W 5 Under bit must be set in the Fault Enable Parameter The time period that Input 1 must remain below the In1 Under F Lvl to X 45 In1 Under F Dly 0 1 99 0 3 0 sec NA signal a fault The In1 Under bit must be set in the Fault Enable R W Parameter 284 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Parameter Information Appendix B Min Max nets Read Write Number Name f Units Enum Text Description bad Default Access 3000 0 3000 0 If Input 1 remains below this level for the time period set in the In1 X 46 In1 Under A Lvl 0 0 i NA A Under A Dly parameter an In1 Under alarm will be signaled The In1 R W Under bit must be set in the Alarm Enable Parameter The time period that Input 1 must remain below the In1 Under F Lvl to X 47 n1 Under A Dly 0 1 99 0 3 0 sec A signal a fault
258. eter see Resetting Metering Parameters on page 192 Elapsed Time 2 is similar to Elapsed Time Elapsed Time 2 differs in that it cannot be reset by the user and will count up to 50 000 hours and then hold that value it will not roll over Table 85 Metering Parameters Associated with Elapsed Time Name Description Min Max Default Access Units Parameter Number 12 Elapsed Time 0 0 50000 0 H 3 Elapsed Time 2 0 0 SaR Running Time The Running Time meter parameter logs the amount of time the motor has been operating The timer resets to zero and begins counting as each start command is received NOTE When the SMC 50 is stopped the parameter displays the length of time the motor was previously operating Table 86 Metering Parameters Associated with Running Time Parameter Number Name Description Min Max Default Access Units 14 0 0 5000 0 IR Hours Motor Speed The Motor Speed meter parameter is only valid when using the Linear Speed Starting or Linear Speed Stopping modes It provides the estimated motor speed during either the starting or stopping maneuver When the SMC 50 is not in these modes the Motor Speed meter parameter reads zero except when the unit is at speed In this case the parameter displays 100 Table 87 Metering Parameters Associated with Motor Speed Parameter Number Name Description Min Max Default Access Units 34 Motor Speed 0 100 R Rockwell Autom
259. etup of the initial SMC 50 is complete remove all power and move the PCM to the next SMC 50 that needs to be programmed Upon powerup of the initial SMC S50 the parameters set by the PCM are retained Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 47 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Real Time Clock RTC The SMC 50 Control Module comes standard with a RTC used to time and date stamp Faults and Alarms When the control power is not applied to the SMC 50 Battery Replacement the operation of the RTC is maintained by an off the shelf Lithium CR2032 coin cell battery The battery must be replaced if the SMC 50 s low battery alarm is activated To replace the battery 1 Perform the steps in Figure 97 on page 291 to remove the control module 2 Locate the battery on the circuit board Note the positive symbol is facing upward Bottom Side of SMC 50 Remove and replace battery with postive symbol facing upward 3 Remove the existing battery disposing of it according to local environmental codes 4 With the positive symbol of the new battery facing upward properly seat the battery into place 5 Perform the steps in Figure 98 on page 292 to replace the control module 6 Reprogram reset the clock 48 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Standard Controller Wiring Figure 30 through Figure 42 show typical wiring diagrams for the SMC 50
260. evel that is applied for the ramp time selected R W 0 0 2 0 54 Kickstart Time SEC 0 0 NA A boost of current is applied to the motor for this programmed time R W 0 90 Gives the user the ability to adjust the amount of current boost applied to the motor 55 Kickstart Level LRT 0 NA during the kickstart period R W Allows the user to select the operation of Terminal 11 Input 1 on the control module Disable Disable the input ignores any assertion to Input 1 Terminal 11 Start Initiates a start as set up by the start parameters at Input 1 Terminal 11 High Coast Initiates a coast stop no current to motor at Input 1 Terminal 11 Low Stop Option Initiates a stop maneuver as set up by the stopping parameters at Input 1 Low ifInput1 0 Stops motor Start Coast 1 Initiates a start as set up by the start parameters Start Sto if Input 1 0 Initiates a stop maneuver as set up by stopping parameters P 1 Initiates a start as set up by the start parameters 56 Input 1 a Slow Speed Runs motor in slow speed mode as set up by slow speed parameters High R W if Input 1 0 Use starting mode 1 Dual Ramp 1 Use starting mode 2 if Input 1 0 Use Motor Overload Class 1 OL Select 1 Use Motor Overload Class 2 Faul A fault condition forced if Input 1 1 Fault NC A fault condition forced if Input 1 0 Clear Fault Clear a fault from input 1 Terminal 11 High Emerg Run Allow motor to run in emergency run mode if asserted f
261. f the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage the installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL Configure In2DC Input 2 Parameter 57 to Disable 62 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 00 Figure 44 For SMC Start Run On Bypass DC Inputs See External Bypass Control Mode on page 91 for additional configurations 825 MCM LJ or AC Power Supply Qo Bypass Contactor BC O 1 Q c A 2 12 1 f tfo9f s 7 6 s5 4 3 2 1 gt o Q9 o HH T L2 4Li amp 8 Are Aux 7 3 oO G Q I g Control Module Standard I O pe 150 SM2 Option Module RG25U o TB2 TB3 Female TB4 TB2 TB3 RG25U TB4 Male Customer supplied See the controller nameplate to verify the contr
262. fault with tuning enabled on the next start Amber Ready Ready with alarm no tuning enabled Red Amber Inhibit Inhibited cannot start due to a Stop command Red Faulted A non resettable fault has occurred Red Flashing Faulted A resettable fault has occurred Red Green Download Firmware is being downloaded The HOLD TO TEST PUSH TO RESET button provides the ability to reset an alarm fault test for a fault condition and initiate the tuning mode Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 215 Chapter9 Diagnostics Table 106 Function Initiation of the HOLD TO TEST PUSH TO RESET Button Function Time Required to Press Button Fault Reset Momentary less than 2 seconds Test Fault Greater than 3 seconds but less than 10 seconds Initiate Tuning Mode Greater than 10 seconds The motor must be stopped Using the Controller Status LED amp Parameter Configuration Module 150 SM6 LEDs When a 150 SM6 is installed in one of the three control module ports 7 8 or 9 of the SMC 50 additional LED diagnostic information is provided beyond that of the Status LED The 150 SM6 has four diagnostic status LEDs to display an LED code for each fault alarm When the SMC 50 s Status LED indicates the control module has faulted the 150 SM6 displays a specific fault code If the unit is not faulted but in an alarm condition the 150 SM6 displays the alarm code If the unit is neither faulted or in an
263. ft 20 A Service Factor Ramp Time 2 Phase Shift 30 A Motor FLC Cur Limit Level 2 Phase Shift 40 A Starting Torque Initial Torque 2 Phase Shift 50 A Max Torque Starting Torque 2 Phase Shift 60 A Rated Torque Max Torque 2 Phase Shift 70 A Rated Speed Kickstart Time 2 Phase Shift 80 A Kickstart Level 2 Phase Shift 90 A Phase Shift 100 A NOTE For a complete parameter set listing within each parameter File Group see Figure 87 through Figure 91 beginning on page 174 The Basic parameter set in the Setup group is limited yet powerful It allows for quick system startup with minimal adjustments and provides quick access to parameters required for standard motor connection and overload protection If advanced controller features g Dual Ramp Braking etc will be used however the parameter set associated with those features must also be utilized The Setup group will be used throughout this section as a baseline for system configuration IMPORTANT Parameter values that are modified while the motor is operating are not valid until the next time the operation for that parameter occurs ATTENTION For Overload Protection it is critical that the data be entered into the SMC 50 as it appears on the motor nameplate The following figure shows the initial FILE Setup screens using the HIM Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 159 Chapter 5 160 Programming Figure
264. ge e Failed control module Starting e One or more power phases are Check power system missing e Isolation contactor if used is not picking up e Check that the SMC 50 Aux relay output controlling the Isolation Contactor is configured to Normal e Check the Isolation Contactor for proper operation Table 113 Motor Rotates but Does Not Accelerate to Full Speed Display Possible Cause Possible Solutions Fault displayed e See fault description e See Table 111 addressing fault conditions Starting e Mechanical problems e Check for binding or external loading Inadequate Current Limit setting e Failed control module and correct e Check motor e Adjust the Current Limit Level to a higher setting e Replace contro module Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Troubleshooting Chapter 10 Table 114 Motor Stops While Running Display Possible Cause Possible Solutions Fault displayed See fault description e See addressing fault conditions HIM display is blank Failed HIM Control voltage is absent Failed control module HIM connection is loose e Replace HIM e Check control wiring and correct if necessary e Replace contro module e Check HIM connection Stopped 0 0 Amps Pilot devices Failed control module e Check control wiring and correct if necessary e Replace contro module Starting One or more power phases
265. gnalled The Cur Imbal bit must R W be set in the Motor Fault En parameter to signal a fault 0 1 99 0 The time period that the current imbalance exceeds the Cur Imbal F Lvl to signal a 111 Cur Imbal F Dly Secs 3 0 i A fault The Cur Imbal bit in the Motor Fault En parameter must be set to signal a R W fault 25 If the line to line current imbalance condition exceeds the Cur Imbal A Lvl for the 112 Cur Imbal A Lvl 15 A time period set in Cur Imbal A Dly an alarm will be signalled The Cur Imbal bit R W must be set in the Motor Alarm En parameter to signal a Alarm 0 1 99 0 The time period that the current imbalance exceeds the Cur Imbal A Lvl to signal 113 Cur Imbal A Dly Secs P A an alarm The Cur Imbal bit in the Motor Alarm En parameter must be set to R W 3 0 signal an alarm Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 259 Appendix B Parameter Information Table 137 Parameter 114 134 Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access 0 1000 If the peak phase current exceeds the Jam F Lvl for the time period set in Jam F 4 Jam F Lvl FLC 1000 A Dly a fault will be signaled The Jam bit must be set in the Motor Fault En R W parameter to signal a fault 0 1 99 0
266. han the MVAR Un F Level for a 237 MVAR Un FDly Secs jg A ime period greater than that defined by MVAR Un F Dly a MVAR Un Fault RAW will be signaled Allows the user to enter a value for the Consumed Reactive Power Under 0 000 1000 000 Alarm Level MVAR Un A Lvl If the current actual value of Consumed 238 MVAR Un A Lvl MVAR gt NA Reactive Power MVAR is less than the MVAR Un A Level for a time period R W 0 000 greater than that defined by MVAR Un A Dly a MVAR Un Alarm will be signaled Allows the user to enter a time value for the MVAR Under Alarm Delay 0 1 99 0 MVAR Un A Dly If the current actual value of Consumed Reactive Power 239 MVAR Un A Dly Secs 0 1 NA 4MVAR is less than the MVAR Un A Level for a time period greater than RAW that defined by MVAR Un A Dly a MVAR Un Alarm will be signaled Allows the user to enter a value for the MVA Over Fault Level MVA Ov F Lvl 0 000 1000 000 If the current actual value of Apparent Power MVA is greater than the MVA 240 MVA Ov F Lvi MVA 0 000 NA Ov F Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by MVA Ov F Dly a MVA R W Ov Fault will be signaled implement an Alarm or Fault the appropriate bit in the Motor Fault En Parameter 230 or Motor Alarm En Parameter 231 must also be set 268 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Parameter Information Appendix B Table 146 Parameter
267. he HIM bezel port located on the upper right of the control module Inserting the HIM into the bezel provides operation ina NEMA Type 1 environment The 20 HIM C6S a remote door mount version of the 20 HIM A6 provides operation ina NEMA 4X 12 environment and includes a 1202 C30 interface cable to the SMC 50 DPI Port 2 on the top of the controller For additional information on mounting the 20 HIM A6 or the 20 HIM C65S see the HIM User Manual publication 20HIM UMO0O01 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 145 Chapter 5 146 Programming Figure 81 HIM Mounting Locations SMC 50 Front View HIM Bezel Port DPI Port 2 Port 2 amp 3 with Splitter The following information describes some of the basic screens and keypad functions of the 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S Additional details concerning all HIM functions can be found in the User Manual publication 20HIM UMO001 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Chapter 5 HIM Single Function Keys The four single function keys only perform their dedicated functions no matter which screen or data entry mode is being used Table 71 HIM Single Function Keys Start Folders Controls Stop Key Function Starts the controller if the SMC 50 Logic Mask is enabled for the port the HIM is Start connected to Accesses folders for parameters diagnostics memory functions preferences and Folders other tests
268. he energy stored in the magnetic field is released when the contacts open the circuit Examples of these are lightly loaded motors transformers solenoids full voltage starters and electromechanical brakes Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Motor Overload Protection Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 2 Fast rising Wavefronts If the SMC 50 is installed on a system that has fast rising wavefronts present although not necessarily high peak voltages protective modules may be needed Additionally if the SMC 50 is on the same bus as other SCR devices e g AC DC drives induction heating equipment or welding equipment the firing of the SCRs in those devices can cause noise sure that the controller has been disconnected from the power source The protective module should be inspected periodically for damage or discoloration Replace if necessary ATTENTION When installing or inspecting the protective module make Thermal motor overload protection is provided as standard with the SMC S0 If the overload trip class is less than the acceleration time of the motor nuisance tripping may occur ATTENTION Overload protection should be properly coordinated with the motor Two applications require special consideration two speed motors and multi motor protection Two Speed Motors The SMC 50 has overload protection available for single speed motors When the SMC 50 is applied to a two speed moto
269. he line side ABorC y 53 or Start or Stop e High impedance line or load or motor side of the power wires B OF 54 connection e Verify and correct the input power quality issue e Disable this fault alarm feature e The current mix of loads on the e Check the mix of loads what was added what was Power Qualit power line contributing to the THD V changed modify the load mix if necessary THD V y 55 Running has exceeded the programmed THD Change the programmed THD V level amp or delay V level amp or time time e Disable this fault alarm feature e The current mix of loads on the e Check the mix of loads what was added what was Power Qualit power line contributing to the THD changed modify the load mix if necessary THD y 56 Running has exceeded the programmed THD Change the programmed THD level amp or delay level amp or time time e Disable this fault alarm feature Config Change 57 In All Modes e A controller parameter has been e Disable this fault alarm feature modified e The ground fault current level has e Check the power system and motor correct if exceeded the programmed value necessary e The delay time is too short for the e Check the programmed ground fault levels to match Ground Fault x058 Running application application requirements modify if necessary NOTE An optional 150 SM2 Ground Fault PTC Module is required for this fault Extend the delay time to match the application requireme
270. i for a time period greater than that defined by Lag PF PAW Un F Dly a Lag PF Un Fault will be signaled Allows the user to enter a time value for the Lagging Power Factor Under 7 0 1 99 0 Fault Delay Lag PF Un F Dly If the current actual Power Factor value lags 261 Lag PF Un F Dly Secs 0 1 A less than the Lag PF Un F Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by P W Lag PF Un F Dly a Lag PF Un Fault will be signaled Allows the user to enter a value for the Lagging Power Factor Under Alarm 262 F Un A Lvl 1 00 0 00 A Level Lag PF Un A Lvl If the current actual Power Factor value lags less R Eager ALY 0 00 han the Lag PF Un A Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by Lag R W PF Un A Dly a Lag PF Un Alarm will be signaled Allows the user to enter a time value for the Lagging Power Factor Under z 0 1 99 0 Alarm Delay Lag PF Un A Dly If the current actual Power Factor value lags 263 Lag PF Un A Dly Secs 0 1 A less than the Lag PF Un A Lvl for a period greater than that defined by Lag PF P W Un A Dly a Lag PF Un alarm will be signalled i implement an Alarm or Fault the appropriate bit in the Motor Fault En Parameter 230 or Motor Alarm En Parameter 231 must also be set 270 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014
271. ich stopping A mode is best suited to the application and will meet applicable standards for operator safety on a particular machine ATTENTION Stopping modes are NOT intended to be used as an A emergency stop See applicable standards for emergency stop requirements Setting this to high may cause the unit to enter energy savings to soon ATTENTION The Energy Savings setting is motor and load dependent A and increase current Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Operating Modes Chapter 3 Figure 68 Soft Stop Motor Speed 100 Coast to Rest Soft Stop Start gt e Run gt e Soft Stop Time in Seconds Push Buttons Start Closed Open St oe Closed l Open 2 l Soft Stop Stop Option Closed Open Auxillary Contacts If Soft Stop is Selected Normal Closed i Open l a EPE EEE a EE EEE Up to Speed i If Coast to Rest is Selected Closed Open When the Stop Mode Parameter 65 configured for Soft Stop and with the Input push button configured for the Stop Option Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 95 Chapter3 Operating Modes Motor Speed 100 Push Buttons Soft Stop Stop Option Closed Open Start Closed Open Stop Closed Open Slow Speed Closed Open Auxillary Contacts Normal Closed Open Up to Speed Closed Open 96 Figure 69 Preset Slow Speed Coast to Rest Soft Stop 1
272. ignal a alarm The THD V bit in the Starter Alarm parameter must be setto R W signal an alarm 0 1000 f the average THD on the phase current exceeds the THD F Lvl for the period set 22 THD IF Lvl 1000 A in THD F Dly a fault will be signalled The THD bit must be set in the Motor R W Fault En parameter to signal a fault 0 1 99 0 The time period that the average THD on the phase current exceeds the THD F 123 THD F Dly Secs a A Lvl to signal a fault The THD I bit in the Motor Fault En parameter must be setto R W 0 1 signal a fault 0 1000 f the average THD on the phase current exceeds the THD I A Lvl for the time 124 THD IA Lvl 1000 A period set in THD A Dly an alarm will be signaled The THD bit must be set in R W he Motor Alarm En parameter to signal an alarm 0 1 99 0 The time period that the average THD on the phase current exceeds the THD I A 125 THD A Dly Secs 0 1 f A Lvl to signal an alarm The THD bit in the Motor Alarm En parameter must be set R W i to signal an alarm This is a counter the user can set to generate an alarm or fault to signal a need 26 PM Hours Hrs 1 100 1000 NA for preventive maintenance The Hours to PM parameter is initialized to this R W value and counts down when the motor is running This is a counter the user can set to generate an alarm or fault to signal a need 27 PM Starts 1 50000 100 NA for preventive maintenance The Starts to PM parameter is initialized to this R W val
273. ill be generated The SMC 50 port number 7 8 or 9 of the expansion module generating the Fault is also displayed e g an expansion module located in port 7 would display the Fault Code 7027 This fault cannot be disabled Battery Low RIC Battery Low Fault Code 69 An RTC Battery Low Fault Code 69 provides indication of a control module battery low condition This condition is checked upon power up of the control module The battery maintains the operation of the control module s RTC when the control power is removed Once the Alarm is posted the battery should be replaced as soon as possible This alarm cannot be disabled To clear this alarm the battery must be replaced and the time date set with a HIM or applicable PC software e g DriveExplorer Configuration Change Fault amp Alarm Configuration Change Fault Code 57 By setting the Configuration Change bit in the Starter Fault Enable Parameter 136 any change to the controller configuration will result in a Configuration Change Fault Fault Code 57 An Alarm can also be initiated by setting the 134 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Buffers amp Storage Functions Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Chapter 4 Config Change bit in the Starter Alarm Enable Parameter 137 The Fault can be cleared immediately and the Alarm will clear upon the next motor start command 1 0 Configuration Fault 1 0 Configuration Fault
274. ime the SMC is started This parameter cannot be reset by the R customer and leaves the factory with a value of 0 24 1 Displays the measured start time of the previous start 25 2 Displays the measured start time of the 2nd previous start 26 Start Time 3 Secs i om NA Displays the measured start time of the 3rd previous start R 27 4 Displays the measured start time of the 4th previous start 28 5 Displays the measured start time of the 5th previous start 29 1 Displays the measured peak current of the previous start 30 2 Displays the measured peak current of the 2nd previous start 31 eae 3 Amps ai 50000 Na Displays the measured peak current of the 3rd previous start R 32 4 Displays the measured peak current of the 4th previous start 33 5 Displays the measured peak current of the 5th previous start a me e e rere ee ep E a 35 THD Va Measures the THD of the applied Phase A line voltage 36 THD Vb 0 1000 0 NA Measures the THD of the applied Phase B line voltage R 37 THD Ve 0 Measures the THD of the applied Phase C line voltage 38 THD Vave Displays the calculated average of the three voltage THD measurements 39 THD la Measures the THD of the applied Phase A current 40 THD Ib 0 1000 0 NA Measures the THD of the applied Phase B current R 41 THD Ic 0 Measures the THD of the applied Phase C current 42 THD lave Displays the calculated average of the three current THD measurements THD A Power Quality measurement that provides
275. imer has expired the motor will not start This is used to prevent starting a motor that is still cycling 0 999 seconds 1 Programming a non zero value for Stop Time will override the SMB zero speed detection feature function and use the exact time programmed for Stop Time to apply the programmed Braking Current to the motor Doing this is useful in applications where detecting zero speed is difficult e g a specific motor type or when the purpose is to reduce the number of overload trips associated with driving the motor to a complete stop Setting the Stop Time to a specific value will turn off braking current at a set time and each time a stopping maneuver is performed To achieve an ideal Stop Time setting use trial and error and always allow for some small coast time NOTE Setting the Stop Time to a longer duration will cause braking current to be applied to a stopped motor and likely result in overload trips Slow Speed with Braking The SMC 50 Slow Speed feature provides a slow speed jog capability for general purpose positioning which is typically used for system setup Slow Speed can drive the motor within a range of 1 to 15 of normal speed in the forward or reverse direction without a reversing contactor Braking from Slow Speed is also provided To use the Slow Speed with Braking feature use the HIM Navigate from the Port 00 DEV PARAM folder File Group File Setup Group Slow Speed See Figu
276. in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage the installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL Configure Aux1 to NORMAL using Parameter 172 NORMAL Aux1 contact will close to energize the IC coil with the START push button and open to de energize when the stop maneuver initiated by the STOP push button is complete The order of the terminal numbers for the option I O module can be reversed depending on which expansion port it is located in on the control module However the function associated with the terminal number remains the same Configure both In1 Input 1 Parameter 56 and In2 Input 2 Parameter 57 to Disable Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 67 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Figure 49 For Isolation Contactor amp Slow Speed with Braking Application AC
277. in the process or Abort soft key to return to the START UP folders screen SMC 50 Run General Start Up wot JCJ C Oss The HIM will display a series of questions pertaining to the Motor Start and Stop processes Depending on the answers to the Start and Stop processes some screens may not be displayed EXAMPLE If Soft Start Linear Speed or Pump Start is selected NOTE Then Starting Torque Max Torque Rated Torque and Rated Speed will not be displayed Reason These parameters are specific to the Torque Start parameter group See Figure 84 on page 155 which shows the flow of the General Start up and the parameters used with the Starting and Stopping modes Entering Data into General Startup 1 Display the parameter If the HIM provides the allowable range e g 1 0 lt lt 2200 0 at the bottom of the screen enter the data value Ifan up or down arrow soft key is displayed use the soft key to display the desired selection If this screen appears use the 4 or w soft If this screen appears enter the data value keys to display the desired selection SMC 50 SMC 50 General Start Up General Start Up Edit Ramp Time Edit Stop Mode Secs Soft Stop 1 0 0 lt lt 1000 0 MOC Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 153 Chapter 5 Programming 2 Enter the desired value then press the ENTER soft key TIP If an incorrect value was entered Pres
278. inal Table 161 Replacement Terminal Block s Cat Nos Blocks for Control Wiring Where Used Control Module 150 SM2 150 SM3 150 SM4 Description Cat No 150 SCMRTB 150 SM2RTB 150 SM3RTB 150 SM4RTB Control Module Control 1 0 replacement removable terminal block PTC Module replacement removable terminal block set of 3 Analog 0 Option replacement removable terminal block Digital I O Option replacement removable terminal block Fan Table 162 Replacement Fan Cat Nos Description Rating Control Power Cat No Replacement Fan for Cat No 150 SB 90 180A 100 240 150 SF1 Controller i 24V D 150 SF1R Replacement Fan for Cat No 150 SC 100 240 150 SF2D 210 320 A Controller 24V D 150 SF2R Replacement Fan for Cat No 100 240 150 SF3D 150 SD Controller lene 24V D 150 SF3R Covers Table 163 Replacement Cover Cat Nos Description Rating Cat No Replacement Fan Cover for Cat No 150 SB Controller 90 180 A 150 SBFC Replacement Fan Cover for Cat No 150 SC Controller 210 320 A 150 SCFC Replacement Fan Cover for Cat No 150 SD Controller 361 520 A 150 SDFC Replacement Control Module Front Cover 90 520 A 150 SCMRC Replacement Controller Cover 210 320 A 150 SCRC Replacement Controller Cover 361 520 A 150 SDRC 288 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Spare Replacement Parts Appendix C Ba
279. ing a fault will not correct the cause of the fault condition Corrective action must be taken before resetting the fault The fault display will remain active as long as control power is applied If control power is cycled the fault will be cleared the controller will re initialize and the display will show a status of Stopped unless the Fault condition still exists You can press Esc to get to another programming diagnostic list but the SMC 50 will still be in a faulted state Clear Fault A fault can be cleared using any of the following methods e Program the SMC 50 to automatically clear a fault using Restart Enable Parameter 135 or 264 e Press the SMC 50 HOLD TO TEST PUSH TO RESET button e Connect a N O push button to Option Input 1 terminal 11 or 2 terminal 10 Option Input 1 or 2 must be programmed for Clear Fault using Parameter 56 or 57 NOTE This can also be done with an Input from a 150 SM4 Option 1 0 Module e Cycle the control power to the SMC 50 IMPORTANT An overload fault cannot be reset until the value of the Motor Thermal Usage Parameter 18 is below the value programmed in OL Reset Parameter 80 See Enabling Option Module Functional Faults amp Alarm on page 107 for further details 218 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Fault amp Alarm Buffer Parameter List Diagnostics Chapter 9 The SMC 50 stores the five most recent Fault and Alarm codes Fault Parameter Li
280. ins Table 90 Metering Parameters Associated with Total Starts Parameter Number Name Description Min Max Default Access Units 2 ome Rh WA Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 197 Chapter 6 198 Metering Total Harmonic Distortion THD The SMC 50 provides the IEEE calculated THD value for the three Line Voltages Line to Neutral and the three Motor Phase Currents current through SMC 50 Power Pole In addition the average THD is calculated for both Line Voltage and Phase Current The controller algorithm uses a round robin approach to gather the six signals by sampling one signal and then calculating the THD value for that signal In other words each power cycle current and voltage THD are calculated for a phase then for the next phase and so on NOTE When the motor is not running the Current Based THD values will read 0 o When in external bypass running mode configuration an external CT 825 MCM and a 150 SM2 Option Module can be used to read current based THD I values Table 91 Metering Parameters Associated with THD Parameter Number Name Description Min Max Default Access Units 35 THD V 36 THD Vp 0 0 1000 0 R 37 THD V 38 THD V ave 39 THD I 40 THD I 0 0 1000 0 R 41 THD 42 THD ave Line Frequency The SMC 50 measures and displays the system 3 phase AC Line Frequency Upon power up the
281. intended to be used as an emergency stop See the applicable standards for emergency stop requirements Figure 62 Linear Deceleration Current Limit 100 Ss ao 2 Linear Linear D Acceleration Deceleration ao o o a Ramp Time 4 Stat _ _ Run gt t Stop Time in Seconds Table 25 Linear Deceleration Mode Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Name Minimum Maximum Default Access Units 65 o T StopMode LinearSe0 Tw e 66 Stop Time 0 0 999 SEC 53 Cur Limit Level 50 600 350 FLC For additional details see Figure 68 on page 95 Smart Motor Braking SMB When Stop Mode Parameter 65 is configured for SMB and the Stop Maneuver is commanded the SMC 50 will apply the configured braking current and brake the motor to a stop This function can be used in applications that require reduced stopping times The SMC 50 incorporates a microprocessor based system that applies braking current to the motor without any additional equipment This option offers a user adjustable braking current setting from 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Operating Modes Chapter 3 to 400 of the motor s full load current rating using Braking Current Parameter 69 Further it provides automatic brake current shut off at zero speed detection ATTENTION Smart Motor Braking is not intended to be used as an emergency stop See app
282. ional Options e g ON and OFF delay etc are provided in the File Setup Group 1 0 selection sequence See Figure 85 on page 159 Normal UTS Fault Alarm Ext Bypass Ext Brake Aux Control Network 1 Network 2 Network 3 Network 4 Overload Class Required for motor protection Allows the user to select the time to trip for the 5 30 10 built in Motor Overload This selection is based on the type of motor being used and the application it is being applied to Service Factor Required for motor protection This programmed value is taken directly from the nameplate and used by the controller to determine the ultimate 0 01 1 99 1 15 Overload Trip Current Motor FLC Required for motor protection This programmed value is taken directly from the motor nameplate 1 0 2200 0 1 0 Amps Starting Torque NOT used for a Current Limit Start 0 300 100 RMT Max Torque NOT used for a Current Limit Start 0 300 250 RMT Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Parameter Chapter 5 Option default Rated Torque NOT used for a Current Limit Start 0 10000 10 N m Rated Speed NOT used for a Current Limit Start 750 900 1500 1800 3500 3600 rpm Kickstart is available when using Current Limit Start A Kickstart Level and Time must be configured if th parameters via the Starting Setup Group The Starting
283. ions diagram for details The order o the terminal n mbers for the option 1 0 module can be reversed depending on which expansion slot the option 1 0 module is located on the control in the control module However the function associated with the terminal number remains the same Configure both In1 Input 1 Parameter 56 and In2 Input 2 Parameter 57 to Disable NOTE In addi uncontroll equipmen ion to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching components allows ed current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or damage the installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 53 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Figure 35 For Start Stop Control via HIM or Communications 3 Phase AC Line Power 120V 240V AC Control Transformer For 24V DC Controllers
284. iop Lod or AC Power Supply e 7 1 stato 1 Option Stop l ele 12 11 10 1918 716 65 4 3 2 1 Ly ik L2 L1 gt O O O 1H I a z z Q Aux Aux1 T Z oos Control Module Control Module Standard I O Power amp Ground Ai A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 AT A8 SEY ell A120 gt 9J 9 F 2 i l E S AuxA1 AuxA2 AuxA3 we AC Inputs Auxilliary Relay Outputs 150 SM4 Option I O Module Customer supplied See the controller nameplate to verify the control power input ratings 100 240V AC Option 1 0 Terminal A2 InA2 100 240V AC input is configured for START input using Parameter 7 3 contact module port 7 Option 1 0 Terminal A3 InA3 100 240V AC input configured for COAST using Parameter 7 4 contact module port 7 NOTE The controller will generate an 0 configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is configured for COAST or STOP Option 1 0 module Terminal A1 InA1 120 240V AC input is configured for STOP OPTION using Parameter 7 2 contact module port 7 Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor See the Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details NOTE In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power
285. isplays the power factor in the Phase A branch of the load circuit 293 Power Factor B i i 00 NA Displays the power factor in the Phase B branch of the load circuit R 294 Power Factor C Displays the power factor in the Phase C branch of the load circuit Displays the percent current imbalance measured in the load circuit max 295 Current Imbal 0 100 0 00 NA deviation of current from the average of three currents average current R of three currents Displays the percent voltage imbalance measured in the load circuit max 296 Voltage Imbal 0 100 0 00 NA deviation of voltage from the average of three voltages average current R of three voltages Enables the user to enter a value for the Generated Reactive Power Over 1000 000 0 000 Fault Level MVAR Ov F Lvl If the current actual value for Generated 297 MVAR Ov F Lvi MVAR 0 000 NA Reactive Power is more than the MVAR Ov F Lvl for a period greater than R W that defined by MVAR Ov F Dly a MVAR Ov fault will be signaled Enables the user to enter a time value for the Generated Reactive Power 0 1 99 0 Over Fault Delay MVAR Ov F Dly If the current actual value for the 298 MVAR Ov F Dly Secs 1 99 NA Generated Reactive Power is more than the MVAR Ov F Lvl for a time R W 0 1 period greater than that defined by MVAR Ov F Dly a MVAR Ov faul will be signaled Enables the user to enter a value for the Generated Reactive Power Over 1000 000 0 000 Alarm Level MVAR Ov A Lvl
286. ist Parameter Number Parameter Name Minimum Maximum Default Access Units 86 Underload F Lvl 0 99 FLC 87 Underload F Dly 0 1 99 0 ay SECS 88 Underload A Lvl 0 99 FLC 89 Underload A Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Line Power Undervoltage Protection Undervoltage Fault Code 20 The SMC 50 has the ability to protect against low line power voltage The Undervoltage Fault Code 20 provides protection from a line power undervoltage condition An undervoltage fault condition exists if the average of the three phase Line Voltage Line Voltage Parameter 46 falls below the user defined voltage level Undervolt F Lvl Parameter 98 for a user defined time Undervolt Fault Delay See Table 38 Undervoltage Fault protection is enabled or disabled via the Undervoltage Enable Disable bit in the Starter Fault Enable Parameter 136 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Chapter 4 Undervoltage Alarm In addition to the Fault an Undervoltage Alarm is also available This is set up exactly like the Fault using the Undervolt A Lvl Parameter 100 and the Undervolt A Dly Parameter 101 The Undervoltage Alarm is enabled or disabled via the Undervoltage Enable Disable bit in the Starter Alarm Enable Parameter 137 Table 38 Undervoltage Protection Parameter List
287. key then press the EDIT soft key The following screen appears amp Stopped wy 0 Amps Jump to Param NOTE To access the next previous PAR from the one currently displayed use the UP DOWN i arrow soft keys to display the desired parameter for modification 3 Press ENTER to load the changed value into memory NOTE For a complete SMC 50 linear list see Table 73 through Table 77 beginning on i page 17 For additional details on these procedures see the 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S User Manual publication 20HIM UM001 156 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Chapter 5 Parameter Search amp Configuration by File Group Structure Parameter Structure The parameters of the SMC 50 are structured into five parameter File Groups Monitoring Setup Motor Protection Communications Woe YY N a Utility The parameters associated with each of these five File Groups are shown in Figure 87 through Figure 91 beginning on page 174 of this chapter Parameter Search amp Configuration by File Group SMC 50 Category Search EXAMPLE 1 From the HIM Power Up screen press the FOLDERS single function key 2 Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key until the screen displays DEV PARAM Ensure Port 00 SMC 50 is selected from the PORTS screen Ry Stopped AUTO 0 Amps FO AB 4J JDEV PARAM gt wy Linear List A 00 File Group Changed Paramet
288. l the High Level sensor and is also used to detect if the High Level sensor is faulty Indicates the well is at a high level and it is time to start Inputs Port 8 Input 3 High Level sensor pumping using the SMC 50 When OFF it is used to indicate that the well is empty as long as the High and Critical High Level sensors are Port 8 Input 4 Low Level sensor also OFF The SMC 50 stops operating end of pumping cycle Sensor Failure pilot Indicates that there is a problem with either the High Port 8 Aux 1 light Level or Low Level sensors Outputs Port 8 Aux 2 Critical Level Pilot light Indicates that the Critical Level Sensor is active No External Wiring Start Start signal to the SMC 50 No External Wiring Stop Stop signal to the SMC 50 Example logic requirements e Start the motor when the High Level Sensor is ON e Stop the motor when all the level sensors are OFF e Annunciate a Sensor Fault condition and Stop the SMC 50 when any of these conditions exist The Low Level sensor is OFF when either the High Level or Critical High Level sensors are ON The High Level sensor is OFF when the Critical High Level sensor is ON e Activate the Critical High Level Pilot when the Critical High Level sensor is active e Reset alarms faults with a Reset push button input Parameter Configuration The following parameters are configured for this example Port Parameter No Parameter Value
289. le Group Overview The following figure shows the parameter sets available within the Basic Setup group Figure 85 Setup File Group Setup 7 Basic BA Starting BA Stopping BA Advanced 1 0 BA Advanced Tuning Motor Config Starting Mode Stop Mode Pump Pedestal A Input 1 Force Tuning A Line Voltage Ramp Time Stop Time Load Type A Input 2 Starter R MBA Starting Mode Cur Limit Level Braking Current High Eff Brake A Aux 1 Config Total R MBA Ramp Time Initial Torque Backspin Timer UTS Level A Aux 1 Invert Coupling Factor MBA Initial Torque Starting Torque Stall Position A Aux 1 On Delay Inductance MBA Max Torque Max Torque Slow Speed Stall Level A Aux 1 Off Delay Speed PGain A Cur Limit Level Kickstart Time Slow Speed BA V Shut Off Level A Aux 2 Config Transient Gain A Stop Mode Kickstart Level Slow a Cur BA Shut Off Level A Aux 2 Invert Transient Zero A Stop Time Heating Time SS Ref Gain A Notch Maximum A Aux 2 Invert Transient Mag A Input 1 Heating Level SS Trans Gain A Timed Start A Aux 2 On Delay Ping Degree A Input 2 Start Delay Bypass Delay A Aux 2 Off Delay Pings A Aux1 Config Dual R BA Energy Saver BA Aux Control Phase Shift 0 A Aux2 Config ual Ramp BA _ Demand Period BA Phase Shift 10 A Overload Class Starting Mode 2 Num of Periods BA Phase Shi
290. level for a user defined time Underload Fault Code 22 Motor current less than a specific level may indicate a mechanical malfunction in the installation e g a torn conveyor belt damaged fan blade broken shaft or worn tool Such conditions may not harm the motor but can lead to loss of Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 111 Chapter 4 112 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions production Rapid Underload Fault detection helps to minimize damage and loss of production Underload Fault current protection Fault Code 22 is enabled or disabled via the motor Underload Enable Disable bit in the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 The value or level of the Fault current is configured using Underload Fault Level Underload F Lvl Parameter 86 A configurable Fault Delay Time using Underload Fault Delay Underload F Dly Parameter 87 is also available to help eliminate nuisance faults Underload Alarm A motor Underload Alarm is also available This is configured exactly as the Underload Fault using Underload Alarm Level Underload A Lvl Parameter 88 and Underload Alarm Delay Underload A Dly Parameter 89 The Alarm can be enabled or disabled using the Underload bit in the Motor Alarm Enabled Parameter 231 The SMC 50 checks for a motor Underload condition approximately every 0 025 seconds NOTE Underload protection is active when the motor is at speed Table 37 Underload Parameter L
291. licable standards for emergency stop requirements Figure 63 SMB Smart Motor Braking Coast to Rest Automatic Zero Speed Shut Off Motor Speed Start 4 Run _ gt Brake _ gt Time in Seconds Table 26 SMB Mode Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Name Minimum Maximum Default Access Units e StopMode Tse T 66 Stop Time 0 0 999 R W SECS 69 Braking Current 0 400 FLC Programming a Stop Time is not required when SMB is used SMB automatically controls the duration Stop Time of the braking current to the motor from the Running at Speed condition until a zero speed condition Zero Speed Braking Shut Off feature function Programming a Stop Time will override the SMB Zero Speed Braking Shutoff feature function This could result in current being applied to a stopped motor which will cause the motor to overheat See Figure 71 on page 98 and Chapter 5 Programming for additional details With Stop Time Parameter 66 set to some time value other than zero the user selected Braking Current Parameter 69 is applied for the user configured Stop Time regardless of the motor speed e g Automatic Zero Speed Detection disabled This braking method can be used in applications where detecting zero speed is ineffective or when braking the motor to a complete stop results in random overload trips Note that an ideal Stop Time setting can be accom
292. llows you to configure the motor s FLC in the SMC 50 by using a percent of the controller s rated FLC e g 90 A 110 A 180 A etc For a 60 A motor and a 90 A controller of controller s max FLC for a 60 A motor 64 of 90 A 57 6 A or Switch Position 6 To determine the S5 switch setting for an inside the delta motor configuration use the following equations Step 1 Step 2 Motor Nameplate FLC X l l 4g 100 1 73 SMC 50 Controller Rating S5 Switch Setting Step 1 Step 2 10A 57 8 A 8A _ x 100 64 1 73 90 A Result From the result of 64 the S5 switch setting is position 6 1 If the calculated value does not match a switch position use the previous lower percent switch setting 2 The inside the delta motor configuration can be selected using Motor Connection Parameter 44 or automatically during a controller tuning process NOTE The tuning process is done during the initial system start after changing any of the tuning parameters and initializing a start or by pressing and holding the SMC 50 reset push button for at least 10 seconds with the motor stopped and then initializing a start If another configuration device is available e g a 20 HIM A6 or PC software such as DriveExplorer changing Force Tuning Parameter 194 to TRUE or resetting the controller to Default will also result in tuning to occur The following tables define the functions for the three banks of ON OFF 8 switch DI
293. load value and the full heavy load value of Parameter 17 Set Parameter 193 0 to disable Energy Saver mode o Enables the controller s tuning algorithms to analyze the load and supply and adjust parameters for easy set up and optimum performance 94 Forced Tuning 0 1 1 FALSE Do not run tuning algorithm was already run or disabled by user R W TRUE Run tuning algorithm at next start command Default 0 00 50 00 Enables the user to read view the motor stator resistance value that was measured 2 Stator R ohms 0 00 Na during the tuning process R 0 00 50 00 Enables the user to read view the motor total load resistance that was measured J Total R Ohms 0 00 NA during the tuning process R 97 Coupling Factor S NA He a coefficient inserted by the controller during the tuning process and viewable R 98 ditone mH N NA eae to read view the motor inductance that was measured during the R 99 Speed PGain i he f 0 00 2 00 i S 7 A 200 Transient Mag 0 90 Provides the ability to adjust the gain factor used in speed measurement algorithms NA These parameters are not typically modified and it is recommended that RA Technical R W 201 Transient Zero ar Support be contacted for assistance before attempting to do so 202 Transient Gain 7 e 203 Pina D 0 0 180 0 NA T 5 R ing Vegree PX 50 0 Timing parameter used in speed measurement algorithms These parameters are not R W typically modified and it is recommended that RA Technical S
294. located below the HIM bezel see Figure 94 206 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Control Enable Communications Chapter 8 Logic Mask Parameter 148 allows the user to configure whether a communication device HIM or network connection can perform motor control commands such as starting Each communication port 1 through 4 can be enabled bit 1 or disabled bit 0 as required When a given device is enabled through the logic mask that device is allowed to execute control commands In addition disconnecting any device with the logic mask enabled will result in an Exp Removed X026 communication fault A device that is disabled through the logic mask can be disconnected without causing a fault When a given device is disabled through the logic mask that device cannot execute control commands but can still be used for configuration and monitoring X DPI port number of the device causing the Fault if a 20 HIM AG6 is enabled for control via the Logic Mask it can still be removed using the HIM control screen See Chapter 7 Optional HIM Operation IMPORTANT Stop commands override all start commands and can be initiated from the hardwired inputs or any DPI port regardless of the logic mask Logic Mask Enable Disable using a HIM To enable motor control using a connected HIM follow the procedure below with the connected HIM s programming keys The Bulletin 20 HIM AG6 provides start and stop con
295. ly Secs 3 0 A Undervolt F Level to signal a fault The Undervolt bit in the Starter Fault En R W parameter must be set to signal a fault 0 100 If the average three phase line voltage drops below this level for the time period 00 Undervolt A Lvl V 90 A set in the Undervolt A Dly parameter an Undervolt Alarm will be signaled The R W ndervolt bit in the Starter Alarm En parameter must be set to signal an Alarm Und bit in the S Alarm E b ignal an Al 0 1 99 0 The time period that the average three phase voltage must remain below 01 Undervolt A Dly Secs 30 A Undervolt A Lvl to signal an Alarm The Undervolt bit in the Starter Alarm R W i parameter must be set to signal an Alarm 00 199 If the average three phase line voltage exceed this level for the time period set in 02 Overvolt F Lvl V 110 A the Overvolt F Dly parameter an Overvolt fault will be signaled The Overvolt bit R W in the Starter Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault 0 1 99 0 The time period that the average three phase voltage must exceed the Overvolt F 03 Overvolt F Dly Secs 30 A Level to signal a fault The Overvolt bit in the Starter Fault En parameter must be R W i set to signal a fault 00 199 If the average three phase line voltage exceed this level for the time period set in 04 Overvolt A Lvl V 110 A the Overvolt A Dly parameter an Overvolt alarm will be signaled The Overvolt bit R W in the Starter Alarm parameter must be set to signal an alarm 0 1 99
296. me will override the SMB Zero Speed Braking Shutoff feature function This could result in current being applied to a stopped motor which will cause the motor to overheat See Figure 71 on page 98 and Chapter 5 Programming for additional details With Stop Time Parameter 66 set to some time value other than zero the user selected Braking Current Parameter 69 is applied for the user configured Stop Time regardless of the motor speed e g Automatic Zero Speed Detection disabled This braking method can be used in applications where detecting zero speed is ineffective or when braking the motor to a complete stop results in random overload trips Note that an ideal Stop Time setting can be accomplished by trial and error but should always allow for some coast time Setting the Stop Time for too long of a time period can result in braking current to be applied to a stopped motor and will likely result in overload trips The direction of motor rotation is determined by the sign or of Slow Speed Parameter 72 With Slow Brake Cur Parameter 73 set to 0 default the motor will coast to stop from Slow Speed When the value is between 1 350 braking current is applied from Slow Speed External Braking Control The external braking control feature enables an external mechanical motor brake to function in concert with the SMC 50 stop parameter When the Stop Mode Parameter 65 is set to Ext Brake and the stop
297. meters XA Input 3 0 NA Slow Speed Runs motor in slow speed mode as set up by slow speed parameters High R W aen RL Leer ee ee ey Fault A fault condition is forced if Input Terminal A3 1 Fault NC A fault condition is forced if Input Terminal A3 0 Clear Fault Clear a fault from Input Terminal A3 High Emerg Run Alos motor to run in emergency run mode if asserted from Input Terminal does not start motor High otor Heater Runs motor heating algorithm if asserted at Input Terminal A3 High 278 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Parameter Information Appendix B Min Max Mee Read Write Number Name f Units Enum Text Description W Default Access _ Allows the user to select the operation of Input Terminal A4 Option Input 4 on the 150 SM4 Digital 1 0 Option Module Disable Disable the input ignores any assertion to Input A4 Terminal Start nitiate a start as set up by the start parameters at Input Terminal A4 High Coast nitiates a coast stop no current to motor at Input Terminal A4 Low F nitiates a stop maneuver as set up by the stopping parameters at Input Stop Option Terminal A4 Input Terminal A4 0 stops motor 1 initiates a start as set up by the start Start Coast parameters
298. mmand until the its associated bit from the Aux ATTENTION For Overload Protection it is critical that the data be entered into the SMC 50 as it appears on the motor nameplate Pump Start with Stop To program a Pump Start with simple Stop operation the following parameters are provided for user adjustment The Basic Setup parameter set can be accessed with the HIM see Figure 88 on page 175 Parameter Option default Motor Config Setting for the motor configuration Line Connected Wye or Inside the Delta NOTE In the AUTO Detect default selection the controller will automatically check the motor configuration Line Delta Auto Detect Line Voltage Select the value of line voltage being used in the system The correct line voltage value must be entered for the voltage protection functions to work properly 0 700V 480V Starting Mode This mode must be programmed for Pump Start Pump Start Ramp Time Programs the time period that the SMC 50 will ramp the output voltage to full voltage and motor speed from the programmed Initial Torque value 0 1000 10 seconds Initial Torque The initial reduced output voltage torque level for the voltage ramp to the motor is established and adjusted with this parameter The torque level at which the ramp begins 0 90 70 LRT Qa urrent Limit Level Limits the current supplied to the motor throughout the Torque Ramp Start cycle
299. moval amp Replacement Control Module Power Pole Assembly Replacement Appendix D Figure 98 Control Module Replacement 90 520 A Devices Step 1 TB2 TB3 TB4 Ti Step 2 210 520 A Devices 90 180 A Devices SK AJ Y mi Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 292 Catalog Numbers Accessories Table 165 Accessories Cat Nos Appendix E Description Cat No Option Modules PTC Ground Fault amp Current Feedback 150 SM2 Analog 1 0 150 SM3 Digital 1 0 150 SM4 Parameter Configuration Module 150 SM6 Converter ModulesO 30 180 A Three Phase Current Monitoring 825 MCM180 181 520 A Three Phase Current Monitoring 825 MCM20 90 520 A Core Balance Ground Fault Sensor 825 CBCT Protective Modules 90 520 A 480V AC 150 F84L 90 520 A 600V AC 150 F86L Terminal Lugs 90 320 A 199 LF1 361 520 A 199 LG1 155 311 A Inside the Delta Connection Distribution Block 1492 BG 363 554 A Inside the Delta Connection Distribution Block Mareo Ea Products 625 900 A Inside the Delta Connection Distribution Block bation e a noua 90 180 A Bypass Connection 1494R N14 210 320 A Bypass Kits 150 SCBK 361 520 A Bypass Kits 150 SDBK IEC Terminal Covers 90 180 A Line or Load Terminal Cover 150 STCB Rockwell
300. move to the bit location that needs to be modified The bit function is displayed at the bottom of the screen b Press EDIT to move to the edit screen 188 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 c Change the bit assignment then press EDIT If the parameter is not bit configured e g Turns Ratio a Press the EDIT b Change the value within the displayed limits then press ENTER to load the parameter contents into memory amp Stopped uy 0 Amps Fault Enable ESC Port 07 Host Param XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 Bit 01 Ground Fault lt gt PAR Programming Chapter 5 The following table provides the parameter detail of the 150 SM2 Parameter Min Max Number Name default Access Units Bit 0 Module Read i i X1 Module Status Bit 1 PTC Tr f ae Bit 2 CT Loss ae Bit 0 PTC Bit 0 Disable S Alarm Enabie Bit 1 Ground Fault PAY Bit 1 Enable X 4 Restart Enable X5 Turns Ratio 100 2000 1000 R W NA X 6 Ground Fault Level 0 00 5 00 2 5 R W Amps X 7 Ground Fault Delay 0 1 250 0 0 5 R W Seconds X 8 Ground Fault A Level 0 00 5 00 2 5 R W Amps X 9 Ground Fault A Delay 0 1 250 0 0 5 R W Seconds X 10 Ground Fault Inh Time 0 0 250 0 10 0 R W Seconds X 11 Ground Current 0 00 5 00 R Amps X 12 CT Enable Disable Enable R W NA X 13 CT Scaling A X 14 CT Scaling B 0 10 5 00 1 00 R
301. mp Alarm ccccceceeee neces 119 Real Power Protection MWatts ccececcscnceecnceccucees 120 Reactive Power Protection MVAR 0ccececeecnceeencees 121 Motor Over Power Reactive Positive Fault amp Alarm 121 Motor Under Power Reactive Positive Fault amp Alarm 122 Motor Over Power Reactive Negative Fault amp Alarm 123 Motor Under Power Reactive Negative Fault amp Alarm 124 Apparent Power Protection MVA eceeeeceen eee eeeeees 124 Power Factor PF Protections G32 c va batishav veiadavcaweeetetes 126 Excessive Starts Hour Protection ccc cee e cece ee nees 127 Preventive Maintenance PM Protection 0ceeeeeeeees 127 Line Loss Protection 00 c cece cece ene een a o e 129 Silicon Controlled Rectifier SCR Protection 0 0000 129 Shorted SCR Fault Phase A B or C 00 cece cece ee eee 129 SCR Overtemperature Fault 03 asssaekeieieeei ees 129 Open SCR Gate Fault amp Alarm Phase A B or C 130 Power Oualitysas Seco eneee aa os eee wena enedye CATRE RA 130 Total Harmonic Distortion THD Fault amp Alarm 131 Power Pole Overtemperature Paultit 0i0224 setae watever 131 Open Load Fault amp Alarm 25 4 s y4 she satetineds aa8 132 Current Transformers CT Loss Fault 0 000 0008 132 Locked Rotor Fault amp Alarm az 224 onc kaise nd ei dsate Soe on ot
302. mple 2 Diverter Operation This example demonstrates basic control logic to operate a diverter in a conveyor system using a in Digital I O 150 SM4 option module card installed in Port 8 The diverter directs parts from an upstream conveyor to one of two downstream conveyors The parameter DLX Input 1 parameter 335 defines the total number of boxes diverted to conveyer A when the diverter control signal is off The parameter DLX Input 2 parameter 336 defines the total number of boxes diverted to conveyer B when the diverter control signal is on Sensor Diverter a L ah oot MAY CY OL CY OI VOL OL OVE DL0L0L0L0 4045402040010 gt gt gt gt gt Ey DN Upstream Conveyor OLOLOLOAOLOLOLOLOMOLOAC Downstream Conveyor The application consists of the following discrete I O Type Name Description Identifies that a part is present Connected to Input 1 on an Digital Inputs Part Present Sensor 1 0 150 SM4 card installed in Port 8 Controls the diverter actuator to direct the flow of parts Connected Outputs Diverter Actuator to Aux 1 on an Digital 1 0 150 SM4 card installed in Port 8 Example logic requirements e When Part Present Sensor transitions to ON increment the parts counter e If parts counter is greater than or equal to DLX Input 1 then set the diverter act
303. n amp Wiring Chapter 2 Note When mounted in an enclosure maintain a minimum of 6 0 inches 152 4 Dimensions Dimensions are in inches millimeters All dimensions are approximate NOTE and are not intended for manufacturing purposes Consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen Bradley distributor for complete dimension drawings Cat No 150 SB Controllers Figure 4 Dimensions of Cat No 150 SB1 SB4 Controller without Terminal Covers 10 21 4 259 2 gt rata 7 oios je 184 ial gt 1 07 i ahs See detail A 27 1 ee a O35 276 0 30 4 8 0 79 81 rN a va qe a pE I ii al M 7 an 8 32 UNC 2B _ A Detail A 13 95 354 4 13 39 340 0 15 62 396 6 _ CI o o fie 4 E 2 51 251 een eer Four Quantity 679 al le 6 69 gt 7 51 172 5 170 0 7 65 4 194 4 millimeters clearance above or below the SMC 50 Side to side clearance is not required Catalog Number 150 SB1 150 SB2 150 SB3 150 SB4 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Approximate Shipping Weight 15 7 kg 34 6 Ib 19 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Figure 5 Dimension of Cat No 150 SB1 SB4 Controller with Terminal
304. n 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Number Name Units Table 150 Parameter 303 311 Min Max Default Enum Text Description Parameter Information Appendix B Read Write Access 303 MVAR Un A Lvl MVAR 1000 000 0 000 0 000 NA Enables he user to enter a value for the Generated Reactive Power Under Alarm Level MVAR Un A Lvl If the current actual value for Generated Reactive Power is less than the MVAR Un A Lvl for a period greater than that defined by MVAR Un A Dly a MVAR Un Alarm will be signaled R W MVAR Un A Dly Secs 0 1 99 0 0 1 NA Enables the Power Under ser to enter a time value for the Generated Reactive Alarm Delay MVAR Un A Dly If the current actual value for Generated Reactive Power is less than the MVAR Un A Lvl for a period greate will be signa ed O r than that defined by MVAR Un A Dly a MVAR Un Alarm R W Starting Torque Starting Torque 2 0 300 100 NA Enables the ser to enter Starting Torque value required for a torque start operation Enables the ser to enter an alternate Starting Torque required for a torque start operation R W SS Ref Gain SS Trans Gain 0 10 2 00 1 00 NA Enables the Gain used to adjusted Suppor ser to enter Slow Speed Reference Gain value SS Ref adjust slow speed operation This parameter is rarely Contact RA Technica for further info
305. n RA UM003 Starting Modes Features The SMC 50 is a reduced voltage soft starter that utilizes a a state of the art microprocessor based control module and solid state without an integral bypass contactor power structure Using six back to back SCRs two per phase the SMC S0 provides controlled acceleration operation run and deceleration of standard asynchronous induction motors The SMC 50 offers a full range of starting modes as standard Linear Speed Acceleration Soft Start with selectable kickstart Current Limit with selectable kickstart Dual Ramp Start with selectable kickstart Full Voltage Start Preset Slow Speed from 1 to 15 forward and reverse Torque Control Pump Control Pump Start with selectable Kickstart Running Modes Features The SMC 50 offers three operational run modes e solid state run mode e solid state with energy external bypass run saver run mode mode option Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 9 Chapter 1 Product Overview Metering 1 0 10 Stopping Modes Features The SMC 50 offers a full range of stopping modes as standard e Linear Speed Deceleration e Pump Control e Coast e Braking Control e Soft Stop Smart Motor Braking SMB Slow Speed with Braking The SMC 50 allows the user to monitor the following power parameters RMS current for each phase and average of all three phases Line to line voltage for each phase and average of all
306. n to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage the installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL indicates that the switch is closed in this position Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 65 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Soft Stop Pump Control amp The eee figure shows the typical wiring diagrams for the Soft Stop Pump Smart Motor Braking SMB 274 SMB options Figure 47 Soft Stop Pump Stop or Braking Control Option AC Control Fast Acting SCR i Circuit Fuses optional eee 3 Phase AC E 1 Line Power i 120V 240V AC Control Transformer S
307. nal Comm module bit 5 15 reserved Displays which DPI ports are active on the control module and will accept operational commands from 0 65535 bit 1 port 1 on board HIM 52 Port Mask Act 0 NA bit 2 port 2 DPI port on control module R bit 3 port 3 DPI port on contro module with splitter bit 4 port 4 Internal Comm module bit 5 15 reserved 53 A Al 54 A2 A2 55 B B1 Se 56 B2 T B2 In Datalink index holding the parameter number of the 15 A parameter that will be written to during Datalink 57 Datailn c 0 NA Anis isthe channel c1 communications A value of 0 indicates that it is R W disabled 58 C2 C2 59 D D 60 D2 D2 61 A A 62 A2 A2 63 B B 64 B2 ENT B2 out Datalink nge holding n parameter number of oda e parameter that will be read from during Datalin 65 Data Qut C 0 NA hig Yee crane c1 communications A value of 0 indicates that it is RAY disabled 66 C2 C2 67 D D1 68 D2 D2 x a 1 32767 Allow OEM s to fine tune their voltage dividers This is a Medium Voltage specific 69 Voltage Ratio 3079 NA parameter and has no function at 690 volts and below R W 10 500 Allows the user to achieve proper current ratio for FLC ratings when using external 70 User CT Ratio 100 NA CTs This is a MV specific parameter and has no function at 690 volts and below R W 1 15000 Set at the factory to achieve proper current ratio for FLC ratings when using 71 Factory CT Ratio 50 NA external CTs This is a MV specific par
308. nction to enable or disable these Faults Note that with the Preset Protection Level switch set to Disable all Starter and Motor Faults are disabled as defaults except the Power Quality Fault Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Human Interface Module HIM Cat No 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S Programming Chapter 5 Table 70 ON OFF 8 Switch DIP Switch Definitions Configuration 1 0 Configuration Bank Switch Number 0 Switch OPEN Aux 1 Configuration Normal default Parameter 172 Up to Speed UTS Fault Alarm Aux 2 Configuration Normal Parameter 176 UTS default Fault Alarm Input 1 Parameter 56 Start Coast default Start Stop Option Input 2 Parameter 57 Stop Option default Clear Fault Slow Speed Fault The 1 0 Configuration ability of the 150 SM6 is limited to the Control Module s standard 1 0 The 20 HIM AG6 provides the ability to e configure monitor all controller parameters e configure monitor all option modules e g 150 SM4 digital I O 150 SM6 PCM etc and e use the SMC 50 s general startup configuration wizard NOTE The 20 HIM A3 cannot configure the option modules or use the general startup configuration wizard Therefore the 20 HIM A3 is not recommended for use with the SMC 50 and is not mentioned in this document The 20 HIM AG is typically inserted into t
309. ndix B The parameter values stored and produced by the SMC 50 through communication are unscaled numbers When reading or writing values from a PLC image table it is important to apply the proper scaling factor which is based on the number of decimal places Read Example Power Factor Parameter 17 The stored value is 85 Since this value has two decimal places the value should be divided by 100 The correctly read value is 0 85 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 211 Chapter8 Communications Display Text Unit Equivalents Configuring DataLink 212 Write Example Motor FLC Parameter 78 The example value which is to be written to the SMC 50 is 75 A Since this value has one decimal place the value should be multiplied by 10 The correctly written value is 750 Some parameters have text descriptions when viewed from a HIM or through a communication software program such as RSNetworx When receiving or sending information from a PLC each text description has a numerical equivalent The table below shows an example of Meter Reset Parameter 16 and the appropriate relationship between the text descriptor and the equivalent value This relationship is identical for other similar parameters located in Appendix B EXAMPLE Text Descriptor Numerical Equivalent Ready 0 Elapsed Time 1 Energy 2 3 4 Time to PM Starts to PM DataLink is supported in the SM
310. nfigured for Dual Ramp using Parameter 7 2 control module port 7 A customer supplied jumper is required to enable controller 1 0 operation Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of off stream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor See the Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details The order of the terminal numbers for the option I O module can be reversed depending on which expansion slot option 1 0 module is located in on the control module However the function associated with the terminal number remains the same Ensure that InA2 InA3 and InA4 are configured to Disable Default NOTE In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage the installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL 52 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Figure 34
311. ng Heater function will 0 1000 seconds remain engaged after receiving a valid Start command 1 Heating Level The percent Heating Level is sequentially applied to each 0 100 winding auld if the Terminal Block Input configured to Motor Heater is used to initiate the Motor Winding Heater function Heating Time can be zero 0 The heater function will be active after the terminal input is active and a start command Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Chapter 5 Stop Options SMB Smart Motor Breaking To use the SMB function the Stopping file group parameter set must be selected from FILE Setup group using the HIM see Figure 88 on page 175 Parameter Option default Stop Mode Allows selection of the desired Stop mode The mode must be SMB programmed for SMB Stop Time NOT used for SMB SMB automatically controls the duration stop time of the braking current to the motor from the running at speed condition until a zero speed condition is reached zero speed braking shutoff feature function Braking Current The amount of braking current to be applied to the motor 0 400 FLC Backspin Timer The amount of time which much expire before another Start cycle can occur The timer begins after the Stop maneuver is completed All Start commands are ignored until the timer has expired If the Start command is 0 999 seconds momentary and ends before the t
312. ng Power Factor Under Alarm Leading Power Factor Under Alarm Lagging Power Factor Over Alarm Leading Power Factor Over Alarm The SMC 50 has the ability to protect against an excessive PF for specific applications that require monitoring the phase angle difference between voltage and current The user can protect the motor by using the Fault function or issue a warning using the Alarm function in the event that the PF for an electric motor is either too high or too low for both Leading Fault Code 64 and 66 and Lagging Fault Code 63 and 65 conditions In addition to the configurable Fault and Alarm levels both Motor Leading and Motor Lagging Fault and Alarm functions provide a configurable delay time to limit nuisance trips PF Faults and PF Alarms are individually enabled and disabled through the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 and Motor Alarm Enable Parameter 231 Table 53 PF Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Minimum Maximum Default Access Units Name 248 Lead PF Ov F Lvl 0 1 00 249 Lead PF Ov F Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS 250 Lead PF Ov A Lvl 0 1 00 251 Lead PF Ov A Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS 252 Lead PF Un F Lvl 0 1 00 253 Lead PF Un F Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS 254 Lead PF Un A Lvl 0 1 00 255 Lead PF Un A Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS 256 Lag PF Ov F Lvl 0 1 00 a 257 Lag PF Ov F Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS 258 Lag PF Ov A
313. ng Weight 23 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Figure 9 Dimensions of Cat No 150 SD1 SD3 Controller with Lugs Bypass Kit and MOV options 1 54 0 33 39 2 8 5 5 P 4 i 1 i j _ E 25 25 29 79 641 4 28 58 756 8 726 L i QQ i Ves j F D z aa a z Do a Ome a O OQ IJ 241 amp 612 y 1 mi g _ 1 82 i 1 44 36 5 46 2 10 08 256 Note When mounted in an enclosure maintain a minimum of 6 0 inches 152 4 millimeters clearance above or below the SMC 50 Side to side clearance is not required Catalog Number Approximate Shipping Weight 150 SD1 71 150 SD2 170 Ib 150 SD3 Power Factor The SMC 50 controller can be installed on a system with PFCCs The PFCCs Correction Capac itors must be located on the line side of the controller This must be done to prevent PFCC damage to the silicon controlled rectifiers SCRs in the controller power section When discharged a capacitor essentially has zero impedance For switching sufficient impedance should be connected in series with the capacitor bank to limit the inrush current One method for limiting the surge current is to add inductance in the capacitor s conduct
314. ng the assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures see applicable ESD protection handbooks ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed controller can damage components or reduce product life Wiring or application errors e g undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system ATTENTION Only personnel familiar with the controller and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to do this may result in personal injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION Hazardous voltages that can cause shock burn or death are present on L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 and T3 Power terminal covers can be installed on devices rated 90 180 A to prevent inadvertent contact with terminals Disconnect the main power before servicing the motor controller or associated wiring 16 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Heat Dissipation Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 The following table provides the maximum heat dissipation at the maximum rated current for the controllers For currents lower than the rated value heat dissipation will be reduced Table 1 Control Power Requirements Max Control Circuit Consumption a Control Voltage Description
315. nits Name 126 PM Hours 1 10000 R W HRS 21 Time to PM 0 0 10000 00 R HRS 16 Meter Reset Ready Elapsed Time Energy R W Time to PM Starts to PM As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools PM Starts Protection Fault amp Alarm PM Starts Fault Code 51 amp Alarm The SMC 50 can be configured to provide a Fault and or Alarm to indicate that PM should be performed after a pre defined number of starts have occurred Fault Code 51 This is done by using the PM Starts Parameter 127 Starts to PM Parameter 22 and Meter Reset Parameter 16 The Starts to PM parameter indicates the number of starts before preventative maintenance needs to be performed This value counts down by one for each start initiated even if the start is not completed When the Starts to PM value reaches zero the configured Fault and or Alarm condition is activated and the counter stops counting After the preventative maintenance is complete the user can reset the Fault and or Alarm The user must reload the Starts to PM to the value configured and stored in the PM Starts parameter through the Meter Reset Parameter 16 via a HIM or network communications The PM Starts Alarm function is enabled using the PM Starts bit in the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 The Alarm is enabled using the PM Starts bit in the Motor Alarm Enable Parameter 231 Table 56 Starts Protection Parameter List Parameter Number
316. nput 2 Offset 10000 10000 0 NA A offset lowers the resulting value R W X 19 nput 2 Data Hi cat NA A User defined maximum value of Input 2 custom value range R W X 20 nput 2 Data Lo eels NA A User defined minimum value of Input 2 custom value range R W X 21 nput 2 High io Ta 000 a A Correlates Input 2 Data Hi to the Input 2 Raw value R W X 22 nput 2 Low o one 000 vor A Correlates Input 2 Data Low to the Input 2 Raw value R W 10V Output 1 set to voltage mode with range of 10V to 10V 10V Output 1 set to voltage mode with range of OV to 10V X 23 Outp Range 0 4 1 NA 5V Output 1 set to voltage mode with range of OV to 5V R W 0 20mA Output 1 set to current mode with range of OmA to 20mA 4 20mA Output 1 set to current mode with range of 4mA to 20mA X 24 Output 1 Select 0 15999 1 NA A Selects the parameter used to drive Output 1 R W 20 000 20 000 Vor Output level when the selected parameter Output 1 Select reaches X 25 Output 1 High 19 000 ma NA Output 1 Data Hi R W 20 000 20 000 Vor Output level when the selected parameter Output 1 Select reaches X 26 Output TLow 19 909 mA A Output 1 Data Lo RW 300000000 30000 V or Level of the selected parameter Output 1 Select corresponding to an X 27 Output 1 Data Hi 000 fago ma NA output of Output 1 High R W 300000000 30000 V or Level of the selected parameter Output 1 Select corresponding to an X 28 Output 1 Data Lo 0000 0 mA A output of Output 1 High R W X
317. nts Disable this fault alarm feature Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 233 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Table 111 Fault Display Explanation Display Fault Code Fault Enabled Possible Causes Possible Solutions e Motor ventilation is blocked Check for proper ventilation e Motor duty cycle is exceeded Check application duty cycle X059 e PTC open or shorted Wait for motor to cool or provide external cooling Motor PTC In All Modes NOTE An optional 150 SM2 then check resistance of PTC Ground Fault PTC Module is Disable this fault alarm feature required for this fault e Controller ventilation blocked Check for proper controller ventilation e Controller duty cycle exceeded Check application appropriate duty cycle SCR Overtemp or e Fan failure Wait for controller to cool or provide external PTC Power Pole 60 or 10 In All Modes e Ambient temperature limit exceeded cooling if ambient temperature is high e Failed thermistor Check for fan operation Replace fan if necessary Replace power module or control module as needed e The configuration of the control 1 0 Modify the control 1 0 configuration to meet the H does not meet the system rules as established rules 1 0 Config 61 Pre Start defined in Chapter 4 Configuration Functions on page 134 e The SMC 50
318. o 9 12 11 10 19 8176 7 Q2 QQZ yi H L2 a X q 2 Q Aux2 Auxt E 2 a ws lt Control Module Standard I O SSS 6 A A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 AB A9 A10 A11 A12 gt z 2 4 3 OH OH Q Auwal AuxA2 AuxA3 lt m AC Inputs _ Auxiliary Relay Outputs t 150 SM4 Option I O Module Customer supplied See the controller nameplate to verify the control power input ratings 100 240V AC Option 1 0 Terminal A3 InA3 100 240V AC input is configured for START input using Parameter 7 4 control module port 7 Option 1 0 Terminal A2 InA2 100 240V AC input configured for COAST using Parameter 7 3 control module port 7 NOTE The controller will generate an O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is configured for COAST or STOP Option 1 0 module Terminal A1 InA1 100 240V AC input is configured for STOP OPTION using Parameter 7 2 contro module port 7 Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation e g the one shown in this diagram is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor NOTE In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR
319. o NORMAL Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Figure 52 Accu Stop AC 1 0 11 2 L14 T er SMC 50 Soft Fast Acting SCR Circuit M arter Fuses optional Protective 3 Phase AC 00 T24 Ea Line Power T3 6 D 8 120V 240V AC Control Transformer LJ or AC Power Supply Toa 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J 12 11 10 9 o o oO GH 4 Le aae And L2 L1 t 5 Lu Intl DC COM gt Control Module Control Module Standard 1 0 Power amp Ground alo A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12D 0 T N oO qt gt 2 SQ AuKAT AuxA2 AuxA3 NG AC Inputs Auxiliary Relay Outputs 150 SM4 Option I O Module Customer supplied See the controller nameplate to verify the control power input ratings 100 240V AC Option 1 0 Terminal A3 InA3 100 240V AC input configured for SLOW SPEED Stop Option etc using Parameter 7 4 control module port 7 NOTE The controller will generate an 1 0 configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is configured for COAST or STOP Option 1 0 Terminal A2 InA2 100 2
320. o extend the stopping time for loads that stop suddenly when power is removed from the motor Fluid surges with e Misapplication e Soft Stop ramps voltage down over a set pumps still occur period of time In the case of pumps the with the Soft Stop voltage may drop too rapidly to prevent option surges A closed loop system such as Pump Control would be more appropriately suited Motor overheats e Duty cycle e Preset Slow Speed and SMB options Extended operation at slow speeds reduces motor cooling efficiency Consult motor manufacturer for motor limitations e Smart Motor Braking option Check duty cycle Consult motor manufacturer for motor limitations Motor short circuit e Winding fault e Identify fault and correct e Check for shorted SCR replace if necessary e Ensure power terminals are secure O Fan operation is controlled by the SMC 50 Control Module The fan may not run in low ambient temperature conditions See Chapter 2 Fan Power on page 35 for additional details 238 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Troubleshooting Chapter 10 Power Module Check Ifa power module needs to be checked use the applicable procedure that follows ATTENTION To avoid shock hazard disconnect main power before working on the controller motor or control devices such as Start Stop push buttons ATTENTION Make sure that wires are properly marked and programmed parameter values are recorded Shorted SCR Test
321. o this automa so force this manually by setting the Force Tuning Parameter 194 to TRUE 1 which is accessed from the File Setup Group Adv Tuning or by pressing and holding the SMC 50 s Reset button for 10 seconds with the motor stopped A Start Delay Time can also be programmed to delay starting for a period of time after the initia run The user can a parameters via the art page 159 To use Ext Braking one of the Auxiliary Outputs must be programmed to Ext Brake When programmed Auxiliary is to energize the external brake device to stop the motor The re parameter can be accessed from the Group Starting selection see Figure 85 on page 159 art is available when using Torque Start A Kickstart Level and Time must be configured if the File Group File Setup Group Starting selection sequence see Figure 85 on page 159 Setting ition to Stop Mode for SMB a Braking Current value must be configured from the Group S opping STOP NOT ime parameter has timed out E This function enables forcing an output ON or OFF ically Starting Setup Group The Starting Setup Group can be accessed with the HIM from the Port either parameter to zero disables he first time the motor is ion of the START command The Start his mode is used Access these lt 00 gt DEV PARAM folder selection see Figure 85 on or Ext Brake the function of this ay stays ON from the beginning of the STOP co
322. oad A Level parameter before an Underload Alarm is signaled The R W Underload bit in the Motor Alarm En parameter must be set to signal a alarm 0 000 1000 00 If the Real Power exceeds this level for the time period set in MWatts Ov F Dly 90 Watts Ov F Lvl MW 0 000 f A parameter an MWatts Ov fault will be signaled The MWatts Ov bit in the Motor R W Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault 0 1 99 0 The time period that Real Power must exceed MWatts Ov F Lvl to signal a fault 31 Watts Ov F Diy Secs 0 1 A The MWatts Ov bit in the Motor Fault En parameter must be set to signal fault RW 0 000 1000 00 If the Real Power exceeds this level for the time period set in MWatts Ov A Dly 92 Watts Ov A Lvi MW 0 000 A parameter a MWatts Ov Alarm will be signaled The MWatts Ov bit in the Motor R W Alarm En parameter must be set to signal an alarm 0 1 99 0 The time period that Real Power must exceed MWatts Ov A Lvl to signal an 93 Watts Ov A Dly Secs 0 1 A alarm The MWatts Ov bit in the Motor alarm En parameter must be set to signal R W an alarm 0 000 1000 00 If the Real Power drops below this level for the time period set in MWatts Un F 94 MWatts Un F Lvl MW 0 000 h A Dly parameter an MWatts Un Fault will be signalled The MWatts Un bit inthe R W f Motor Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault 258 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014
323. oad fault This value can go R Usage U 0 over 100 depending on the rate at which the motor is heating before an overload trip Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 253 Appendix B Parameter Information Table 131 Parameter 19 42 Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access 0 1000 Displays the estimated time before an overload trip will occur if the present 19 Time to OL Trip Secs 0 A opera ing conditions persist If operating below ultimate trip current the value will R isplay the max value 0 Time to OL S is 0 1000 A Displays the estimated time until the motor overload fault can be reset The MTU R Reset 0 reset level is set by the OL reset parameter 80 Displays the estimated time to a preventive maintenance event if enabled The 2 a a a a 16 Displays the estimated number of starts to a PM event if enabled The scheduled 27 Starts to PM _ 0 50000 A number of starts for a PM event is set by the user via the PM Starts parameter R 0 This value can be reset by the user after an event via the meter reset parameter 0 30000 Displays the total number of SMC starts The SMC keeps a Start Counter which will 23 Total Starts 0 A be incremented each t
324. ociated with the Confi NOTE u eq S gure both In1 Input 1 Parameter 56 n addition to a small amount of leakage controlled current to flow to the winding ipment damage the installation of an isolation conta C 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation dev 150 SM4 Option I O Module Customer supplied power inpu ion I O mod is configured art stop or s The controller will generate an 1 0 configuration faul o current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state c current flowi s of the mot ratings 100 240V AC A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A12 z 2 3 oH LW HH w QB AuxAl AuxA2 AuxA3 AC Inputs Auxilliary Relay Outputs for start stop or start coast using Parameter 7 2 control module port number 7 tart coast a N O input contact must be used if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is selected for ontroller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation is recommended i ions diagram for details le can be reversed depending on which expansion slot option 1 0 module is located in on the control module erminal number remains the same and In2 Input 2 Parameter 57 to Disable ng through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching components allows or This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or ctor or shunt trip type circuit breaker
325. odification Using the HIM on page 149 in Chapter 5 3 From the Port 00 DEV PARAM screen select File Group then press the ENTER key number 5 on the keypad The Port 00 Param File Group screen will appear 4 Use the up or down Arrow key to select File Monitoring The Port 00 Param File Group File Monitoring screen will appear with seven GROUP metering selections Metering Basics Metering Volts Metering Current Metering Power Start Stats Monitoring Power Quality E Stopped E Stopped say 0 Amps wy 0 Amps Port OO Param File Group Port OO Param File Group Monitoring z FILE Monitoring Set Up GROUP Metering Power A Motor Protection Communications GROUP Monitoring _ FILE Utility GROUP Power Quality v 5 Use the up or down arrow key to select the desired GROUP then press the ENTER key number 5 on the keypad Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 191 Chapter6 Metering Metering Parameters 192 6 Select the desired parameter from the previous group selected then press the ENTER key to monitor the metering parameter NOTE With the exception of the Meter Reset Parameter 16 the metering parameters contained in the Monitoring File Group are Read R only See Metering on page 10 in Chapter 1 and Metering Parameters on page 192 in this chapter for a detailed list of metering parameters Resetting Metering Parameters Meter Reset Parameter 16 is use
326. odule Compatible Option Modules Cat Nos Port7 Ports Porta per Control Module 150 SM2 Ground Fault PTC External CT Yes Yes No 1 150 SM3 Analog 1 0 Yes Yes Yes 3 150 SM4 Digital 1 0 Yes Yes Yes 3 150 SM6 Parameter Configuration Yes Yes Yes 1 20 COMM X Communications No No Yes 1 See Chapter 8 Communications on page 205 for a list of compatible 20 COMM X modules When installed in an SMC 50 controller 20 COMM X modules physically reside in the space assigned to Port 9 but connects to DPI Port 4 with the ribbon cable that is supplied with the module Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 37 Chapter 2 38 Installation amp Wiring Optional Cat No 150 SM4 Digital 1 0 Module A Cat No 150 SM4 Digital I O Option Module provides four 120 240V AC digital on off inputs and three relay outputs to provide additional auxiliary control or indications e g up to speed UTS alarm etc functions The 150 SM4 module can be located in any of the three control module option ports See Figure 20 Up to three 150 SM4 modules can be used with a single control module The 150 SM4 module terminal block used to wire the I O is removable 1 When installed in Control Module Port 7 the orientation of the module terminal block is rotated 180 along with its terminals NOTE i l 2 The Cat No 150 SM4 Digital 1 0 Module can NOT be configured using a 150 SM6 PCM This module
327. of 20 40 C 4 104 F See Table 3 for the minimum enclosure size Table 3 Minimum Enclosure Size SMC 50 only Configuration LL Width Height Depth 150 SB Line Wye 609 6 24 0 762 0 30 0 304 8 12 0 Inside the Delta 762 0 30 0 965 2 38 0 355 6 14 0 150 SC All 762 0 30 0 965 2 38 0 355 6 14 0 150 SD All 914 4 36 0 1295 4 51 0 355 6 14 0 IMPORTANT The internal ambient temperature of the enclosure must be kept within the range of 20 40 C 4 104 F All units are fan cooled It is important to locate the controller in a position that allows air to flow vertically through the power module IMPORTANT The controller must be mounted in a vertical plane and have a minimum of 6 in 150 mm free space above and below the controller Side to side spacing in not required Horizontal mounting of the SMC 50 is not allowed Enclosure must be sized such that the enclosure s internal temperature remains within specified controller ratings When drilling or installing near the Soft Starter make sure that adequate measures are taken to protect the device from dust and debris as illustrated below Figure 3 SMC 50 Mounting Protection LL Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installatio
328. of OV to 5V X 7 Input 1 Range 0 5 1 NA R W 1 5V Input 1 set to voltage mode with range of 1V to 5V 0 20mA Input 1 set to current mode with range of OmA to 20mA 4 20mA Input 1 set to current mode with range of 4mA to 20mA 4 Offset value of Input 1 subtracted from the Input 1 Raw value positive X8 nput 1 Offset 10000 10000 0 NA a offset lowers the resulting value R W X 9 nput 1 Data Hi ri a NA A User defined maximum value of Input 1 custom value range R W X 10 nput 1 Data Lo ore NA A User defined minimum value of Input 1 custom value range R W X 11 nput 1 High ae ar A Correlates Input 1 Data Hi to the Input 1 Raw value R W X 12 nput 1 Low 21 000 21 000 Vor A Correlates Input 1 Data Low to the Input 1 Raw value R W 0 000 mA X 13 nput 2 Scaled r NA A Input 2 scaled to user units R X 14 nput 2 Analog ona ver A Input 2 in electrical units volts or milliamps R X 15 nput 2 Percent ou NA A Input 2 as a percentage of configured range R X 16 nput 2 Raw 32768 32768 0 NA A Input 2 unscaled R 10V Input 2 set to voltage mode with range of 10V to 10V 10V Input 2 set to voltage mode with range of OV to 10V 5V Input 2 set to voltage mode with range of OV to 5V X 17 Input 2 Range 0 5 1 NA R W 1 5V Input 2 set to voltage mode with range of 1V to 5V 0 20mA Input 2 set to current mode with range of OmA to 20mA 4 20mA Input 2 set to current mode with range of 4mA to 20mA Offset value of Input 2 subtracted from the Input 2 Raw value positive X 18
329. ol Power Specifications Rated Operation Voltage 100 240V AC 15 10 or 24V DC 10 10 Rated Insulation Voltage NA 240V Rated Impulse Voltage NA 3000V Dielectric Withstand 1500V AC 1500V Operating Frequency 47 63 Hz Control Power Ride Through 22 mS Max Output of 24V Teme a ai 300mA Control Module Battery Type CR 2032 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Specifications Appendix A Table 118 Control Module Standard Input Output Ratings Type UL CSA NEMA IEC Control Module Standard Control Inputs Terminals 10 amp 11 Normal Operating Voltage 24V DC Operating Voltage Range 15 30V DC once Current Minimum 2 8 mA Voltage Minimum 10V DC Off State Current Maman 3mA Voltage Maximum 10 9V DC Inrush Current Maximum 7mA Input Delay Time On to Off 30 mS Off to On 20 mS Reverse Polarity Protection Yes Rated Insulation Voltage NA 60V Rated Impulse Voltage NA 500V Dielectric Withstand 500V AC 1000V AC Control Module Standard Outputs Terminals 4 5 and 6 7 Type of Control Circuit Electromagnetic Relay Number of Contacts per Relay 1 Type of Contacts Programmable N 0 N C Type of Current AC Rated Operational Current 3A 120V AC 1 5 A 240V AC Conventional Thermal Current lip 5A AC DC Make Brake VA 3600 360 Utilization Category B300 AC 15 0 024 mA 24V Off State Leakage Cu
330. ol power input ratings 100 240V AC Terminal 11 In1 DC 24V DC input is configured for START input using Parameter 56 Terminal 10 In2 DC 24V DC input configured for COAST STOP OPTION etc using Parameter 57 NOTE The controller will generate an I O configurati A customer supplied jumper is required to enable the controller 1 0 operation Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF motor See the Isolation Contactor Applications for details In Bypass Contactor RUN operation the 825 MC 825 MCM converter can be used in this configuration The maximum cable length is 4 m thus the 825 MCM must be located within 4 m of the SMC 50 The order of the terminal numbers for the 150 SM2 module can be reversed depending on which expansion slot it is located in the control module However associated with the terminal number remains the same The Aux 1 relay output is configured for external bypass using Parameter 172 In North America size the bypass contactor per the motor Hp and FLA In IEC size the bypass contactor per the motor AC 1 rating The short circuit rating of contactor must be similar to the SMC 50 NOTE In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To p
331. oltage Output 1 kQ at 10V DC Max Inductive Load Current Outputs 15 mH Max Capacitive Load Voltage Outputs 100 pF Overall Accuracy Voltage Terminal 0 5 full scale at 25 C Current Terminal 0 35 full scale at 25 C Accuracy Drift with Temperature 5 PPM C Output Impedance 15 Q typical Open and Short Circuit Protection Yes Maximum Short Circuit Current 45 mA Output Overvoltage Protection Yes Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 245 AppendixA Specifications SCPD Performance o Type 1 Table 122 SCCR List Standard Capacity Fault SCPD Performance Type 10 Motor Connection Type Catalog Current Non Time Delay Fuse Time Delay Fuse Inverse Time Thermal Magnetic Number Rating A Circuit Breaker Max Amps Max Amps Max Amps prandard Typical Max Standaid Typical Max pandard Typical Max Fault kA Fault kA Fault kA 50 SB1N 90 10 250 350 10 150 200 10 225 350 50 SB2N 110 300 400 175 225 250 300 50 SB3N 140 400 500 225 300 350 400 50 SB4N 180 500 300 400 450 500 ne 50 SC1N 210 18 600 18 350 450 18 500 600 50 SC2N 260 700 450 500 600 700 50 SC3N 320 800 500 700
332. on see Figure 85 on page 159 Start Options Motor Winding Heater Function The motor winding heater can be activated after a valid Start command is received After a valid Start command is received the activation of the heating function can be performed by either programming the Heating Time parameter to a non zero value or by configuring a terminal block input to Motor Heater and activating that input prior to the Start command The Motor Winding Heater function will continue for the specified time or until the Motor Heater Input is deactivated at which time the motor will start based on the prior Start command signal The Motor Winding Heater function will be disabled if the Heater Level parameter is set to zero the Heater Time is set to zero or the Input is inactive or not configured at the time of the Start command To program the Motor Winding Heater function use the File Setup Group Basic parameter list to configure the motor and the majority of the Start Stop functions See any of the previous programming sections for details based on the selected Start mode The two key parameters Heating Time and Heating Level however are in the File Setup Group Starting parameter list See Figure 88 on page 175 for a basic understanding of accessing the Starting group See the table below for details concerning the Heating Time and Heating Level parameters Parameter Option default Heating Time The amount of time the Motor Windi
333. on Diagram Bypass Contactor for an AC Drive aF ar OL 3 Phase VFD Input Power _ rH VFD Branch l Protection xe ox l Li T1 2 L2 3 T2 4 F L3 5 T3 6 S IC smc 50 IC Controller Mechanical interlock required Customer supplied Many variable speed drives VFDs are rated 150 full load amperes FLA Since the SMC 50 can be used for 600 FLA starting separate branch circuit protection may be required Overload protection is included as a standard feature of the SMC 50 28 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Motor Winding Heater Capability Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 SMC 50 Internal Motor Winding Heater Function The SMC 50 motor winding heater function provides low levels of current to each of the motor windings to preheat a cold motor before starting To avoid stressing a single motor winding the SMC 50 cycles the current to the three motor phases This feature provides a programmable heating level heating time and terminal block input The motor winding heater can be activated after a valid start command is received After a valid start the activation of the heating function can be performed by programming the Heating Time parameter to a non zero value or by configuring a terminal block input to Motor Heater and activating
334. on Table 154 Parameter X 1 X 9 Min Max Enum Sans Read Write Number Name Units Description Default Text P Access m Displays information about the operational status of the 150 SMB Parameter XI Module Status 0 1 1 A Configuration Option I O Module R Ready Bit 0 Ready Bit Set 1 indicates the module is ready for operation R X 2 Rotary Switch 1 0 15 0 A NA Displays the numeric position of Rotary Switch 1 Initial Torque R X 3 Rotary Switch 2 0 15 0 A NA Displays the numeric position of Rotary Switch 2 Current Limit R X 4 Rotary Switch 3 0 15 0 A NA Displays the numeric position of Rotary Switch 3 Ramp Time R X 5 Rotary Switch 4 0 15 0 NA NA Displays the numeric position of Rotary Switch 4 Stop Time R X 6 Rotary Switch 5 0 15 0 A NA Displays the numeric position of Rotary Switch 5 Motor FLC R gt Displays the Device Config DIP switch bit status X 7 Device Config 0 255 0 NA NA 1 Sw ON amp 2 Sw OFF R Displays the Protect Config DIP switch bit status X 8 Protect Config 0 255 0 NA NA 1 Sw ON amp 2 Sw OFF R X9 10 Config 0 255 0 NA NA Displays the 10 Config DIP switch bit status 1 Sw ON amp 2 Sw OFF R x indicates the Contro 276 Module port number in which the 150 SM6 Option Modul e is installed Allowable ports 7 8 or 9 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014
335. onduction bit 8 At Speed 0 Not Full Voltage Applied Hare Start lsolate Contactor Enabled bit 9 Start Isolate 0 Start lsolate Contactor Disabled eat Bypass Contactor Enabled bit 10 Bypass 0 Bypass Contactor Disabled bit 11 Read indicates that the SMC is ready to accept a Start command The T y device is not faulted or in the process of stopping starting or jogging bit 12 13 Reserved Always 0 bit 14 Input 1 Control Module Input 1 Status 1 Input Closed bit 15 Input 2 Control Module Input 2 Status 1 Input Closed 0 2 Line Provides the user the ability to select the type of motor connection the 44 Motor Config 2 Delta SMC is being applied to Line or Delta It can also be set to Auto R W Auto Config and the SMC will determine the motor connection 0 1 Line Displays the type of motor connection the SMC is configured to 45 Motor Connection 0 Delta operate with R 0 700 5 A 46 Line Voltage Volt 480 NA The Line voltage applied to the SMC L1 L2 L3 terminals R W 0 10000 Enables the user the ability to enter the rated torque of the motor as 47 Rated Torque Nm 10 NA read from the motor specifications typically nameplate This is R W required for proper torque mode starts and stops Enables the user the ability to enter the rated motor speed as read 48 Rated Speed RPM a T00 S00 T500 1800 from the motor specifications typically nameplate This is required R W i for
336. or Therm Usage 52 B A Maximum Torque 19 M B A Trip 53 B A Current Limit Level _ Time to OL 20 M B A Reset 54 B A Time Kickstart 21 M B A Time to PM 55 B A Level 22 M B A Starts to PM 56 B A 1 nput 23 M B A Total Starts 57 B A 2 24 M B A 1 58 B A Starting Mode 2 25 M B A 2 59 B A Ramp Time 2 26 M B A Start Time 3 60 B A Initial Torque 2 27 M B A 4 61 B A Maximum Torque 2 28 M B A 5 62 B A Current Limit Level 2 29 M B A 1 63 B A Time 2 Kickstart 30 M B A 2 64 B A Level 2 31 M B A Peak Current 3 65 B A a Mode top 32 M B A 4 66 B A Time 33 M B A 5 67 B A Backspin Timer 34 M B A Motor Speed M B A Access Level see Parameter Access Level using Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 the HIM 177 Chapter 5 Programming Table 74 SMC 50 Parameter Linear List Parameter 68 135 Number Name Number Name 68 A Pump Pedestal 02 B A F Lvl 69 B A Braking Current 103 B A F Dly Overvolt c 70 B A Load Type 104 B A A Lvl 71 B A High Eff Brake 105 B A ADly 72 B A Slow Speed 106 B A F Lvl 73 B A Slow Brake Current 107 B A F Dly Volt Unbal o 74 Reserved 108 B A Alvl 75 B A Overload Class 109 B
337. or more solid state power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage the installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 auxiliary contacts configured to NORMAL S Z06 External Overload all devices The SMC 50 can also be used with an external overload in conjunction with the external bypass In this configuration the external bypass contactor must be fully rated to the motor Hp kW and FLA See Figure 67 on page 93 92 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Operating Modes Chapter 3 Figure 67 Wiring Diagram for all Cat No 150 S Devices with Bypass and External Overload Circuit Protective Device 3 Phase AC oO Line Power Bypass Contactor BC 0 O Overload Customer supplied Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor See the Isolation Contactor Applications for details Bypass mu
338. ors This can be accomplished by creating turns or coils in the power connections to the capacitors 24 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 e 250V 150 mm 6 in diameter coil 6 loops e 480 690V 150 mm 6 in diameter coil 8 loops Figure 10 and Figure 11 show a typical system wiring diagram using PFCCs IMPORTANT DO NOT mount the coils directly on top of one another Doing so will cause a cancelling effect To avoid parts acting as induction heaters DO mount the coils on insulated supports away from metal parts If an isolation contactor is used DO place the capacitors in front of the contactor For further instructions consult the PFC capacitor vendor Figure 10 PFCC Li 1 T1 2 3 Phase L2 3 T2 4 Input Power L3 5 T3 6 Branch O SMC 50 Protection Controller 0 Power Factor Correction Capacitors Customer Supplied Figure 11 PFC Capacitors amp Contactor 3 Phase Input Power Branch SMC 50 Protection Controller 0 Power Factor Correction Capacitors Customer Supplied Energize for 1 2 of a second before starting command to SMC 50 Open contactor after the stopping method is complete Alternate The alternate method can be accomplished with an Aux Output configured for UTS up to speed Energize the contactor after motor is up to speed Open
339. osition Setting Value FLC Position Setting Value FLC 0 200 8 360 default 1 220 9 380 2 240 A 400 3 260 B 420 4 280 C 440 5 300 D 460 6 320 E 480 7 340 F 500 Table 65 S3 Ramp Time Configuration Starting Controller Parameter 50 Starting Ramp Time Starting Ramp Time Position Setting seconds Position Setting seconds 0 0 1 8 16 1 2 9 18 2 4 A 20 3 6 B 22 4 8 C 24 5 10 default D 26 6 12 E 28 7 14 F 30 Table 66 S4 Stop Time Configuration Controller Parameter 66 Position Setting Stop Time seconds Position Setting Stop Time seconds O 0 Coast to Stop default 8 16 1 2 9 18 2 4 A 20 3 6 B 22 4 8 G 24 5 10 D 26 6 12 E 28 7 14 F 30 When the braking STOP MODE is selected device configuration bank switch 3 and 4 the controller multiplies the selected stop time by ten Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 141 Chapter 5 Programming Table 67 S5 Motor FLC Configuration Controller Parameter 78 FLC 00 FLC 00 Position Setting of controller s max Position Setting of controller s max 0 40 default 8 72 1 44 9 76 2 48 A 80 3 52 B 84 4 56 C 88 5 60 D 92 6 64 E 96 7 68 F 100 Since a set of switches do not provide the resolution to enter all possible FLC combinations like a keypad switch S5 a
340. otor is powered down cooling This is enabled using the SMC 50 s real time clock RTC function When control power is lost the SMC 50 saves the power down thermal level and time Then when power is reapplied the SMC 50 reads the current time power down time and power down thermal level From this data the SMC 50 calculates the new thermal information for the overload Overload Alarm In addition to the Overload Fault an Overload Alarm is also available The desired value or level of the alarm is set up with Overload Alarm Level Overload A Lvl Parameter 83 which can be set from 0 to 100 When the MTU value reaches the set percentage of the thermal trip level then the alarm becomes active When the MTU value falls below the set percentage of the thermal trip level the alarm becomes inactive Motor Thermal Usage Mtr Therm Usage Parameter 18 provides the current motor thermal usage value This parameter reads from 0 to 200 where 100 corresponds to a fault condition Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 109 Chapter4 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Figure 76 Overload Trip Curves Class 5 Class 10 Class 15 _ 10000 r _ 10000 10000 100 100 1000 100 Approximate Trip Time in seconds Approximate Trip Time in seconds Approximate Trip Time in seconds 0 1 1 d 1 2 345 10 1 2345 10
341. ould be performed A 52 F A Fault condition A Phase SCR which indicates that Power Quality B 53 IN Y JY ihe sGHeDionot B Phase SCR C 54 properly firing its C Phase SCR Power Quality F A Indicates a high voltage based total harmonic 55 Y JY JY THD V distortion level Power Quality F A Indicates a high current based total harmonic 56 IY JY JY THD distortion level f F A Indicates any change to the SMC 50 parameter Config Change 5 N IY JY configuration F A Indicates the value of Ground Fault Current goes above the user defined fault alarm level Ground Fault 58 Y Y Y NOTE A 150 SM2 Ground Fault PTC Feedback Module and 825 CBCT Core Balanced Ground Fault Sensor are required to configure this Fault Alarm F A Indicates the embedded motor PTC sensing device is tripped closed due to a motor overtemperature Motor PTC 59 N _ Y _ Y condition NOTE A 150 SM2 Ground Fault PTC Feedback Module is required to configure this Fault Alarm Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Diagnostics Chapter 9 HRE TAE g s a g alz t Fault Alarm S 2 Description Code Name c D e amp F A Fault amp Alarm A Alarm F Fault F Built in Power Pole PTC Temperature Sensor is used to measure power pole temperature A fault will occur Power Pole PTC 60
342. ower line Disable the fault alarm feature e A programmed setting or time value is incorrect for the application e A leading PF is abnormally under the Determine the cause of the Over PF Leading typical value less inductance or Modify the programmed fault alarm parameters to more capacitance has been better suit the application Ovr PF Lead 66 Running introduced to the power line Disable the fault alarm feature e A programmed setting or time value is incorrect for the application e Abnormally high reactive MVAR Repair replace the condition causing the high power consumed by the motor MVAR MVAR Over 67 Running e Programmed settings are incorrect Modify the programmed fault alarm parameters to for the application better suit the application Disable the fault alarm feature e Abnormally reduced reactive Repair replace the condition causing the reduced MVAR power consumed by the MVAR MVAR Under 68 Running motor Modify the programmed fault alarm parameters to e Programmed settings are incorrect better suit the application for the application Disable the fault alarm feature 234 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Troubleshooting Chapter 10 Table 111 Fault Display Explanation Display Fault Code Fault Enabled Possible Causes Possible Solutions e Battery reading is below the e Replace battery CR2032 as soon as possible ac
343. p of the buffer number 1 for the HIM or number 1 1 for the software configuration tool The Fault Buffer also stores the date and time that the Fault occurred NOTE The date and time information is obtained from the SMC 50 s RTC Ensure the RTC is set correctly Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 135 Chapter4 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions The five most recent Faults are stored in Parameter 138 through Parameter 142 This stored Fault history in the parameter list can be accessed by any networked device The Fault date and time are not available from the parameters list Table 59 Fault Buffer amp Fault Storage Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Name Fault Code Access Units 138 Fault 1 139 Fault 2 140 Fault 3 0 10000 R 141 Fault 4 142 Fault 5 As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Alarm Event Buffer amp Alarm Event Storage Parameters In addition to storing buffering Alarm Data the Alarm Buffer is used to store several key controller events The type of events stored includes Event Alarm Code Start 71 Slow Speed 72 Stop Option 73 Coast 74 Clear Fault 75 a Fault has been cleared Fault 76 Parameter Change 77 change to any Parameter occurred The Alarm Buffer can be accessed via the Diagnostic screen of a 20 HIM A6 20 HIM C65S or from the Device Fault Alarm button of Connec
344. pe 1 amp EN 60947 4 2 Type 1 for Inside the Delta Connected Motors Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than the listed maximum RMS symmetrical amperes UL 600V maximum IEC 600V maximum 246 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Specifications Appendix A SCPD Performance O Table 123 SCCR List High Capacity Fault Type 1 Coordination Motor f Catalog Current Class J or Class L Fuse Inverse Time Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breaker eo Number Rating A Max High Amps 480V 65kA Maximum Penal Typical Max 140U Max Catalog Rating Plug Fault Frame Amps Number 600V kA 150 SB1N 90 100 150 200 M 350 140U M6D3 D35 A 150 SB2N 110 175 225 300 140U M6D3 D30 A 150 SB3N 140 225 300 400 140U M6D3 D40 A 150 SB4N 180 300 400 400 140U M6D3 D40 A tine 150 SC1N 210 350 450 M 600 140U M6D3 D60 A 150 SC2N 260 450 500 700 140U M6D3 D70 A 150 SC3N 320 500 700 800 140U M6D3 D80 A 150 SD1N 361 601 800 N 1000 140U N6L3 E12 140U NRP3 E10 150 SD2N 420 700 800 1200 140U N6L3 E12 140U NRP3 E12 150 SD3N 520 800 1000 1200 140U N6L3 E12 140U NRP3 E12 150 SB1N 155 65 250 300 M 450 140U M6D3 D45 A 150 SB2N 190 300 400 500 140U M6D3 D50 A 150
345. peration the following parameters are provided for user adjustment The Basic parameter set can be accessed with the HIM see Figure 88 on page 175 Parameter Option default Motor Config Setting for the motor configuration Line Connected Wye or Inside the Delta Line Delta NOTE In the AUTO Detect default selection the controller will automatically check the motor configuration Auto Detect Line Voltage Select the value of line voltage being used in the system The correct line voltage value must be entered for the voltage protection functions to work 0 700V 480V properly Starting Mode This mode must be programmed for Torque Ramp Torque Ramp OOO Ramp Time Programs the time period that the SMC 50 will ramp the output voltage from the Starting Torque Value to the Programmed Max Torque Value 0 1000 10 seconds Initial Torque NOT used for a Torque Ramp Start 0 90 70 LRT Current Limit Level Limits the current supplied to the motor throughout Ramp Start cycle NOTE Enter a value so as to limit the current but not so low as to inhibit the start cycle he Torque 50 600 350 FLC O Stop Mode Programs the desired Stop Mode NOTE The mode of stopping does not need to match the starting mode e g a Soft Start can have a stop mode programmed for Coast Linear Stop or SMB there is no Current Limit Stop or Torque Stop mode Coast Soft Stop Linea
346. ping 0 13 parameters 1 initiates a start as set up b the start parameters X2 Input 1 0 NA Slow Speed Runs motor in slow speed mode as set up by slow speed parameters High R W Dual Ramp npu Termina A1 0 use starting mode 1 1 use starting mode 2 OL Select nput Terminal A1 0 use Motor Overload Class 1 1 use Motor Overload Class 2 Faul A fault condition is forced if Input Terminal A1 1 Fault NC A fault condition is forced if Input Terminal A1 0 Clear Fault Clear a fault from Input Terminal A1 High Emerg Run Aon motor to run in emergency run mode if asserted from Input Terminal does not start motor High Motor Heater Runs motor heating algorithm if asserted at Input Terminal A1 High Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 277 Appendix B Parameter Information Number Name Min Mem Units Enum Text Description Read Write Default Access 2 Allows the user to select the operation of Input Terminal A2 Option Input 2 on the 150 SM4 Digital 1 0 Option Module Disable Disable the input ignores any assertion to Input A2 Terminal Start nitiate a start as set up by the start parameters at Input Terminal A2 High Coast nitiates a coast stop no current to motor at Input Terminal A2 Low Stop Option nee rae ver as set up by the
347. played AB Stopped 0 Amps ESC VEER 3 Use the up or down arrow until the noted port number of the option module is displayed The HIM will display the HOST PARM file screen and indicate the option module port controller number below the AB logo Ensure the correct port number is displayed aoe St d AUTO before modifying the amp 0 eee EO option module parameter 7 HOST PARAM Linear List 09 File Group Changed Parameters v 4 Ensure the correct port number is displayed then configure the parameters using either the Linear List or File Group selection Parameters can be restored to factory defaults using its respective Parameter Management parameter or the Set Defaults function from the HIM s memory screen Ensure the correct port number of the device to be restored is displayed before restoring NOTE For additional information using the FOLDERS function of the HIM see the 20 HIM A6 User Manual publication 20HIM UM001 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 183 Chapter 5 Programming 150 SM4 Digital 1 0 Option Module In addition to the SMC 50 two on board 24V DC input and two auxiliary relay outputs the 150 SM4 Digital I O Option Module has four 120 240V AC inputs and three auxiliary relay outputs These inputs and outputs can be used for control functions Configure 120 240V AC Inputs NOTE Before proceeding with
348. plished by trial and error but should always allow for some coast time Setting the Stop Time for too long of a time period can result in braking current to be applied to a stopped motor and will likely result in overload trips Preset Slow Speed amp Slow Speed with Braking The Slow Speed Mode can be used in applications that require a jog for general purpose positioning Preset Slow Speed Parameter 72 provides operation from 1 15 forward or 1 15 reverse of the motor base speed Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 87 Chapter 3 Operating Modes An SMC 50 control input must be configured for Slow Speed to initiate a slow speed operation A second input must be configured for Coast or Stop Option The Slow Speed operating mode requires motor tuning to function properly Tuning can be forced manually or it will otherwise be performed automatically the first time the motor is started See Motor Tuning on page 73 To provide more precise stopping from a slow speed operation braking from slow speed can also be configured using Slow Brake Current Parameter 73 The maximum allowable brake current is 350 FLC A value of 0 default applies no braking and a motor coast to stop results and slow speed is terminated ATTENTION Slow speed running is not intended for continuous operation due to reduced motor cooling Figure 64 Preset Slow Speed 100 mo 2 N 5 Forward fC 4
349. quency Fault or Alarm levels if the line power frequency falls below 45 Hz or above 66 Hz the SMC 50 will enter a wait state stop and will not start or will not start if already stopped until the frequency returns within the 45 Hz to 66 Hz range Table 42 High amp Low Line Power Frequency Parameter List Name 29 Freq High F Lvl 45 66 63 Hz 225 Freq High F Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS 30 Freq Low F Lvl 45 66 47 Hz 227 Freq Low F Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS R W 131 Freq High A Lvl 45 66 63 Hz 226 Freq High A Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS 132 Freq Low A Lvl 45 66 47 Hz 228 Freq Low A Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Stall Protection Fault amp Alarm When a motor stalls stops during its starting sequence the motor heats up very rapidly after some permissible stall time the motor reaches the temperature limit of its insulation Rapid stall detection during the starting sequence can extend the motor s life as well as minimize the potential damage and loss of production Stall Fault Code 24 When the SMC 50 is instructed to start a motor and the programmed start Ramp Time has completed before the motor is Up to Speed UTS the start sequence will continue until one of the following occurs e motor reaches full speed Stall Fault Code 24 occurs e indefinitely if the stall fault is disabled or e until a motor overload or SC
350. r the torque level at which the ramp begins 0 90 70 LRT Current Limit Level Limits the current supplied to the motor throughout the Soft Start cycle NOTE Enter a value so as to limit the current but not so low as to inhibit the start cycle 50 600 350 FLC Stop Mode Programs the desired Stop Mode NOTE The mode of stopping does not need to match the starting mode e g a Soft Start can have a stop mode programmed for Coast Linear Stop or SMB there is no Current Limit Stop or Torque Stop mode Coast Soft Stop Linear Speed Pump Stop SMB Ext Brake Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Parameter Chapter 5 Option default ount of time desired to ramp from full to zero voltage for e will depend on the Stop Time Programs the am Soft Linear and Pump Stop mode The actual ramp stop tim stopping mode selected and load inertia 0 999 seconds e to a change in status Input 1 Programs the desired operation of the Control Modu Start Coast of Input 1 wired to control terminal 11 24V DC Default Disable Start Coast Stop Option Start Input 2 Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input 2 wired to control terminal 10 24V DC Default Disable Coast Start Stop Slow Speed Dual Ramp OL Select Fault Fault NC Clear Fault Emerg Run Motor Heat
351. r the Overload function must be disabled via Parameter 230 Motor Fault En and separate overload relays must be provided for each speed Multi Motor Applications The SMC 50 will operate with more than one motor connected to it Motors should be mechanically coupled To size the controller add the total nameplate amperes of all of the connected loads The stall and jam features should be turned off Separate overloads are still required to meet the National Electric Code NEC requirements IMPORTANT The SMC 50 s built in overload protection cannot be used in multi motor applications Disable the SMC 50 Overload function using Parameter 230 Motor Fault En Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 27 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Figure 13 Multi Motor Application Li T1 2 BDE 3 Phase Mot L2 3 T2 4 ae i aor i Input Power A L3 5 T3 6 BE Branch Overload Relay ranc i Protection ae 0 L PE Se PE O L Customer supplied Disable the SMC 50 Overload function using Parameter 230 Motor Fault En SMC 50 Controller as a Bypass to an AC Drive By using the SMC 50 controller in a typical application as shown in Figure 14 a soft start characteristic can be provided in the event that an AC drive is non operational IMPORTANT A controlled acceleration can be achieved with this scheme Figure 14 Typical Applicati
352. r C mee IG f 17 Power Factor Energy Savings The energy saver function only applies during light motor load situations at which time the SMC 50 reduces current to the motor and thereby saves energy When in energy saver operation the Energy Savings status bit is set In addition Energy Savings Parameter 15 indicates the percentage energy savings Parameter 17 Power Factor should be monitored and recorded when the motor is running at no light load and at full heavy load The power factor value where the controller enters Energy Saver mode is determined by setting Parameter 193 Energy Saver to a value between the no light load and full heavy load recorded values Table 84 Energy Saver Mode Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Name Minimum Maximum Default Access Units 15 Energy Savings 0 100 R 17 Power Factor 1 00 1 00 R 193 Energy Saver 0 00 1 00 R W NOTE Set Parameter 193 0 to disable Energy Saver mode Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 195 Chapter 6 196 Metering Elapsed Time The SMC 50 keeps a log of the total accumulated hours the controlled motor has been running via the Elapsed Time metering parameter The Elapsed Time meter value is updated every 10 minutes and stored at power down accurate to 1 6 of an hour The Elapsed Time meter accumulates to 50 000 hours of operation and can be reset to zero via the Meter Reset param
353. r FLC range Table 11 825 Converter Selection Motor FLC Range Catalog Number 30 180 A 825 MCM180 181 520A 825 MCM20 User supplied current transformers with 5 A secondary are required See Figure 26 Figure 26 Current Transformer Connection to Converter Module Current Transformer Converter Module Another current transformer connects L2 and T2 and another connects L3 and T3 The converter module Cat No 825 MCM20 must be used in these applications To enable the 150 SM2 External CT function the CT Enable parameter in the 150 SM2 must be set to Enable and the 825 MCM hardware must be correctly configured When the 150 SM2 External CT function is enabled the external CT is calibrated by the SMC 50 for scaling phase shift and inversion during the SMC 50 tuning cycle The tuning cycle will automatically occur before the first start after the controller installation after a Load Default parameter occurs or when the user forces tuning of the SMC 50 through the Force Tuning parameter or the control module s Hold to Reset button The scaling is displayed relative to the unit s rating where 1 00 indicates that the external CTs and the internal CTs are scaled the same Figure 27 shows the connection of the 825 MCM Converter to the SMC 50 s 150 SM2 Option Module Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Figure 27 Conver
354. r Fault Enabl Motor Restart Enable THD V A Delay Alarm 1 Underload F Level otor Fault Enable ead PF Level Alarm 2 Underload F Delay Motor Alarm Enable Lead PF F Delay Current THD BA Alarm 3 Underload A Level ait eee Lenape Lead PF A Level Motor Fault Enable Alarm 4 Underload A Delay ae ov F eee Lead PF A Delay Motor Alarm Enable Alarm 5 EE NMvvaits Ov A Levat Lead PF F Level Motor Restart Enable _ Restart BA Undervoltage BA watts OV A Delay eee PE A ee IAD e Teva Motor Restart Enable aaeain ea evel THD F Del ec lb UD unELevel flead PF ADelay THD1 A Level Starter Restart Enable Starter Restart Enable Mwatts Un A Level z THD TA Delay E fee i Undervolt F Level Mwatts Un A Delay Lagging PF BA y Undervolt F Delay Motor Fault Enable Line EWS EE ES Locked Rotor BA Undervolt A Level Reactive Power BA Motor Alarm Enable Starter Fault Enable Undervolt A Delay Motor Fault Enable Motor Restart Enable Starter Alarm Enable Motor Fault Enable Motor Alarm Enable Lag PF F Level Starter Restart Enable _ Motor Alarm Enable Overvoltage BA Motor Restart Enable L g PF F Delay Frequency High F Level Motor Restart Enable Lag PF A Level Frequency High F Delay Locked Rotor F Level Starter Fault Enable MVAR Ov F Level Locked Rotor F Dela Lag PF A Delay Frequency High A Level y Starter Alarm Enable MVAR OV F Delay g Locked Rotor A Level Lag PF F Level Frequency High A Delay Starter Rest
355. r STOP A customer supplied jumper is required to enable the controller 1 0 operation Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation e g the Isolation Contactor used in this diagram is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor Configure Aux 1 to NORMAL using Parameter 172 NORMAL Aux 1 contact will close to energize the IC coil with the START push button and will open to de energize it when the stop maneuver initiated by the stop push button is complete NOTE In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage the installation of an isolation contactor as shown in this diagram or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 57 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Figure 39 For Isolation Contactor Applications AC Inputs a A Circuit
356. r Speed Pump Stop SMB Ext Brake Stop Time Programs the amount of time desired to ramp from full to zero voltage for Soft Linear and Pump Stop mode The actual ramp stop time will depend on the stopping mode selected and load inertia 0 999 seconds Input 1 Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input 1 wired to control terminal 11 24V DC Default Start Coast Input 2 Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status Disable Start Coast Stop Option Start Coast Start Stop Slow Speed Dual Ramp OL Select Fault Fault NC Clear of Input 2 wired to control terminal 10 24V DC Default Disable Fault Emerg Run Motor Heater Aux 1 Config Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact 1 wired across control terminal 4 and 5 Normal UTS Fault NOTE Relay Operational Options e g ON and OFF delay etc are provided in the Alarm Ext Bypass File Setup Group 1 0 selection sequence See Figure 85 on page 159 Ext Brake Aux Control Aux 2 Config Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact 2 wired across control terminal 6 and 7 NOTE Relay Operational Options e g ON and OFF delay etc are provided in the File Setup Group 1 0 selection sequence See Figure 85 on page 159 Network 1 Network 2 Network 3 Network 4 Overload Class Requi
357. r full load current rating FLC and Ramp Time Parameter 50 which is user adjustable from 0 0 1000 0 seconds For current limit the Ramp Time is the time the controller will hold the current limit level until switching to full voltage If the controller senses that the motor has reached the UTS condition during the current limit starting mode the current limit ramp will end As with Soft Start the UTS level can be modified to account for load or motor characteristics If Ramp Time has expired and UTS is not achieved the SMC S50 will hold the current limit until UTS is reached a Motor Overload Trip or Starter Overtemp Fault occurs Kickstart is also available with current limit Figure 55 provides a graphical depiction of a Current Limit Start Table 16 provides a list of Current Limit Start parameters Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Operating Modes Chapter 3 Figure 55 Current Limit Start 600 Current Limit Percent Full Load Current oa 0 lt 4 Start gt Time in Seconds Table 16 Current Limit Start Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Name Minimum Maximum Default Access Units 53 Cur Limit Level 50 600 350 FLC 54 Kickstart Time 0 0 2 0 SEC 55 Kickstart Level 0 0 90 R W LRT 182 Start Delay 0 0 30 SEC 186 UTS Level 0 100 75 78 Motor FLC 1 0 2200 0 Amps Full Voltage Start This st
358. range fault Bit 8 Input 2 Under Alarm n2 Undr Alm Bit Set Input 2 Underrange Alarm Bit 9 Output 1 Shorted Out 1 Shorted Bit Set indicates Output 1 is shorted Bit 10 Output 1 Open Out 1 Open Bit Set indicates Output 1 is an open circuit Bit 11 Output 2 Shorted Out 2 Shorted Bit Set indicates Output 2 is shorted Bit 12 Output 2 Open Out 2 Open Bit Set indicates Output 2 is an open circuit Bits 13 15 Reserved 60 Hz Selects a 60 Hz filter on Input 1 and Input 2 X 2 Sample Rate 0 1 0 NA R W 250 Hz Selects a 250 Hz filter on Input 1 and Input 2 X 3 Input 1 Scaled oo 3000 0 NA NA Input 1 scaled to user units R X 4 Input 1 Analog ri 21 000 yo NA Input 1 in electrical units volts or milliamps R 282 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Parameter Information Appendix B Number Name Mine Units Enum Text Description Read Writ Default Access X 5 Input 1 Percent ue NA NA Input 1 as a percentage of configured range R X 6 Input 1 Raw 32768 32768 0 NA NA Input 1 unscaled R 10V Input 1 set to voltage mode with range of 10V to 10V 10V Input 1 set to voltage mode with range of OV to 10V 5V Input 1 set to voltage mode with range
359. re 88 on page 175 for detailed information Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 171 Chapter 5 Programming Motor Protection 172 Parameter Option default Slow Speed Allow selection of the best Slow Speed value for the application NOTE The plus or minus sign determines the motor direction 15 15 10 Slow Brake Current The desired brake current to be applied from the programmed Slow Speed 0 350 FLC NOTE A value of zero results in Coast to Stop Slow Speed Reference Gain Provides the ability to adjust the flux reference while 0 1 2 00 1 00 the motor is running 1 2 00 1 Slow Speed Transient Gain Provides the ability to adjust the control reference 0 1 2 0 1 00 when transitioning between slow speed and any starting mode POS Accu Stop This function combines the benefits of SMB and Preset Slow Speed features For general purpose positioning the Accu Stop function provides a brake from full speed to the preset slow speed setting then a brake from Slow Speed or a Coast to Stop The Accu Stop function is enabled whenever a control input is configured for Stop and another control input is configured for Slow Speed the Stop Mode is configured for SMB and Slow Speed is configured When the Slow Speed Input is enabled in this configuration a SMB to Slow Speed occurs and Slow Speed continues until the Slow Speed Input is enabled To program Accu Stop with the
360. re solid state power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage the installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL Configure both In1 Input 1 Parameter 56 and In2 Input 2 Parameter 57 to Disable 60 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Installation amp Wiring Chapter 2 Figure 42 For Single Speed Reversing Applications DC Control FWD T1 2 L1 1 e Ho e Area SMC 50 Soft Fast Acting SCR Ircul Caner Fuses optional ea 3 Phase AC T2 4 L2 3 e if 1 Line Power T3 6 L3 5 l Reversing Contactor REV it 120V 240V AC Control Transformer AES or AC Power Supply ine 9 o 1 OF E Stop OF R R o o Rev a At 1 Fwd OOH o Customer supplied 12 10 9 8 5 3 8 8 2 3 OH GY y 2 i o 9 2 9 Aux2 Aux1 2 8 Lu pe Control Module
361. red for motor protection Allows the user to select the time to trip for the built in Motor Overload This selection is based on the type of motor being used and the application it is being applied to 5 30 10 Service Factor Required for motor protection This programmed value is taken directly from the nameplate and used by the controller to determine the ultimate Overload Trip Current 0 01 1 99 1 15 Motor FLC Required for motor protection This programmed value is taken directly from the motor nameplate 1 2200 1 0 Amps Starting Torque Programmed initial or starting point for a Torque Ramp Start 0 300 100 RMT Max Torque Programmed end point for a Torque Ramp Start 0 300 250 RMT Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 165 Chapter 5 Programming Parameter Option default Rated Torque The actual rated torque of the motor being used in a Torque Ramp Start 0 10000 10 N m Rated Speed The actual rated speed of the motor used in the Torque Ramp Start 750 900 1500 1800 3500 3600 RPM o 4 6 Any auxiliary output configured for Aux Control using the AuxX Config parameter will be under control o Control Parameter 180 See Parameter 180 information for bit assignments 166 Delay Kicks under Kickst In add orque Ramp Starting requires that a Motor Tuning Cycle be performed The SMC 50 will d
362. rer configuration tools Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 123 Chapter4 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Apparent Power Protection MVA 124 Motor Under Power Reactive Negative Motor Generated Fault amp Alarm Motor Under Power Reactive Negative Fault Code 68 A Motor Under Power Reactive Negative Fault Fault Code 68 condition occurs when the Reactive Power being generated by the motor falls below a user defined level MVAR Un F Lvl Parameter 301 for the user defined time MVAR Un F Dly Parameter 302 This only occurs when the Reactive Power is negative The Motor Under Power Reactive Negative Fault is enabled or disabled using the MVAR Under bit in the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 Motor Under Power Reactive Negative Alarm In addition to the Motor Under Power Reactive Negative Fault a Motor Underpower Reactive Negative Alarm is also available This is set up exactly like the Fault using MVAR Un A Lvl Parameter 303 and MVAR Un A Dly Parameter 304 This Alarm is enabled or disabled using the MVAR Under bit in the Motor Alarm Enable Parameter 231 Table 50 Motor Underpower Reactive Negative Parameter List NameO 301 JMARUnFa 1000 000 f0 000 T SSS WAR 302 MVAR Un F Dly 0 1 99 0 RW SECS 303 MVAR Un ALvI 1000 000 0 000 MVAR 304 MVAR Un A Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools The SMC
363. res an external bypass contactor may be utilized See page 91 Power Wiring See the product nameplate or Table 4 for power lug termination information including e lug wire capacity e tightening torque requirement e lug kit Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 31 Chapter 2 32 Installation amp Wiring ATTENTION Failure of solid state power switching components can cause overheating due to a single phase condition in the motor To prevent injury or equipment damage the following is recommended Use an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker on the line side of the SMC 50 This device should be capable of interrupting the motor s lock rotor current Wire the isolation contactor s control relay to an auxiliary relay output contact on the SMC 50 This will achieve coordinated operation with the SMC 50 The auxiliary relay contact should be programmed for the normal condition See Chapter 5 Programming for additional information Line Connected Motors The SMC 50 can be connected to a line controlled motor see Figure 17 This type of motor typically has three leads The SMC 50 automatically detects the motor wiring configuration during the tuning process Since there is a small amount of leakage current passing through a non conducting SCR it is recommended that an Isolation Contactor IC be added to the circuit to provide galvanic isolation of the motor and final electrome
364. retry process The Retry Counter is cleared whenever the controller receives a valid Stop command In addition Restart Delay Time Parameter 134 allows the user to define a time delay from when the Fault event occurred until a Restart Attempt can be effective NOTE This delay is not used with an Overload Fault Instead the restart attempt will occur when the Mtr Therm Usage Parameter 18 falls below the OL Reset Level Parameter 80 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 137 Chapter4 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Table 61 Auto Restart from Fault Parameter List Parameter Parameter Bit Bit Number Name Fault Name Assignment Access Units 135 Strtr Restart En Volt Umbal 0 Bit 0 Disabled Overvoltage 1 Bit 1 Enabled Undervoltage 2 Phase Rev 3 AII Disabled as Line Loss 7 R W Default Open Gate 5 Config Change 6 Freq 7 THD V 8 264 Motor Restart En Overload 0 Bit 0 Disabled Underload 1 Bit 1 Enabled MWatts Over 2 MWatts Under 3 AII Disabled as MVAR Over 7 Default MVAR Under 5 MVAR Over 6 MVAR Under 7 MVA Under 8 MVA Over 9 Curr Imbal 10 Jam 11 Stall 12 RAW Starts Hr 13 PM Hours 14 PM Starts 15 Power Qual 16 Open Load 17 THD 18 Lead PF Un 19 Lead PF Ov 20 Lag PF Un 21 Lag PF Ov 22 Locked Rotor 23 As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Table 62 Auto Restart Parameter List Parameter Number
365. revent potential persona equipment damage the installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the li SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 Aux contacts configured to NORMAL Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 on fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is configured for COAST or STOP Circuit Fast Acting SCR Protective Fuses optional Device 3 Phase AC O Line Power D 120 240V AC Control Transformer state controller stopped some form of upstream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the and the 150 SM2 provide current based protective feedback features including overload Only the cable provided with the he function he bypass injury or ne side of the 63 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Figure 45 Hand OFF Auto Control with Start Stop Push Buttons AC Control T1 2 LIA Hr n Circuit SMC 50 Soft Fast Acting SCR tart Protective M a a Fuses optional Device 3 Phase AC oo 1 Line Power T3 6 L35 120V 240V AC Control Transformer L or AC Power Supply ie a
366. rmation Enables the Gain used to adjusted Contact RA Technica ser to enter Slow Speed Transfer Gain value SS Trans adjust slow speed operation This parameter is rarely Suppor for further information R W 309 Input Status 0 65535 0 Displays he status of all the digital inputs for the SMC 50 nput 1 Bit 0 splays status of Control Mod e Input 1 nput 2 Bit 1 splays status of Control Mod e Input 2 nput 7 1 Module Inpu 1 e Port 7 150 SM4 Option nput 7 2 Bit 3 Module Inpu Di Di Bit 2 Displays status of Control Mod e Displays status of Control Mod e 2 e Port 7 150 SM4 Option nput 7 3 Bit 4 Module Inpu Displays status o Contro 3 Module Port 7 150 SM4 Option nput 7 4 Bit 5 Module Inpu Displays status o Contro 4 Module Port 7 150 SM4 Option nput 8 1 Bit 6 Displays sta Module Inpu 1 us of Control Mod le Port 8 150 SM4 Option nput 8 2 Bit 7 Module Inpu Displays status o Contro 2 odule Port 8 150 SM4 Option nput 8 3 Bit 8 Module Inpu Displays status o Contro 3 odule Port 8 150 SM4 Option nput 8 4 Bit 9 Module Inpu Displays status o Contro 4 odule Port 8 150 SM4 Option nput 9 1 Bit 10 Displays status of Control Module Inpu
367. rom Input 1 Terminal 11 g does not start motor High Motor Heater Run motor heating algorithm if asserted from Input 1 Terminal 11 High Allows the user to select the operation of Terminal 10 Option Input 2 on the control module Disable Disable the input ignores any assertion to Input 2 Terminal 10 Start Initiate a start as set up by the start parameters at Input 2 Terminal 10 High Coast Initiates a coast stop no current to motor at Input 2 Terminal 10 Low Stop Option Initiates a stop maneuver as set up by the stopping parameters at Input 2 Low If Input 2 0 Stops motor Start Coast 1 Initiate a start as set up by the start parameters Start Sto If Input 2 0 Initiate a stop maneuver as set up by stopping parameters P Initiate a start as set up by the start parameters 57 Input 2 a Slow Speed Runs motor in slow speed mode as set up by slow speed parameters High R W If Input 2 0 Use Starting Mode 1 Dual Ramp Use Starting Mode 2 If Input 2 0 User Motor Overload Class 1 OL Select Use Motor Overload Class 2 Faul A fault condition is forced if Input 2 1 Fault NC A fault condition is forced if Input 2 0 Clear Fault Clear a fault from Input 2 High Emerg Run Allow motor to run in emergency run mode if asserted on Input 2 does not start motor High Motor Heater Run motor heating algorithm if asserted at Input 2 High 256 Rockwell Automation Publication 150
368. rrent 0 12 mA 120V 0 24 mA 240V Electrically held closed Table 119 Control 1 0 Wiring Terminals O Terminal Style M3 Screw Clamp Terminal Wire Size 0 2 2 5 mm 24 14 AWG Terminal Type Removable Wire Strip Length 7 0 mm 0 27 in Screw Terminal Torque 0 8 N m 7 0 Ib in Maximum Torque 0 8 N m 7 0 Ib in Applies to Control Module Standard 1 0 and 150 SM Expansion Module Terminals 150 SM2 150 SM3 150 SM4 Terminals Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 243 AppendixA Specifications Table 120 Cat No 150 SM4 Optional Digital Control Input Output Ratings Type UL CSA NEMA IEC 150 SM4 Optional Digital Control Inputs Terminals A1 amp A2 Normal Operating Voltage 100 240V AC Operating Voltage Range 85V 264V AC 47 Hz 63 Hz Current Minimum 9 7 mA 47 Hz 9 7 mA 62 4 Hz Peele voltae Minimum 74 5 V AC 47 Hz 55 9 V AC 62 4 Hz Off State Current Maximum 9 0 mA 47 Hz 9 3 mA 62 4 Hz Voltage Maximum 68 8 V AC 47 Hz 53 6 V AC 62 4 Hz Inrush Current Maximum 3 64A Input Delay Time On to Off 30 mS Off to On 25 mS Rated Insulation Voltage NA 240V Rated Impulse Voltage NA 3000V Dielectric Withstand 1600V AC 2000V 150 SM4 Optional Digital Control Inputs Terminals A3 amp A4 O Normal Operating Voltage 1
369. rresponding to an X35 Output 2 Data Lo 300000000 0 mA A output of Output 2 High RW X 36 aF 0 65535 0 NA A Raw value sent to Output 2 when Output 2 Select is set to Disabled R W n1 Over n1 Under n2 Over n2 Under Allows the user to enable the Input Output faults X 37 Fault Enable 0 255 0 NA 0 Fault Disabled R W Out1 Shorted 1 Fault Enabled Out1 Open Out2 Shorted Out2 Open In1 Over In1 Under In2 Over In2 Under Allows the user to enable the Input Output alarms X 38 Alarm Enable 0 255 0 NA 0 Alarm Disabled R W Outt Shorted 1 Alarm Enabled Out Open Qut2 Shorted Out2 Open In1 Over In1 Under mad 0 Do not attempt a restart after fault is cleared nZ Under 1 Attempt a restart after fault is cleared X39 Restart Enable 0 255 0 NA Out1 Shorted Note Restart Attempts Parameter 133 and Restart Delay Parameter BAW 134 must also be configured Out1 Open Out2 Shorted Out2 Open 3000 0 3000 0 If Input 1 exceeds this level for the time period set in the In1 Over F Dly X 40 Ini Over F Lvl 1050 0 NA NA parameter an In1 Over fault will be signaled The In1 Over bit must be R W set in the Fault Enable Paramete The time period that Input 1 must exceed the In1 Over F Lvl to signal a X41 Int Over F Dly 0 1 99 0 3 0 Set NA fault The In1 Over bit must be set in the Fault Enable Parameter RW 3000 0 3000 0 If Input 1 exceeds this level for the time period set in the In1 Over A Dly X 42 Ini Over A Lvl 1000 0 NA NA param
370. rs E Stopped wy 0 Amps Port OO Param File Group FILE Motor Protection GROUP _ Overload Motor _Fault_En Motor Alarm En Motor Restart En 3 Select the desired 16 bit field then press EDIT amp Stopped AUTO wy 0 Amps FO Port 00 Dev Param 230 Motor Fault Enable lt 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 Bit 01 Underload lt gt NOTE The UPPER and LOWER soft key allows for switching between the upper 16 to 31 i and lower 0 to 16 bits Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 173 Chapter 5 Programming Parameter File Group Structure 174 Rockwell Autom 4 Use the right or left arrow to move the cursor to the desired bit The bit function is displayed at the bottom of the screen 5 Enter a 1 to enable or 0 to disable then press ENTER to load the change into the co ntroller amp Stopped Edit Motor XXXX XXXX 0000 ooo Fault En For details concerning mot or and controller Fault and Alarm protection parameters see Chapter 4 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions The five parameter File Groups are structured as shown below The access levels for each parameter are abbreviated as follows e M Monitoring e B Basic e A Advanced and e MBA Monitoring Basic and Advanced Figure 87 Monitoring SS LC Volts Phase C N Volts Unbal
371. s 15 Input 2 Control Module Input 2 Status Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Reference Feedback Parameter Information Scale Factors for PLC Communication Communications Chapter 8 Table 103 Logic Command Word Control Bit Description Number Control 1 0 0 Stop Coast Inhibit No action 1 Start Start No action 2 Jog Stop Maneuver No action 3 Clear Fault Clear fault No action 4 Slow Speed Run at slow speed No action 5 Emergency Run Enable emergency run mode Disable emergency run mode 6 Motor Winding Heater Enable motor winding heater Disable motor winding heater 7 10 Reserved These bits must always be set to 0 1 Aux Enable Use the Network 1 4 bits i ME NEMO oo Closes any output configured Opens any output configured 4 Nome for Network 1 for Network 1 Closes any output configured Opens any output configured 3 Network z for Network 2 for Network 2 Closes any output configured Opens any output configured i Network 3 for Network 3 for Network 3 Closes any output configured Opens any output configured 5 Nee for Network 4 for Network 4 The SMC 50 does not offer the analog Reference feature The analog Feedback feature is supported and will provide Current Average Parameter 5 automatically as the feedback word A complete listing of the SMC 50 parameters is located in Appe
372. s not maintained if power to the controller is cycled e The default access level is Basic e The advanced level provides access to all parameters e Individual parameter access levels are shown in Figure 87 through Figure 91 beginning on page 174 and is also contained in the Parameter Linear List Table 73 through Table 77 beginning on page 177 NOTE To view modify the current access level perform the following steps using the 20 HIM AG 1 From the initial power up screen press the FOLDERS single function key 2 Use the forward or back arrow key until the DEV PARAM folder screen is displayed Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 149 Chapter 5 Programming 3 Select the PARAM ACCESS LEVEL option then press the Enter 5 key The Dev Parameter screen appears Ry St d AUTO AB Rae et 4J JDEV PARAM gt A Linear List 00 File Group Changed Parameters Param Access Level V 4 Use the up or down arrow to scroll up or down to until the desired access level is reached then press Enter 5 to view that access level Parameter Management Before you begin programming it is important to understand how the memory is structured within the SMC 50 and used on power up and during normal operation Figure 83 Memory Block Diagram SMC 50 Memory 150 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Chapter 5 RAM Random Access Memory
373. s the ESC soft key to return to the previous screen then enter the desired value Use the left arrow soft key to delete a single digit at a time from the data field to enter the correct digit If a group of selections is displayed the left arrow soft key moves to the lowest numbered selection Once all parameters are entered the START UP folders screen will appear Review Modity Parameter Data 1 Display the START UP folder screen 2 Press the ENTER 5 key 3 Select the Yes soft key when Run General Start Up is displayed 4 Individually review each parameter required pressing the ENTER soft key to move onto the next parameter If necessary press the ESC soft key to review the previous parameter NOTE To modify parameter data use the procedure outlined in Entering Data into General Startup above 154 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Chapter 5 Figure 84 Flow Chart General Start Up Parameters Line Voltage Starting Mode Input 1 OR Input 2 No Motor Heater Current Limit Soft Start Linear Speed Torque Pump _Full Voltage ia Ramp Time Ramp Time Ramp Time Ramp Time Ramp Time
374. s the desired Stop Mode NOTE The mode of stopping does not need to match the starting mode e g a Soft Start can have a stop mode programmed for Coast Linear Stop or SMB there is no Current Limit Stop or Torque Stop mode Coast Soft Stop Linear Speed Pump Stop SMB Ext Brake Stop Time Programs the amount of time desired to ramp from full to zero voltage for Soft Linear and Pump Stop mode The actual ramp stop time will depend on the stopping mode selected and load inertia 0 999 seconds Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 163 Chapter 5 164 Programming Parameter Option default Input 1 Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status Disable Start Coast of Input 1 wired to control terminal 11 24V DC Default Start Coast Stop Option Start Coast Start Stop Slow Speed Input 2 Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input 2 wired to control terminal 10 24V DC Default Disable Dual Ramp OL Select Fault Fault NC Clear Fault Emerg Run Motor Heater Aux 1 Config Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact 1 wired across control terminal 4 and 5 NOTE Relay Operational Options e g ON and OFF delay etc are provided in the File Setup Group 1 0 selection sequence See Figure 85 on page 159 Normal UTS Fault Alarm Ext Bypa
375. sing the START UP Configuration Tool 045 Parameter Search amp Configuration s sessrrrrsrererrers Parameter Search amp Configuration by Parameter Number Parameter Search amp Configuration by File Group Structure Parameter Configuration Using the Setup File Group Soft Siar Or Stopher e eth oe sateen eeu eee eee oes Current Limit Start with Simple Stop Mode 4 Linear Acceleration Speed Sense Start with Stop Torque Start withsrop s s2 ct ciauk wets aw et bd ueoetedrd we Full Voltage Start with Stop ws 0554 sax cies cen wae ciees chee ee Dual Ramp Start with Stop nanicccndesnan tetas ce ewiends Start Options hcl a ee Ai ae Roel Ueki oe noe how St p ODOM G sth Cote teenie aarti a Sut gee conn cect Slow Speed with Braking yet sua secat awake aiaaensynaresonei PNCCME S POD trie a aa cin E mi caus ESEA Motor Protectionhwcs noche Gigs dca des pE ea ede t ena cana Parameter File Group Structure 24254 5 000 ne3 9G heeds 4s aoe eens SMC 50 Option Module Configuration 00 2 00 eee Chapter 6 QV EVIE W ea oS Ss nd te sale tee ata ae aoa eden So Ohta ees Viewing Metering Data ja csccavanecwaen aku tawadionndeat aden Resetting Metering Parameters sus ctcuu ged idalecete eed Metering Param ters sastu diacuites rs Geto NE eer eee Sa Cub rents uA 2s cs ls aes Reeers hs este ra Parte ee a NO Power Factor o las hada wont hence Hides E ARE ia Energy S
376. sion module resides in the SMC 50 The Real Reactive and Apparent Power faults alarms are best suited to provide indication of an abnormal running operation of the motor or system which another parameter e g Underload Overload Jam Stall etc does not provide To understand what is an abnormal running operation a normal or typical value usually established during system startup needs to be determined by the user If controller based motor overload is disabled external motor overload protection should be used Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 235 Chapter 10 Table 112 Motor Will Not Start No Output Voltage to the Motor Display Possible Cause Possible Solutions Fault displayed e See fault description e See Table 111 addressing fault conditions HIM display is blank Failed HIM Control voltage is absent e Check control wiring and correct if necessary Failed control module e Check HIM connection HIM connection is loose e Cycle control power e Replace HIM only e Replace control module only Stopped e Pilot devices e Check wiring follow the 0 0 Amps e SMC Enable input is open at instructions on page 209 to erminal 9 enable control capability e Configured or wired input e Check control voltage erminals are not wired e Replace control module correctly e Start Stop control has not been enabled for the human interface module e Control volta
377. slow speed etc through DeviceLogix requires that bit 14 of the Logic Mask parameter 148 be set See Parameter 334 346 on page 276 for DeviceLogix parameter descriptions Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 295 Appendix F Using DeviceLogix Function Block Elements 296 The following function block elements are available Bit and Analog ro D m ae Process ALM c Select Limit SEL HLL Timer Counter rowr rore pure cru erp crup Compare xa pau xea LES GRT LEQ seg Compute Math App sus mut piv mon wec ars Move Logical mann BOR xoR awor mu siron ao sEDD RSTD Macro Block Bit and Analog 1 0 do not count against the Function Block total All other elements count with each instance counting as one Function Block The DeviceLogix Editor provides a graphical interface for configuring Function Blocks to provide local control within the drive DeviceLogix Editor navigation and programming basics are not covered in this manual Refer to the DeviceLogix User Manual publication RA UM003A for additional information It can be found on the RA Literature Library web site at http www rockwellautomation com literature Macro Blocks Up to five Macro Blocks can be created by the user and each can be used five times The selections will be empty until a Macro Block gets created The icon text associated with each Macro Block is also created by the us
378. ss Ext Brake Aux 2 Config Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact 2 wired across control terminal 6 and 7 NOTE Relay Operational Options e g ON and OFF delay etc are provided in the File Setup Group 1 0 selection sequence See Figure 85 on page 159 Aux Control Network 1 Network 2 Network 3 Network 4 Overload Class Required for motor protection Allows the user to select the time to trip for the built in Motor Overload This selection is based on the type of motor being used and the application it is being applied to 5 30 10 Service Factor Required for motor protection This programmed value is taken directly from the nameplate and used by the controller to determine the ultimate Overload Trip Current 0 01 1 99 1 15 Motor FLC Required for motor protection This programmed value is taken directly from the motor nameplate 1 0 2200 0 1 0 Amps Starting Torque NOT used for a Linear Speed Start 0 300 100 RMT Max Torque NOT used for a Linear Speed Start 0 300 250 RMT Rated Torque NOT used for a Linear Speed Start 0 10000 10 N m Rated Speed NOT used for a Linear Speed Start 750 900 1500 1800 3500 3600 RPM For best results with Linear Acceleration Motor Tuning Cycle should be performed The SMC 50 will do tl he motor is run The user can also force this manually by setting the Force Tuning parameter to tr
379. st 138 to 142 Alarm Parameter List 143 to 147 in parameter memory from newest to oldest Accessing the Fault amp Alarm Parameters Using the 20 HIM AG the fault and alarm parameter lists can be displayed in the Motor Protection File Group or Linear List parameter number search Fault Parameter List 138 to 142 Alarm Parameter List 143 to 147 To use the File Group method perform the following steps 1 From the SMC 50 standard power up screen press the Folders keypad key at the lower left of the display NOTE Ensure the Advanced access level located at the bottom of the lt 00 gt DEV PARAM screen is selected before pressing ENTER See Program Access Level Configuration in Chapter 5 for additional details 2 From the lt 00 gt DEV PARAM folder screen select File Group then press ENTER number 5 from the keypad The Port 00 Param File Group screen will appear 3 Use the down arrow key to select highlight FILE Motor Protection then press ENTER number 5 from the keypad amp Stopped wy 0 Amps Port OO Param File Group FILE Motor Protection A FILE Set Up FILE Motor Protection FILE Communications FILE Utility Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 219 Chapter9 Diagnostics 4 Use the down arrow key to select GROUP History then press ENTER number from the keypad Ry Stopped AUTO ABR Amps FO Port OO Param File Group FILE Motor Protection GROUP
380. st be controlled by an auxiliary contact of the SMC 50 that is configured for external bypass Bypass contactor must be fully rated to motor Hp kW and FLA NOTE In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off state failure of one or more solid state power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding s of the motor This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage the installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC 50 is recommended Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC 50 auxiliary contacts configured to NORMAL Energy Saver Mode The energy saver function only applies during light motor load situations at which time the SMC 50 reduces current to the motor and thereby saves energy When in energy saver operation the Energy Savings status bit is set In addition Energy Savings Parameter 15 indicates the percentage energy savings Parameter 17 Power Factor should be monitored and recorded when the motor is running at no light load and at full heavy load The power factor value where the controller enters Energy Saver mode is determined by setting Parameter 193 Energy Saver to a value between the no light load and full heavy load recorded values
381. t This Fault is always enabled 1 38 2 39 F Occurs when the Control Input is configured to TB Input N N NA generate a Fault and the input condition N O or N C 3 40 is satisfied 4 4 F A Exists when the calculated imbalance level is Current Imbal 42 Y Y Y equal to or greater than the user defined Fault Alarm level See Chapter 4 for calculated value details alls below the user defined Under Power Real 43 Y JY JY F A Occurs when the fault alarm level Real Power rises above the user defined Over Power Real 44 1Y Y JY ault alarm level alls below the user defined Un Power Reac 45 Y Y JY F A Occurs when the fault alarm level Reactive Power rises above the user defined Ov Power Reac 46 Y Y JY ault alarm level Under Power App a7 Y fY Y FA Occurs when the alls below the user defined i ault alarm level Apparent Power Eaei ia ises above the user define Over Power App 48 IY JY JY ault alarm level F A Occurs if the line frequency goes above or below Frequency 49 Y Y Y the user defined frequency high or frequency low Fault Alarm level F A User defined value which sets the number of elapsed hours actual operating hours of the motor PM Hours sO N JY JY before a fault alarm is signaled indicating that preventative maintenance should be performed F A User defined value which sets the number of PM Starts 51 N _ Y Y starts before a fault alarm is signaled indicating that preventative maintenance sh
382. t a current limit override 50 600 FLC is also available to limit current throughout the start cycle using Parameter 53 The controller has Up to Speed UTS detection to determine when the motor is at full speed If the motor reaches UTS before the end of the ramp time the SMC 50 applies full voltage to the motor and the soft start is ended The UTS level can be configured Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Operating Modes Chapter 3 in percent of the SMC 50 s applied motor voltage using Parameter 186 The full Soft Start parameter list can be found in Table 14 NOTE If the controller is detecting UTS too soon the UTS level should be increased This typically occurs in very high efficiency motors If the controller is detecting UTS too late or not at all the UTS level should be lowered This typically occurs in very low efficiency motors See Timed Start on page 83 for additional details Figure 53 Soft Start Current Limit 100 Percent Voltage Initial Torque Ramp Time __ Sian pd Run _ gt Time in Seconds Table 14 Soft Start Mode Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Name Minimum Maximum Default Access Units ag o o SttartingMode SoftStat o T e 50 Ramp Time 0 0 1000 0 10 0 SEC 51 Initial Torque 0 90 70 ALRT 53 Cur Limit Level 50 600 350 FLC 54
383. tart Coast Start Stop to a non stop input In cases 2 and 3 the fault is generated when the parameter changes NOTE Two analog inputs voltage or current can be added using a single Cat No 150 SM3 Analog 1 0 Option Module See Chapter 2 page 39 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 11 Chapter 1 Product Overview Communication 12 Outputs The SMC 50 has two relay outputs provided as standard These relay outputs can be configured to follow a number of functions see the relay output parameters list below and operate normally open N O or electrically held normally closed N C In addition to the configured function each relay can be individually configured with an ON and OFF delay time See Figure 1 for the locations of the removable standard I O terminal block Relay output parameters include e Normal active when the start e External Brake command is initiated inactive with e DeviceLogix stop command e Aux Control e Up to Speed UTS e Network 1 e Fault e Network 2 e Alarm e Network 3 e External Bypass e Network 4 NOTE Three additional relay outputs can be added using a single 150 SM4 Digital 1 0 Option Module See page 38 Two analog outputs voltage or current can be added using a single Cat No 150 SM3 Analog 1 0 Option Module See page 39 A Drives Programming Interface DPI communications port is provided as standard see Figure 1 This communications port ena
384. tarted and stopped from multiple sources as well as provide diagnostic information through the use of communication interfaces The SMC 50 uses DPI as an internal method of communication bus therefore all standard DPI communication interfaces used by other devices g PowerFlex Drives can be used in the SMC 50 ScanPort devices are not supported by the SMC 50 Standard DPI communications cards are available for various protocols including DeviceNet ControlNet ModBus and Profibus DP Other modules may be available in the future For specific programming examples configuration or programming information see the user manual for the communication module being used A list of available modules is shown below Table 97 Communication Card Selection by Protocol Type Protocol Type Cat No User Manual DeviceNet 20 COMM D 20COMM UM002 ControlNet 20 COMM C 20COMM UM003 Profibus 20 COMM P 20COMM UM006 RS 485 20 COMM S 20COMM UM005 InterBus 20 COMM 20COMM UM007 EtherNet IP 20 COMM E 20COMM UMO010 Dual Port EtherNet IP 20 COMM ER 20COMM UM015 RS485 HVAC 20 COMM H 20COMM UM009 ControlNet Fiber 20 COMM O 20COMM UM003 CANopen 20 COMM K 20COMM UM012 The SMC 50 supports four DPI ports for communication Port 1 is for the front mounted bezel Human Interface Module HIM Ports 2 and 3 are supported through the serial connection on the top of the device and are typically used to
385. tection Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Minimum Maximum Default Access Units _ NameO 46 SS CiCdCne Voltage oomo _ si sti S ts 102 Overvolt F Lvl 100 199 110 103 Overvolt F Dly 0 1 99 0 3 0 R W SECS 104 Overvolt A Lvl 100 199 110 105 Overvolt A Dly 0 1 99 0 3 0 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Current Imbalance Protection Fault amp Alarm A current imbalance condition can be caused by an unbalance in the voltage supply unequal motor winding impedance or long and varying wire lengths When a current imbalance condition exists the motor can experience an additional temperature rise resulting in degradation of the motor insulation and reduction in life expectancy Rapid current imbalance fault detection helps extend the motor s life expectancy and minimize potential damage and loss of production The current imbalance calculation is equal to the largest deviation of the three current signals RMS phase current from the average phase current divided by the average phase current Note that the power pole current is used for the current imbalance calculation Current Imbalance Fault Code 42 A Current Imbalance Fault condition Fault Code 42 occurs when the calculated imbalance level rises above a user defined level Current Imbalance Fault Level for a user defined time Current Imbalance Fault Delay See T
386. ted Components Workbench The last 100 events are stored in the Alarm Buffer with the most recent event numbered as 1 HIM or 1 1 software in the list Along with the Alarm Code the date and time that the event occurred is also listed NOTE The date and time information is obtained from the SMC 50 s RTC Ensure the RTC is set correctly In addition to the Alarm Buffer the last five Alarm Events are available via Parameter 143 through Parameter 147 Storing this Alarm history in the parameter list provides access by any networked device The Alarm Event date and time are not available from the parameter list 136 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Auto Restart from Fault Function Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Chapter 4 Table 60 Alarm Event Parameter List Parameter Number Parameter Name Alarm Code Access Units 143 Alarm 1 144 Alarm 2 145 Alarm 3 0 10000 R 146 Alarm 4 147 Alarm 5 As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools This function allows the SMC 50 to automatically restart from various Starter or Motor Fault conditions Auto Restart from Fault is individually bit enabled or disabled using Starter Restart Enable Parameter 135 or Motor Restart Enable Parameter 264 See Table 61 on page 138 Parameter 133 Restart Attempts allows the user to define the allowable number of restart attempts from the fault before ending the
387. ter 48 must be correctly configured The accuracy of the torque calculations is 10 of the true electromechanical torque Table 81 Metering Parameters Associated with Torque Parameter Number Name Description Min Max Default Access Units o com Rd Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 193 Chapter 6 194 Metering Power Real Reactive and Apparent power calculations along with demand and maximum demand are made on each line power phase along with a total for all three phases The Energy parameters can be cleared using the Meter Reset parameter See Resetting Metering Parameters on page 192 for further details NOTE For Reactive Energy Parameter 278 and 279 the system will keep a e positive energy which only integrates power when it is positive e negative energy which only integrates power when it is negative and e net energy which always integrates The demand numbers are calculated as follows e Energy is calculated over a period of time defined by Demand Period Parameter 290 e The previous n period values are averaged and the result is written to the Demand Parameter 272 281 and 288 which is used in calculating the Max Demand values This averaging uses a rolling window algorithm where the previous n periods are averaged Table 82 Metering Parameters Associated with Power
388. ter Aux Control will control the state of the auxiliary With an auxiliary configured as Network 1 it is controlled over the LAN as etwork 1 Relay 1 With an auxiliary configured as Network 2 it is controlled over the LAN as etwork 2 Relay 2 With an auxiliary configured as Network 3 it is controlled over the LAN as etwork 3 Relay 3 etwork 4 With an auxiliary configured as Network 4 it is controlled over the LAN as 280 Relay 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Parameter Information Appendix B Min Max Mee Read Write Number Name f Units Enum Text Description bed Default Access Enables the user to invert the logic of the Aux3 output When disabled it is a normally open relay output contact when de energized By enabling the 0 1 invert function the relay contact becomes a normally closed contact when X 15 Aux3 Invert 0 NA de energized R W Disable Aux3 Relay Output is not inverted N 0 Enable Aux3 Relay Output is inverted N C 0 0 10 0 A user selected time delay in activating the Aux3 Relay Contact can be X 16 Aux3 On Delay 0 0 sec NA programmed R W 0 0 10 0 A user selected time delay in de activating the Aux3 Relay Contact can be X 17 Aux3 Off Delay 0 0 sec NA programmed R W Se Allows the user to set all 150 SM4 Digit
389. ter to Option Module Connection 825 Converter Module RG25U Male s Connection DoS Te NS ri ES l N os 150 SM2 825 MCA Connection Cable j Option Module Provided as standard with the 825 Converter Module The cable length is fixed at 4 meters Only the cable provided with the converter can be used The use of any other cable will result in incorrect data from the converter and incorrect controller operation The following table provides the terminal and wire specifications for the 150 SM2 terminals TB2 TB3 and TB4 Table 12 Control and Option Module Wiring Specifications Wire Size 0 2 2 5 mm 24 14 AWG Maximum Torque 0 8 Nem 7 Ibein Maximum Wire Strip Length 7 mm 0 27 in Screw Type M3 Slotted Figure 28 provides information for wiring all sensors to the 150 SM2 module Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 45 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Figure 28 Combined Wiring Diagram of all 150 SM2 Sensors 150 SM2 Module Circuit Board RG25U TB2 183 Female TB4 TB2 TB3 RG25U TB4 rE Mae E Pee PEES INE LERNEN A Ee AEE EEA iaid To Control Shield Terminal 3 Ox Ground oO 825 MCM Cable 53 28 cp ee te
390. th an auxiliary configured as Network 2 it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 2 Network 3 With an auxiliary configured as Network 3 it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 3 Network 4 With an auxiliary configured as Network 4 it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 4 Enables the user to invert the logic of the Aux 1 output When disabled it is a normally open relay output contact when de energized By enabling the invert function the relay 0 1 contact becomes a normally closed contact when de energized 173 Aux 1 Invert 0 R W 0 Disable Aux 1 relay output not inverted Default N 0 Enable Aux 1 relay output inverted N C 174 Aux1 On Delay Secs con NA A time delay in activating the Aux1 relay contact can be programmed R W 175 Aux Off Delay Secs oo NA A time delay in de activating the Aux1 relay contact can be programmed R W Allows the user to configure the functionality of the Aux1 relay output on the control module based on the following selections Normal Aux 2 closes when start command asserted and opens when motor stops Default UTS Aux 2 closes when motor reaches up to speed and opens when motor is not at speed Fault Aux2 closes when the SMC 50 enters a fault state and opens when the fault is cleared Al Aux2 closes when the SMC 50 detects an alarm condition and opens when alarm is arm cleared Aux2 closes when the SMC 50 enters the external bypass mode and opens when it ane Ext Bypass leaves that mode 176
391. that input prior to the start command The heater function will continue for the specified time or until the input is deactivated at which time the motor will start The heater function will be disabled if the parameter Heater Level is set to zero or the parameter Heater Time is set to zero and the input is inactive or not configured at the time of the start command SMC 50 with an External Bulletin 1410 Motor Winding Heater In addition to using the SMC 50 internal motor heater feature an external Bulletin 1410 motor winding heater can be used A typical application diagram is shown below in Figure 15 Figure 15 SMC 50 with an External Bulletin 1410 Motor Winding Heater IC O L O 7 L1 1 T1 2 Xg 3 Phase Pa L2 3 T2 4 i Xg MO Input Power PE L3 5 T3 6 SMC 50 Controller HCO Bulletin 1410 Motor Winding Heater Customer supplied Overload protection is included as a standard feature of the SMC 50 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 29 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC ATTENTION This product has been designed for Class A equipment Use of the product in domestic environments may cause radio interference in which case the installer may need to employ additional mitigation methods The following guidelines
392. the SMC 50 when a stop command is issued The STOP command can be initiated through any input a network command or the JOG key on the A6 HIM NOTE The STOP Key on a Cat no 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM CE6S device initiates a Coast to Stop The available stopping modes are e Coast to Stop e SMB Smart Motor Braking e Soft Stop e Pump Stop e Linear Speed Deceleration e External Brake To utilize terminal block inputs to initiate a Stop Mode the respective input should be configured for Start Stop or Stop Option Coast to Stop When Stop Mode Parameter 65 is set to Coast to Stop and the STOP command is initiated the starter will not perform any other function and the motor coasts to a stop No other Stop parameters need to be configured if Coast to Stop is enabled The Coast to Stop command overrides all other commands that could result in motor operation When this command is initiated it is latched into the controller s logic so that no other motor command can occur until it is cleared It will be cleared when all terminal block Start inputs are opened and any other Soft Stop Inhibits a Start input is removed Note that in a 2 wire control scheme this involves placing the Start Stop input in the Stop position in a 3 wire control scheme this involves opening the Start input Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Operating Modes Chapter 3 Table 23 Stop Mode Parameter List Parameter Number Minimum
393. the motor under SMC 50 control and operating in any running mode e g Slow Speed has become frozen or locked NOTE The Locked Rotor Fault is similar to the Jam Fault except it is active during all running modes not just at full speed Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Expansion Module Functions Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Chapter 4 The value or level of the Locked Rotor Fault is configured as a percentage of the motor FLC using Locked Rotor F Lvl Parameter 84 A configurable delay time using Locked Rtr F Dly Parameter 85 is also available to help eliminate nuisance Faults Locked Rotor protection is enabled or disabled via the Locked Rotor bit in the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 In addition to the Locked Rotor Fault a Locked Rotor Alarm can also be enabled which will activate under the same condition as the Locked Rotor Fault The Locked Rotor Alarm is enabled or disabled via the Locked Rotor bit in the Motor Alarm Enable Parameter 231 Table 58 Locked Rotor Parameter List NameO 85 Locked Rtr F Dly 0 1 100 0 RW SECS 310 Locked Rtr A Lvl 400 1000 600 FLC 311 Locked Rtr A Dly 0 1 100 0 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Expansion Device Removed Fault Expansion Module Removed Fault Code x026 When an expansion module e g 150 SM is removed from a powered down control module and power is reapplied Exp
394. the Open Gate bit in the Starter Fault Enable Parameter 136 The Open SCR Gate Alarm is enabled and disabled in the Starter Alarm Enable Parameter 137 Power Quality Fault amp Alarm Phase A B or C Power Quality Phase A Code 52 Power Quality Phase B Code 53 Power Quality Phase C Code 54 A power quality Fault or Alarm will occur when the starter is not properly firing its phase A B or C SCRs This condition is generally attributed to power line problems that are not detected by other line monitoring functions There are no user configurable Power Quality Fault or Alarm parameters to configure Phase A B and C Power Quality equates to Fault Code 52 53 or 54 respectively This can be enabled or disabled using the Power Quality bit in the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 In addition a Power Quality Alarm can be enabled or disabled using the Power Quality bit in the Motor Alarm Enable Parameter 231 130 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Chapter 4 Total Harmonic Distortion THD Fault amp Alarm Power Quality THDV Fault Code 55 amp Power Quality THD Fault Code 56 Fault amp Alarm The SMC 50 provides the ability to read power line THD which is the average of 32 line frequency harmonics The calculation for THDI and THDV THDx is THD THD3 THD3 THDx THD Excessive THD indicates a problem in the power source and or th
395. the ability to measure total harmonic distortion levels 254 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Parameter Information Appendix B Table 132 Parameter 43 51 Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access The product Logic Status is made available to all DPI devices and is SED also available as a bit enumerated parameter Product Status The bits in this parameter correspond with the bits in the Product Logic Status defined for DPI ar Ready bit 0 Enabled Ready 0 Not Ready ae Power Applied to Motor Gating SCRs or Bypass closed bit 1 Running 0 Power NOT Applied to Motor PA ABC Phasing bit 2 Phasing 0 CBA Phasing T 3 phase is valid bit 3 Phasing Active 0 No valid 3 phase detected ye Performing a Start Maneuver slow speed not included bit 4 Starting Accel 0 Not Performing a Start Maneuver ap A Performing a Stop Maneuver coast to stop not included 0 65535 Dit S Stopping DETAI 0 Not Performing a Stop Maneuver 43 Product Status R 0 bit 6 Alarm Alarm Present 0 No Alarm Present oe Fault Condition Exists and hasn t been cleared PIES tau 0 No Fault Condition aa Full Voltage Applied Bypass or full SCR c
396. the contactor before initiating a stop Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 25 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Protective Modules 26 A protective module see Figure 12 containing MOVs Metal Oxide Varistors should be installed to protect the SMC 50 power components from electrical transients and or electrical noise Protective modules can be installed on controllers rated from 200 600V to protect the power components from electrical transients The protective modules clip voltage transients generated on the lines to prevent such surges from damaging the SCRs The use of MOVs are highly recommended as 480V and 600V MOVs offer maximum protection of 1400V and 1600V respectively NOTE Protective modules are not available for 690V applications Figure 12 Protective Module IMPORTANT Protective modules may be placed on the line load or both sides of the SMC 50 However protective modules must not be placed on the load side of the SMC 50 when using inside the delta motor connections or with pump linear speed or braking control There are two general situations that may occur which would indicate the need for using the protective modules 1 Transient Spikes Transient spikes will typically occur on the lines feeding the SMC 50 or feeding the load from the SMC 50 Transient spikes are created on the line when devices are attached with current carrying inductances that are open circuited T
397. the following steps perform the steps 1 through 4 in Basic i Configuration using the HIM on page 182 1 From the File Group screen press ENTER number 5 on the keypad The four inputs are displayed f Stopped AUTO wy 0 Amps EO Port 09 Param File Group FILE Inputs GROUP Inputs Input1 Input2 Input3 2 Use the up or down arrow to select the input then press ENTER number 5 on the keypad The display will show the current setting of the input 3 Press the EDIT soft key to change the selected input function 4 Use the up or down arrow to select the desired function e g Start Stop Coast Slow Speed etc then press the ENTER soft key to load the selection If necessary use the back arrow to return to the previous selection NOTE For a complete list of 150 SM4 parameters see the Digital 1 0 Option Module Parameter List on page 186 For additional information using the FILE GROUP function of the HIM see the 20 HIM AG User Manual publication 20HIM UMO001 184 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Chapter 5 Configure Auxiliary Relay Outputs NOTE Before proceeding with the following steps perform the steps 1 through 4 in Basic i Configuration using the HIM on page 182 1 Use the up or down arrow to select the one of the Aux Outputs then press ENTER number 5 on the keypad GROUP Aux 3 2 Select one of the four configuration options Aux X
398. the motor is run The user can also force this manually by setting the Force Tuning parameter to TRUE 1 which is accessed from the File Setup Group Adv Tuning or by pressing and holding the SMC 50 s Reset button for 0 seconds with the motor stopped AStart Delay Time can also be programmed to delay starting for a period of time after the initiation of the START command he Start Delay parameter can be accessed from the Group Starting selection see Figure 85 on page 159 In addition to Stop Mode for SMB a Braking Current value must be configured from the Group Stopping selection see Figure 85 on page 159 O Touse Ext Braking one of the Auxiliary Outputs must be programmed to Ext Brake When programmed for Ext Brake the function of this Auxiliary is to energize the external brake device to stop the motor The relay stays ON from the beginning of he STOP command until the STOP time parameter has timed out Any auxiliary output configured for Aux Control using the AuxX Config parameter will be under control of its associated bit from the Aux Control Parameter 180 See Parameter 180 information for bit assignments NOTE This function enables forcing an output ON or OFF Rated Speed NOT used for Pump Start ATTENTION For Overload Protection it is critical that the data be entered into the SMC 50 as it appears on the motor nameplate Full Voltage Start with Stop The SMC 50 may be programmed to provide a full
399. the programmed fault alarm parameters to the application better suit the application e Disable the fault alarm feature e Abnormally reduced reactive e Repair replace the condition causing the reduced MVAR power produced by the MVAR power draw Un Pwr React 45 Running motor e Modify the programmed fault alarm parameters to e Programmed setting is incorrect for better suit the application the application e Disable the fault alarm feature 232 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Troubleshooting Chapter 10 Table 111 Fault Display Explanation Display Fault Code FaultEnabled Possible Causes Possible Solutions e Abnormally high reactive MVAR e Repair replace the condition causing the high power produced by the motor MVAR power draw Ov Pwr React 46 Running e Programmed settings are incorrect e Modify the programmed fault alarm parameters to for the application better suit the application e Disable the fault alarm feature e Abnormally reduced apparent MVA Repair replace the condition causing the reduced Running power draw by the motor MVA power draw Und Pwr App 41 e Programmed settings are incorrect e Modify the programmed fault alarm parameters to for the application better suit the application e Disable the fault alarm feature e Abnormally high apparent MVA e Repair replace the condi
400. tion or parameter configuration is required and no shorted SCR Alarm exists NOTE Shorted SCR detection is performed as part of a prestart check SCR Overtemperature Fault SCR Overtemperature Fault Code 10 The SMC 50 is able to detect if any one of its SCRs has reached an over temperature condition which could indicate excessive current draw or excessive number of starts This function is accomplished using an It calculation There are no SCR overtemperature parameters for the user to configure The SCR Overtemperature Fault is always enabled There is no SCR Overtemperature Alarm The SCR temperature calculation algorithm also controls the cyclic operation of the SMC 50 s fan s in the power section The SMC 50 internal fan is turned on whenever the motor it is controlling is running or the estimated SCR Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 129 Chapter4 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Power Quality temperature is above 50 C The fan is turned off when the motor is not energized and the estimated SCR temperature is below 49 C Open SCR Gate Fault amp Alarm Phase A B or C Open SCR Phase A Code 7 Open SCR Phase B Code 8 Open SCR Phase C Code 8 The SMC 50 is able to detect ifan SCR control gate in any power phase has malfunctioned and initiate a Fault or Alarm There are no user configurable Open Gate parameters The Open SCR Gate Fault is enabled and disabled using
401. tion causing the high Runnin power draw by the motor MVA power draw Ovr Pwr App 48 g e Programmed settings are incorrect e Modify the programmed fault alarm parameters to for the application better suit the application e Disable the fault alarm feature e Speed control regulation system of e Reduce the generator load increase generator the generator prime mover e g output replace the speed control system or diesel engine is unable to adjust to generator a conditions or is NOTE For a diesel generator system Rockwell Automation recommends it be oversized by a Frequency 49 Running e Abnormal poner grid connections actor of three for Soft Start applications power generationiSource Is e Contact the power company for additional operating outside its normal information frequency limits or range e Modify the programmed fault alarm parameters to better suit the application e The number of hours programmed in Perform required maintenance and reset the PM PM Hours 50 In All Modes the PM Hours Parameter has been Hours parameter reached e Disable this fault alarm feature e The number of Starts programmedin Perform required maintenance and reset the PM PM Starts 51 Pre Start the PM Start Parameter has been Hours parameter reached e Disable this fault alarm feature e Incoming 3 phase voltage instability Check supply voltage for capability to start stop the Power Qualit 52 or distortion motor check for loose connections on t
402. tly for different applications 68 Pump Pedestal 0 A Typically this is used to shorten the ramp time before the SMC 50 starts to get R W aggressive in its pump stopping maneuver 69 Braking Current FLC ge A a the ability to program the intensity of the braking current applied to the R W Identifies the load type to enable appropriate braking algorithms Standard 70 Load Type ti High Inertia R W High Friction Ramp 89 Special braking mode that reduces braking torques 0 99 Adds additional time to a braking sequence after the SMC 50 detects a zero speed 71 High Eff Brake 0 NA condition that indicates the end of the braking sequence Can adjust if additional R W time is needed to stop the load Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 257 Appendix B Parameter Information Table 135 Parameter 72 94 Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access 72 Slow Speed a A Allows the user to program the slow speed that best suits the application R W 0 350 Provides braking from slow speed If set to 0 no braking will be provided Any 73 Slow Brake Cur FLC 0 A other setting will result in motor braking when the slow speed operation is R W termin
403. to Ext Bypass using that output s configuration parameter Devices rated 90 180 A In external bypass control mode on devices rated 90 180 A the controller s integral current sensors are out of the control circuit Ifall the current sensing features including motor overload are desired while running in external bypass control mode then the optional PTC Ground Fault External Current Transformer Expansion Module 150 SM2 and an 825 MCM 180 current sensor are required See Figure 28 on page 46 and Figure 44 on page 63 Devices rated 210 520 A In external bypass control mode on devices rated 210 520 A the controller s integral current sensors remain in the control circuit by using Cat No 150 SCBK devices rated 210 320 A or Cat No 150 SDBK devices rated 361 520 A Bypass Kits See Figure 66 on page 92 The optional PTC Ground Fault External Current Transformer Expansion Module 150 SM2 and an 825 MCM20 with user supplied CTs with 5 A secondary can be used in place of the bypass kits See Figure 26 on page 44 and Figure 44 on page 63 NOTE When using the Cat No 150 SCBK or 150 SDBK bypass kit the controller firmware must be FRN 3 001 or higher The Cat No 150 SM2 Expansion Module can only be inserted into control module expansion port 7 or 8 In addition only one 150 SM2 Expansion Module can be used per control module Once the 150 SM2 Expansion Module is installed in the control module and power is applied it must
404. top Mode for SMB a Braking Current value must be configured from the Group Stopping selection see Figure 85 on page 159 To use Ext Braking one of the Auxiliary Outputs must be programmed to Ext Brake When programmed for Ext Brake the function of this Auxiliary is to energize the external brake device to stop the motor The relay stays ON from the beginning of the STOP command until the STOP time parameter has timed out Q Any auxiliary output configured for Aux Control using the AuxX Config parameter will be under control of its associated bit from the Aux Control Parameter 180 See Parameter 180 information for bit assignments NOTE This function enables forcing an output ON or OFF ATTENTION For Overload Protection it is critical that the data be entered into the SMC 50 as it appears on the motor nameplate Rated Speed NOT used for Full Voltage Start Dual Ramp Start with Stop The SMC 50 provides the ability to select between two start profiles Start Profile 1 can be configured using the Basic parameter set as explained in the previous sections The Basic Setup parameter set can be accessed with the HIM see Figure 88 on page 175 The Stop mode selected in the Basic parameter set will apply to both start profiles The Basic parameter set provides the method to select between the operation of Start NOTE Profile 1 and Start Profile 2 by configuration of Input 1 or Input 2 to the Dual Ramp If the input
405. tor FLC verify current draw of the motor e Disable this fault alarm feature e Broken motor shaft belt grating e Check machine drive components and loading etc e Check pump system Underload 22 Running e Pump cavitation e Repair or replace motor e Programmed setting incorrect for e Check programmed settings application e Disable this fault alarm feature e Motor current has exceeded the e Correct source of jam or excessive loading Jam 23 Running user programmed jam level for the e Check programmed time value programmed time e Disable this fault alarm feature e The motor did not reach full speed e Check pump system machine drive components i by the end of the programmed ramp and loading repair or replace motor if necessary Stall 24 Running time e Check programmed settings e Incorrect programmed setting e Disable this fault alarm feature e The controller is not detecting e Check power wiring and correct if necessary Phase Reversal 25 Prestart Only incoming supply voltage in the e Disable this fault alarm feature expected ABC sequence e Expansion module is loose or e Reseat or replace the expansion module connector Exp Removed x026 In All Modes removed to the control module and tighten module screws e Expansion module is defective e Replace defective module e Expansion module is insertedintoan Insert the expansion module into a compatible incompatible control module port control module port number e Update the control mod
406. trol of the SMC 50 However the Logic Mask factory default settings disable control commands other than Stop through the controller s DPI ports 1 2 3 or 4 To enable motor control from either of the four ports using a connected 20 HIM A6 the following steps must be performed from the SMC 50 standard power up screen 1 Press the zi key Use the right or left arrow key on the keypad to display the lt 00 gt DEV PARAM folder screen 2 Select highlight the File Group 3 Press the O enter key The Port 00 Param File Group screen will appear NOTE Ensure the Advanced Access Level is selected located at the bottom of the DEV PARAM screen For additional configuration details see Parameter Access Level Modification Using the HIM on page 149 in Chapter 5 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 207 Chapter8 Communications 4 Press the Ga to select FILE Communications then press Ls The GROUP Comm Masks and Data Links screen will appear Param File Group Monitoring Set Up A St d AUTO Motor Protection D ARDS FO c rnin Port 00 Param File Group FILE Communications GROUP __Comm Masks A GROUP Data Links y 5 With Comm Mask selected highlighted press the key The GROUP Comm Masks screen will appear with the associated Logic Mask Action selected 6 Select highlight Logic Mask then press the key The Edit Logic Mask screen with bit field will appear
407. trole iy2 ty valet Suey es nels delaus 90 Running Modes sages sy wed yeep sland va Ea eeeren aaa g 91 Solid State SCR Control Mode ccccsceccecesceceves 91 External Bypass Control Mode 22s cs isco eee estas oie 91 Energy Saver Mode sc suctvds inte rerepan e e nET ET 93 Finergency RUN sic vanweda dan irer n en ana day 555 ER 94 Sequence of Operation eraot ea EEEE E EAE ERRE 94 Chapter 4 VERVIEW 2 595 nenea ene e E a a G A EERE Rees 103 20 HIM A6 20 HIM C6 amp Configuration Software 104 Enabling Starter amp Motor Faults amp Alarms 008 104 Enabling Option Module Functional Faults amp Alarm 107 Protection amp Diagnostics seisust niten p Eaa eta 108 Overload Fault amp Alarm o eh chek ri tsa Ala hires ee 108 Underload Fault amp Alarm vs 020 castosdsi sees ge unner 111 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Table of Contents Line Power Undervoltage Protectionin sic acmetveorsonennsieas 112 Line Power Overvoltage Protection Fault amp Alarm 113 Current Imbalance Protection Fault amp Alarm 114 Voltage Unbalance Protection Fault amp Alarm 115 Phase Reversal Protection ote ev ect cuve achaiay dot cy chokes 116 High amp Low Line Power Frequency Protect Fault amp Alarm 116 Stall Protection Fault amp Alarm cceeeceencues 117 Jam Detection Fault a
408. ts equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures gt eee IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Rockwell Automation and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Product Overview Installation amp
409. ttery Table 164 Replacement Battery for RTC Description Cat No Manganese Dioxide Lithium Coin Cell Normal Capacity 220 m A h Not a RA Listed Battery Nominal Voltage 3V Cat No Commercially available as CR2032 Renewal Part Instructions Fan Publication 150 IN054 Fan Cover Publication 150 IN057 Control Module Cover Publication 10000152882 I O Module RTB Publication 150 IN058 PTC Option Module RTB Publication 10000152885 Control Module RTB Publication 10000152887 Power Section Frame B Publication 10000152876 Power Pole Frame C Publication 150 IN069 Power Pole Frame D Publication 150 IN070 Control Module Frame B Publication 10000152876 Control Module Frames C and D Publication 150 IN067 Shroud Frames C and D Publication 150 IN068 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 289 AppendixC Spare Replacement Parts 290 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 291 Appendix D 210 520 A Devices 90 520 A Devices installing or servicing Install in a suitable enclosure Keep free from contaminants N module and power pole assembly from all power sources before SHOCK HAZARD To prevent electrical shock disconnect the control ON Y CY Le A Control Module Power Pole Assembly Replacement Figure 97 Control Module Removal 90 180 A Devices Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Step 2 Re
410. tus PTC Status None always 0 PX Input 2 Input 2 DAC 1 Shorted Status CT Loss Status None always 0 PX Input 3 Input 3 DAC 2 Open Status None always 0 None always 0 PX Input 4 Input 4 DAC 1 Shorted Status None always 0 None always 0 Bit Outputs Bit Outputs are used to connect to real world output devices pilot lights relays etc that are wired to an Auxiliary Relay in the SMC 50 Available bit outputs from the DeviceLogix program include Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 297 Appendix F Using DeviceLogix Bit Outputs Name Description 11 Hardware Boolean Outputs Aux 1 Aux2 Auxiliary Relays available on the control board PX Aux1 PX Aux3 Auxiliary Relays 1 3 available on the Digital 1 0 150 SM4 Expansion Card 7 Network Boolean Outputs Coast Start Stop CLR Fault Slow Speed Emergency Run Motor Heater These outputs can be used to control the SMC 50 in the same way a PLC can control the SMC 50 See Table 103 Logic Command Word Control on page 211 for a definition of these control bits The Auxiliary Relays must be programmed to Device Logix to allow the DeviceLogix program to control each specific relay For example if you want to control Aux 1 on the control module you must configure Aux1 Config parameter 172 to Device Logix Similarly to control Aux 1 in a Digital 1 0 150 SM4 expansion
411. uator e When the counter reaches DLX Input 1 DLX Input 2 reset the counter Parameter Configuration The following parameters are configured for this example Port Parameter No Parameter Value Description 335 DLX Input 1 5 Send 5 boxes down conveyer A 336 DLX Input 2 5 Send 5 boxes down conveyer B 8 6 Auxiliary 1 is used to control the Diverter In Port 8 Aux 1 Config Device Logix order for Device Logix to control the Auxiliary it Parameter 6 must be configured to Device Logix Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 301 Appendix F Using DeviceLogix Figure 100 Function Block Programming EnstleOu D C CUEnstle C Enablein EnstleOu D Emi D Example 3 Wet Well Operation This example demonstrates how basic control logic can be used for motor control It is assumed that a Digital I O 150 SM4 option module is installed in Port 8 Figure 101 Wet Well Inflow t e P Critical High Level Sensor q High Level Sensor q Low Level Sensor COTES Outflow 302 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Using DeviceLogix Appendix F The application consists of the following discrete I O Type Location of 1 0 Name Description ais Indicates a critically high level It is normally a backup to Port 8 Input 2 uel High Leve
412. ue 1 File Setup Group Adv Tuning or by pressing and holding the SMC 50 s Reset button for 10 seconds with his automatically the first time Which is accessed from the the motor stopped AStart Delay Time can also be programmed to delay starting for a period of time after the initiation of the START command The Start Delay parameter can be accessed from the Group Starting selection see Figure 85 on page 159 In addition to Stop Mode for SMB a Braking Current value must be configured from the Group Stopping selection see Figure 85 on page 159 O To use Ext Braking one of the Auxiliary Outputs must be programmed to Ext Brake When programmed fo he STOP time parameter has timed out 6 Any auxiliary output configured for Aux Control using the AuxX Config parameter will be under control of Control Parameter 180 See Parameter 180 information for bit assignments NOTE This function enables forcing an output ON or OFF r Ext Brake the function of this Auxiliary is to energize the external brake device to stop the motor The relay stays ON from the beginning of the STOP command until its associated bit from the Aux ATTENTION For Overload Protection it is critical that the data be entered into the SMC 50 as it appears on the motor nameplate Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Torque Start with Stop Programming Chapter 5 To program a Torque Start with simple Stop o
413. ue and counts down each time the motor is started The user can program the maximum number of starts within a sliding one hour 28 Starts per Hour 1 99 99 NA window Once the number of starts per hour is reached any additional starts will R W cause a fault The highest line voltage frequency that can be applied to the SMC 50 before 29 Freq High F Lvl Hz 45 66 63 NA causing a Freq High F Lvl fault The Freq High bit in the Starter Fault En parameter R W must be set to signal a fault The lowest line voltage frequency that can be applied to the SMC 50 before 30 Freq Low F Lvl Hz 45 66 47 NA causing a Freq Low F Lvl fault The Freq Low bit in the Starter Fault En parameter R W must be set to signal a fault The highest line voltage frequency that can be applied to the SMC 50 before 31 Freq High A Lvl Hz 45 66 63 NA causing a Freq High F Lvl alarm The Freq High bit in the Starter Alarm parameter R W must be set to signal an alarm The lowest line voltage frequency that can be applied to the SMC 50 before 32 Freq Low A Lvl Hz 45 66 47 NA causing a Freq Low F Lvl alarm The Freq Low bit in the Starter Alarm parameter R W must be set to signal an alarm Allows the user to enable the SMC 50 to auto restart for up to five attempts 133 Restart Attempts 0 5 0 NA after a thyristor has failed to fire and results in an open gate fault trip RW 134 Restart Dly Secs 0 60 0 NA yee a delay time prior to the SMC 50 s attempt to restart the motor after
414. uent fault occurs R Snapshot of the average current Total Harmonic Distortion THD when a fault 330 SSTHD lave 0 0 1000 0 0 A occurs The value is overwritten if a subsequent fault occurs R E Snapshot of the product status when a fault occurs The value is overwritten if a R subsequent fault occurs bit 0 1 Ready Enabled Ready 0 Not Ready bit1 Power Applied to Motor Gating SCRs or Bypass closed Running 0 Power NOT Applied to Motor bit 2 ABC Phasing Phasing 0 CBA Phasing bit3 3 phase is valid Phasing Active 0 No valid 3 phase detected bit 4 Performing a Start Maneuver slow speed not included Starting Accel 0 Not Performing a Start Maneuver bit 5 Performing a Stop Maneuver coast to stop not included Stopping Decel 0 Not Performing a Stop Maneuver aN bit 6 Alarm Present roduct 331 Status 0 65535 0 Alarm 0 No Alarm Present bit7 1 Fault Condition Exists and hasn t been cleared Fault 0 No Fault Condition bitg At Full Voltage Applied Bypass or full SCR conduction Speed 0 Not Full Voltage Applied bit 9 Start Isolate Contactor Enabled Start lsol ate 0 Start lsolate Contactor Disabled bit 10 Bypass Contactor Enabled Bypass 0 Bypass Contactor Disabled bit 11 indicates that the SMC is ready to accept a Start command The device is not Ready faulted or in the process of stopping starting or jogging bit 12 13
415. ule firmware Exp Incompat x027 In All Modes e Controller firmware is not e Replace defective module compatible with the expansion module e Expansion module is defective e Expansion module is loose or e Reseat and or replace loose removed module and removed tighten module screws e Expansion module is defective e Replace defective expansion module In All Modes e Expansion module is inserted into an Update control module firmware Expansion x028 incompatible control module port number e Controller firmware is not compatible with the expansion module e The number of starts within the last Wait for the hour to expire then restart the motor hour has exceeded the programmed Reduce the actual number of starts per hour or Starts per Hour 29 Starting value increase the programmed start time if allowed by Programmed setting is incorrect for the application the application and controller thermal limits Turn off this fault alarm feature Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 231 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Table 111 Fault Display Explanation Display Fault Code Fault Enabled Possible Causes Possible Solutions e Loose CT cable connection between Remove the control module from the power section the power section and the control verify connectors TB2 A TB3 B and TB4
416. upport be contacted for 204 Pings ae NA assistance before attempting to do so R W Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 265 Appendix B Parameter Information Table 143 Parameter 205 226 Min Max Read Write Number Name Units Default Enum Text Description Access 205 0 206 10 207 20 208 30 209 40 zo i 50 360 360 Timing parameters used in speed measurement algorithms These Phase Shift 0 NA parameters are not typically modified and it is recommended that RA R W 211 60 Technical Support be contacted for assistance before attempting to do so 212 70 213 80 214 90 215 100 216 Board Temp C 25 100 20 NA Displays the internal temperature of the SMC control module R None Input Output Analog 0 27 E 0 5 future xp 7 Config i0 GndF PTC CT Displays the type of expansion board plugged into Expansion Port 7 R DIP Switch Seq Start future None Input Output Analog 0 218 E 0 5 future xp 8 Config i0 GndF PTC CT Displays the type of expansion board plugged into Expansion Port 8 R DIP Switch Seq Start future None Input Output Analog 0 719 E 0 5 future 5 xp 9 Config i0 GndF PTC CT Displays the type of expansion board plugged into Expansion Port 9 R DIP Switch Seq Star future Be 0 1000 Provides the ability to configure the time
417. urable Alarm and Fault can be individually enabled or disabled In addition many Alarms and Faults have a user defined time delay available to help limit nuisance tripping A Fault condition results in a controller shutdown An alarm can be used to alert an operator to a pending fault Motor and starter faults can be individually configured for automatic reset restart after configuring the number of restart attempts and restart time delay Restart attempts and restart delay are universal to all faults See the Auto Restart from Fault section in this chapter for additional details A multi colored red green amber STATUS LED is located on the front of the SMC S50 directly below the bezel pocket for the 20 HIM A6 Figure 75 Controller Status LED OLY gt o ET RB 25 00000000000 Controller 1 Status LED I O a ea a veer ey sath fae ra 4 LED Display Fault Condition ny N na p T3 6 Solid RED NON resettable fault has occurred o Q o Q o f 9 u Flashing RED Resettable fault has occured Additional diagnostic LEDs are located on the optional Bulletin 150 SM6 Parameter Configuration Module PCM This module provides simple and limited parameter configurations For additional diagnostic LED information see Chapter 9 Diagnostics Rockwell Automation Publication 150
418. ut to the DeviceLogix Engine R W General purpose datalink used to select another parameter within the 338 DOLE Input 2 0 159999 1 NA SMC 50 as an input to the DeviceLogix Engine RAW General purpose datalink used to select another parameter within the 339 DLX DL Input 3 0 159999 1 NA SMC 50 as an input to the DeviceLogix Engine RW S General purpose datalink used to select another parameter within the 340 DLX DL Input 4 0 159999 1 NA SMC 50 as an input to the DeviceLogix Engine RAW 5 General purpose datalink used to select another parameter within the 341 DLX DL Input 5 0 159999 1 NA SMC 50 as an input to the DeviceLogix Engine R W General purpose datalink used to select another parameter within the 342 DLX DL Input 6 0 159999 1 NA SMC 50 as an input to the DeviceLogix Engine RAN _ 2147483648 General purpose parameter that can be written by the DeviceLogix engine 343 DLX Output 1 2147483647 0 NA and monitored from a HIM or network device R 2147483648 General purpose parameter that can be written by the DeviceLogix engine 344 DLX Output 2 2147483647 0 NA and monitored from a HIM or network device R Ready Allows the user to enable or disable the DeviceLogix engine Once the 345 DLX Command Enable Enable or Disable command has been executed the parameter will R W Disable automatically revert back to Ready 346 DLX Status rnane Indicates the current state of the DeviceLogix engine R 150 SM6 PCM Informati
419. ve the Jam Fault Level Jam F Lyl for a time equal to the Jam Fault Delay Jam F Dly then a Fault will be generated See Table 44 and Figure 79 Jam protection is enabled or disabled using the Jam bit in the Motor Fault Enable Parameter 230 Jam Alarm In addition to the Fault a Jam Alarm is also available This is set up exactly like the Fault Jam using Jam Alarm Level and Jam Alarm Delay This Alarm is enabled or disabled using the Jam bit in the Motor Alarm Enable Parameter 231 Table 44 Jam Detection Parameter List NameO B Mne Inozo T am 114 Jam F Lvl 0 1000 FLC 115 Jam F Dly 0 1 99 0 R W SECS 116 Jam A Lvl 0 1000 FLC 117 Jam A Dly 0 1 99 0 SECS As displayed on the HIM or DriveExplorer configuration tools Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 119 Chapter4 Protection amp Diagnostic Functions Real Power Protection MWatts 120 Figure 79 Jam Detection User Defined Trip Level FLC 100 4 Running gt lt Jam gt Time in Seconds Motor Over Power Real Fault amp Alarm Motor Over Power Real Fault Code 44 A Motor Over Power Real Fault Code 44 condition occurs when the real power being consumed by the motor has risen above a user defined level MWatts Ov F Lvl Parameter 90 for the user defined time MWatts Ov F Dly Parameter 91 This over power real Fault is enabled or disabled using the MWatts Over bit
420. voltage start output voltage to the motor reaches full voltage within five line power cycles Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 167 Chapter 5 Programming 168 To provide a Full Voltage Start to the motor the only start parameter that requires adjustment is the Starting Mode The Basic parameter set should be used to program Full Voltage Start to ensure configuration of other motor configuration and basic protection parameters To use the Basic parameter set to program a Full Voltage Start and Simple or Stop Mode operation the following parameters are provided for user adjustment The Basic Setup parameter set can be accessed with the HIM see Figure 88 on page 175 Parameter Option default Motor Config Setting for the motor configuration Line Connected Wye or Inside the Delta Line Delta NOTE In the AUTO Detect default selection the controller will automatically check the motor configuration Auto Detect Line Voltage Select the value of line voltage being used in the system The correct line voltage value must be entered for the voltage protection functions to work properly 0 700V 480V Starting Mode This mode must be programmed for Full Voltage Start Full Voltage Ramp Time NOT used for Full Voltage Start 0 1000 10 seconds Initial Torque NOT used for Full Voltage Start 0 90 70 LRT Current Limit Level NOT used for Full Voltage St
421. wer Adder for 150 SM3 30 VA 4W ae Ta e i add to Tosa 50 VA ZW 150 SM6 5 VA 1W 20 COMM X 25 VA 4W Add to Base power to obtain total power requirements Max 1 of each option type per control module Each control terminal is removable and will accept a 14 AWG maximum and 24 AWG minimum wire size The terminals are UL Recognized to accept a maximum of two 16 AWG wires per terminal See the product nameplate prior to applying control power Table 6 provides the terminal wire capacity the tightening torque requirements and the wire strip length for all SMC 50 control wiring and option module wiring Table 6 Control and Option Module Wiring Specifications Wire Size 0 2 2 5 mm 24 14 AWG Maximum Torque 0 8 Nem 7 Ibein Maximum Wire Strip Length 7 mm 0 27 in Screw Type M3 Slotted The SCR heat sink fan of the SMC 50 is located at the bottom of the power assembly The fan is designed to cycle ON OFF as necessary to cool the assembly SCRs The fan and fan cover are field replaceable See Appendix C Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 35 Chapter2 Installation amp Wiring Control Terminal Designations 36 Fan Terminations The fan is self powered from the power applied to Control Terminals 1 and 2 on the control module Fan power is automatically configured based on control power No user connections or configuration is required As shown in Figure 19 the SMC 50
422. when X 6 Aux Config io NA Ext Brake tisnotactive R W Device Logix Aux is controlled by the Device Logix program Aux Control When an auxiliary output is configured for Aux Control a bit within the parameter Aux Control will control the state of the auxiliary With an auxiliary configured as Network 1 it is controlled over the LAN as Network 1 Relay 1 Network 2 With an auxiliary configured as Network 2 it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 2 Network 3 With an auxiliary configured as Network 3 it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 3 With an auxiliary configured as Network 4 it is controlled over the LAN as Network 4 Relay 4 Enables the user to invert the logic of the Aux1 output When disabled it is A a normally open relay output contact when de energized By enabling the 0 1 invert function the relay contact becomes a normally closed contact when X 7 Aux1 Invert 0 NA de energized R W Disable Aux1 Relay Output is not inverted N 0 Enable Aux1 Relay Output is inverted N C 0 0 10 0 A user selected time delay in activating the Aux1 Relay Contact can be X 8 Aux1 On Delay 0 0 sec NA programmed R W x9 Aux1 Off Delay aoe ae NA ane time delay in de activating the Aux1 Relay Contact can be R W Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 279 Appendix B
423. y 263 B A Un A Dly Freq Low 228 B A A Dly 264 B A Motor Restart En 229 A Parameter Management 265 M B A Voltage P N Ave 230 B A Fault En 266 M B A A N Motor 231 B A Alarm En 267 M B A Volts Phase B N 232 B A Ov F Lvl 268 M B A C N 233 B A Ov F Dly 269 M B A A 234 B A Ov A Lvl 270 M B A Real Power B 235 B A MVAR Ov A Diy 271 M B A C 236 B A Un F Lvl 272 M B A Real Demand 237 B A Un F Dly 273 M B A Max Real Demand 238 B A Un A Lvl 274 M B A A 239 B A Un A Dly 275 M B A Reactive Power 240 B A Ov F Lvl 276 M B A C MWA 241 B A Ov F Dly 277 M B A Reactive Power M B A Access Level see Parameter Access Level using the HIM The for MVAR indicates power consumed 180 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Programming Chapter 5 Table 77 SMC 50 Parameter Linear List Parameter 278 333 Number Name Number Name 278 M B A Ce 307 A SS Ref Gain _____ _ Reactive Energy 279 M B A PO 308 A SS Trans Gain 280 B A Reactive Energy 309 M B A Input Status 281 M B A Reactive Demand 310 B A A Lvl Locked Rotor 282 M B A Max Reactive Demand 311 B A A Dly 283 M
424. ys 0 PX In 2 None always 0 Analog In 2 Param X 16 None always 0 None always 0 298 Rockwell Automation Publication 150 UM011C EN P March 2014 Tips Program Examples Using DeviceLogix Appendix F Analog Outputs Available analog outputs from the DeviceLogix program are all 32 bit integers and include the following data points Analog Outputs Name Description 2 Network Analog Outputs A Out 1 A Out 2 General Purpose Output parameters Param 343 344 Data types The SMC 50 DeviceLogix implementation supports 32 bit integers only DeviceLogix scratchpad registers The SMC 50 provides 2 input parameter 335 336 and 2 output parameter 343 344 scratchpad registers The input parameters can be written by any configuration or network device and used as an input to DeviceLogix The output parameters can be written by DeviceLogix and displayed on configuration devices or read using network devices SMC 50 DeviceLogix Input Datalinks P337 P342 The SMC 50 provides parameters directly to DeviceLogix as analog inputs Additional parameters from the host and expansion cards can be made available through the DeviceLogix Datalink inputs The value of the parameter linked to by the datalink will be made available to DeviceLogix For example configuring a datalink to Mtr Therm Usage parameter 18 would make the motor thermal usage value available to Devic
425. ze 16 bit 16 bit A B C D 4 4 X X 12 12 x X X 20 20 x X x X 28 28 x X x x x 36 36 x X x x x x To configure DataLinks see Configuring DataLink on page 212 Product Functional Logic Status Parameter 43 is used to provide SMC 50 functional logic status to communication devices The following table details Parameter 43 which is a read only parameter Table 102 Logic Status Bit Description Number Status Function 1 0 0 Enabled Ready Control Power Applied Control Power NOT applied Power applied to motor 1 Running gating SCRs or bypass closed Power NOT applied to motor 2 Phasing ABC phasing CBA phasing 3 Phasing Active Three phase is valid No valid three phase detected Performing a start maneuver 4 Starting Accel slow speed not included Not performing a start maneuver Performing a stop maneuver F 5 Stopping Decel coast to stop not included Not performing a stop maneuver 6 Alarm Alarm present No alarm present 7 Fault Fault condition exists and has No fault condition not been cleared Full voltage applied 8 At Speed bypass or full SCR conduction No full voltage applied 9 Start Isolation Sle Caton contagio Start lsolation contactor disabled enabled 10 Bypass Bypass contactor enabled Bypass contactor disabled 11 Ready Ready to Run Control Inhibit Active do not run 12 13 Reserved Always 0 14 Input 1 Control Module Input 1 Statu

SMC-50 Smart Motor Controller

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents